2155cdn - Printer DELL - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL 2155cdn DELL

Dell™ 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer User's Guide

Contents

Dell™ 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer User's Guide 1 Before Beginning 25

A Notes, Notices, and Cautions ..... 27

1 Dell™ 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer User's Guide 29

2 Finding Information 31

3 Product Features 35

4 About the Printer 39

Front and Rear View 40

Front View 40

Rear View 41

Space Requirements 41

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) 42

Operator Panel 43

Securing the Printer 43

Ordering Supplies 43

Setting up the Printer (Printer Setup) 47

5 Preparing Printer Hardware 49

Removing Tape 49

Removing the Print Head Device (PHD) Ribbons ..... 50

Installing the Toner Cartridges. 50

6 Installing Optional Accessories ..... 53

Installing the Optional Memory Module ..... 53

Printing System Settings Report ..... 56

Updating Your Driver to Detect Memory Module 58

Installing the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder ..... 59

Printing System Settings Report ..... 61

Updating Your Driver to Detect 250-Sheet Feeder 63

Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter ..... 64

Verifying the Contents of the Box ..... 65

Installing the Wireless Adapter Using Video Instructions

(Recommended) 65

Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter. . . . . 66

Printing System Settings Report ..... 67

Determining the Wireless Network Settings . . . 68

Configuring the Optional Wireless Adapter ..... 69

Using Wizard Setup to Configure a Wireless Adapter 70

Using Advanced Setup to Configure a Wireless Adapter 72

Constructing a New Wireless Network Environment for Your

Computer 79

2 Contents

7 Connecting Your Printer 91

Connecting Printer to Computer or Network ..... 92

Direct Connection 92

Network Connection 94

Connecting the Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Turning on the Printer 97

Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel ..... 97

8 Setting the IP Address 103

Assigning an IP Address 103

When Using the Easy Setup Navigator ..... 103

When Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . 104

When Using the Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Verifying the IP Settings 106

Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report 106

Verifying the Settings Using Ping Command . . 107

9 Loading Paper 109

10 Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers 113

Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status ..... 113

When Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . 113

When Using the Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Disabling Firewall Before Installing Printer Software 114

Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD 114

Direct Connection Setup 115

Network Connection Setup 118

Network Printer Setup on a Local Network . . . 118

Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network . . 124

Setting Up for Shared Printing 131

Point and Print 133

Peer-to-Peer 136

11 Installing Printer Drivers on the Macintosh Computers 141

Installing the Drivers and Software ..... 141

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or 10.6 . . . 142

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11 ..... 143

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.3.9 . . . . . . 145

Configuring Settings....146

12 Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers (CUPS) 147

Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS/5 Client 147

Setup Overview 147

Installing the Printer Driver ....147

Setting Up the Queue .....148

Setting the Default Queue .....149

Specifying the Printing Options .....149

Uninstalling the Printer Driver .....149

Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 . . 150

Setup Overview 150

Installing the Printer Driver 150

Setting Up the Queue 151

Setting the Default Queue ..... 152

Specifying the Printing Options 152

Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator 153

Uninstalling the Printer Driver....153

Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 . . 154

Setup Overview 154

Installing the Printer Driver 154

Setting Up the Queue 154

Setting the Default Queue ..... 156

Specifying the Printing Options ..... 156

Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator 157

Uninstalling the Printer Driver....157

Using Your Printer 159

13 Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . 161

Overview 161

When Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . 162

When Using the Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool ..... 163

Printer Status 163

Printer Jobs 163

Printer Settings 164

Print Server Settings 164

Copy Printer Settings 164

Print Volume 164

Address Book 164

Printer Information 164

Tray Settings 164

E-Mail Alert 165

Set Password 165

Online Help 165

Order Supplies at: 165

Contact Dell Support at: 165

Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool0. 165

Setting Up From Web Browser 165

Setting Up From Operator Panel .....168

Page Display Format 168

Top Frame 168

Left Frame 170

Right Frame 171

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items ..... 172

Details of the Menu Items .....173

Printer Status....176

Printer Jobs 178

Printer Settings 179

Print Server Settings 215

Copy Printer Settings 245

Print Volume 245

Address Book 248

Tray Settings 259

14 Print Media Guidelines ..... 261

Paper 261

Paper Characteristics 261

Recommended Paper 262

Unacceptable Paper 263

Selecting Paper 263

Selecting Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads . . 264

Selecting Pre-Punched Paper 264

Printing on a Letterhead (Pre-Printed and Pre-Punched Paper) 265

Envelopes. 267

Labels.... 268

Storing Print Media 269

Identifying Print Media and Specifications ..... 270

Supported Paper Sizes 270

Supported Paper Types 271

Paper Type Specifications 271

15 Loading Print Media 273

Capacity 273

Print Media Dimensions 273

Loading Print Media in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder 273

Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder 276

Loading Letterhead (Pre-Printed and Pre-Punched Paper) 278

Loading Print Media in the SSF 280

Loading an Envelope in the SSF ..... 281

Using the SSF 283

Linking Trays 284

16 Operator Panel 285

Using the Operator Panel Buttons....285

Printing a Panel Settings Page 287

When Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . 287

When Using the Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 289

17 Printing 291

Tips for Successful Printing....291

Tips on Storing Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Avoiding Paper Jams 291

Sending a Job to Print 292

Canceling a Print Job 292

Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel ..... 292

Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows 293

Duplex Printing 293

Duplex Printing With Duplexer (Dell 2155cdn Multifunction

Color Printer Only) 294

Duplex Printing Without Duplexer (Dell 2155cn Multifunction

Color Printer Only) 294

Using Booklet Print (Dell 2155cn and 2155cdn Models) 296

Using the Stored Print Function....297

Secure Print 298

Private MailBox Print 298

Public MailBox Print 298

Proof Print 298

Storing Print Jobs 299

Printing the Stored Jobs 299

Specifying Your Password on the Operator Panel (Secure

Print/Private MailBox Print) 299

Deleting Stored Jobs 300

Printing from USB Memory 300

Supported File Formats 301

PDF Port Direct Printing 301

Printing a Report Page 302

Printing System Settings Report ..... 302

Printing Font Sample List 303

Printer Settings 304

Printing System Settings Report ..... 304

Using the Operator Panel to Change the Printer Settings 305

Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change the

Printer Settings 306

Resetting Defaults 308

Adjusting the Language 309

18 Copying 311

Loading Paper for Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Selecting Paper Tray 311

Preparing a Document 311

Making Copies From the Document Glass ..... 312

Making Copies From the ADF 313

Setting Copy Options 314

Number of Copies 315

Color 316

Select Tray 316

SSF Paper Size 317

SSF Paper Type 318

Collated 319

Reduce/Enlarge 320

Document Size 322

Original Type 323

Lighter/Darker 323

Sharpness 324

Color Saturation 325

Auto Exposure....326

2 Sided 326

Multiple-Up 328

Margin Top/Bottom 329

Margin Left/Right 330

Margin Middle 331

Changing the Default Settings 331

Setting the Power Saver Timer Option 332

19 Scanning 335

Scanning Overview 335

Scanning - With scanner driver 335

Scanning - Without scanner driver ..... 336

Scanning From the Operator Panel 337

Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver. 339

Scan Setting Tool 342

IP Address Settings 343

Password Setting 345

Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver 346

Scanning to Network 348

Overview 349

Procedures 350

Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only) 350

Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only) ..... 352

Setting a Destination Using an Address Book . . 359

Sending the Scanned File on the Network . . . . 368

Scanning to a USB Memory 368

Types of a USB Memory 369

Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Image . 369

Inserting and Removing a USB Memory ..... 370

Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image ..... 370

Setting an E-Mail Alert 370

Registering a New User 371

Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File . . . . 372

20 Faxing 375

Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Easy Setup Navigator 375

Setting Your Country 376

Setting the Printer ID 376

Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters . . . . 377

Keypad Letters and Numbers 378

Changing Numbers or Names 379

Inserting a Pause 379

Setting the Time and Date 379

Changing the Clock Mode 380

Setting Sounds 380

Speaker Volume 380

Ringer Volume 381

Specifying the Fax Settings Options 381

Changing the Fax Settings Options ..... 381

Available Fax Settings Options 382

Advanced Fax Settings 386

Sending a Fax 389

Loading an Original Document 389

Adjusting the Document Resolution ..... 391

Adjusting the Document Contrast ..... 392

Sending a Fax Automatically 393

Sending a Fax Manually 394

Confirming Transmissions 395

Automatic Redialing 395

Sending a Delayed Fax 395

Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)....396

Example 397

Receiving a Fax. 404

About Receiving Modes 404

Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes 404

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode 404

Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode 404

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans

Machine/Fax 405

Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone 405

Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD ..... 406

Receiving Faxes in the Memory ..... 406

PollingReceive 407

Automatic Dialing 407

Speed Dialing 407

Setting Speed Dial 407

Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial 408

Group Dialing 409

Setting Group Dial 409

Editing Group Dial 410

Sending a Fax Using Group Dial (Multi-address Transmission) 411

Printing a Speed Dial List ..... 412

Phone Book 412

Other Ways to Fax 413

Using the Secure Receiving Mode ..... 413

Using an Answering Machine 415

Using a Computer Modem 416

Printing a Report 416

Speed Dial 417

Address Book 417

Server Address 417

Fax Activity 417

Fax Pending 417

Print Meter 417

Changing Setting Options 418

Know Your Printer 419

21 Understanding the Tool Box Menus . . 421

Printer Settings Report. 421

Printer Information 421

Menu Settings 422

Reports 426

TCP/IP Settings 427

Defaults Settings....427

Fax Settings 431

Printer Maintenance.... 433

System Settings 433

Date & Time 439

Paper Density 440

Color Registration Adjustment 440

Adjust Altitude 442

Reset Defaults 442

Non-Dell Toner 443

Initialize Print Meter 443

Tray Settings 443

TCP/IP Settings 446

Network Settings 447

Copy Defaults .....447

Scan Defaults 453

Fax Defaults 456

Print from USB Defaults ....458

Fax Settings....460

Diagnosis 463

Chart Print 463

Machine Check 464

Paper Wrinkle Check Mode .....465

Environment Sensor Info 466

Clean Developer 467

Refresh Mode 467

Resetting Defaults 467

When Using the Tool Box 467

22 Understanding the Printer Menus . . . 469

Report / List 469

System Settings 469

Panel Settings 469

PCL Fonts List 469

PCL Macro List 469

PDF Fonts List 470

Job History 470

Error History 470

Print Meter 470

Color Test Page 470

Protocol Monitor 470

Speed Dial 470

Address Book 470

Server Address 471

Fax Activity 471

Fax Pending 471

Stored Documents 471

Admin Menu 471

Phone Book 471

Print Language 472

Network 482

Fax Settings 490

System Settings 501

Maintenance 513

Secure Settings ....519

USB Settings 521

Defaults Settings 522

Copy Defaults 522

Scan Defaults 524

Fax Defaults 525

Print from USB Defaults 526

Tray Settings 526

Panel Language 530

Print Menu 530

Secure Print 530

Private Mail Box 531

Public Mail Box 532

Proof Print 533

Secure Receive 534

Copy Menu 534

Select Tray 534

SSF Paper Size 535

SSF Paper Type 536

Collated 537

Reduce/Enlarge 537

Document Size 538

Original Type 539

Lighter/Darker....539

Sharpness 540

Color Saturation 540

Auto Exposure 540

2Sided 540

Multiple-Up 541

Margin Top/Bottom 541

Margin Left/Right 541

Margin Middle 542

Scan Menu 542

Scan to USB Memory 542

Scan to E-Mail 542

Scan to Network 543

Scan to Application 543

File Format 544

Color Mode 544

Resolution 544

Document Size 545

Lighter/Darker 546

Sharpness 546

Contrast 546

Auto Exposure 547

Margin Top/Bottom 547

Margin Left/Right 547

Margin Middle 547

Fax Menu 548

Fax to 548

Resolution 548

Lighter/Darker 549

OnHook 549

Delayed Start 549

PollingReceive 550

Fax Cover Page 550

Print from USB Menu 550

Document 550

Select Tray 551

SSF Paper Size 551

SSF Paper Type 552

2Sided 552

Layout 553

PDF Password 553

Panel Lock 553

Enabling the Panel Lock 553

Disabling the Panel Lock ....554

Resetting Defaults 555

When Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . 555

23 Understanding Your Printer Software . 557

Printer Settings Utility 559

Status Window 560

Tool Box. 560

Updater 560

Troubleshooting 560

Address Book Editor 560

ScanButton Manager 560

Dell ScanCenter 560

Address Books 561

Types of Address Books 561

Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books 562

Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh....565

Status Monitor Widget Feature 566

Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget. . . 566

Installing the Status Monitor Widget. . . . . . . 566

Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget 567

Printer Status Window 568

Order Window 569

Preferences 570

Status Monitor Console for Linux 571

Status Monitor Console Feature ..... 572

Before Installing the Status Monitor Console . . 572

Installing the Status Monitor Console ..... 572

Starting the Status Monitor Console ..... 573

Printer Selection Window 573

Printer Status Window 574

Dell Supplies Management System Window. . . 575

Service Tag Window. 577

Settings Window 577

24 Understanding Fonts 581

Typefaces and Fonts 581

Weight and Style 581

Pitch and Point Size 582

Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts 583

Resident Fonts 585

Symbol Sets 586

Symbol Sets for PCL 5/PCL 6 . . . . . . . . . . 586

25 Understanding Printer Messages ..... 589

26 Printing With Web Services on Devices (WSD) 601

Adding Roles of Printer Services . . . . . . . . . . . 601

Printer Setup 602

Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard 602

27 Specifications 605

Operating System Compatibility 605

Power Supply 605

Dimensions 605

Memory 605

Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and Interface 606

MIB Compatibility 606

Environment 606

Operation 606

Print Quality Guarantee 606

Storage 607

Altitude 607

Cables 607

Copier Specifications 608

Scanner Specifications 609

Facsimile Specifications 609

Maintaining Your Printer 611

28 Maintaining Your Printer 613

Determining the Status of Supplies 613

Conserving Supplies 613

Ordering Supplies 614

Storing Print Media 614

Storing Consumables 615

Replacing the Toner Cartridges 615

Removing the Toner Cartridge....616

Installing a Toner Cartridge 617

Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit. . . . . . . 619

Removing the PHD Unit. 619

Installing a PHD Unit 622

Replacing the Retard Roller.... 627

Removing the Retard Roller in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray 628

Installing a Retard Roller in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray 629

Cleaning Inside the Printer 631

Cleaning the Feed Roller 631

Cleaning the CTD Sensor 637

Cleaning the Scanner 640

Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller 642

Adjusting Color Registration. 643

Printing the Color Registration Chart ..... 643

Determining Values 644

Entering Values....646

29 Removing Options 649

Removing the Optional Memory Module ..... 649

Removing the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder.... 652

Removing the Optional Wireless Adapter.... 654

30 Clearing Jams 659

Avoiding Jams 659

Identifying the Location of Paper Jams. 660

Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF 661

Clearing Paper Jams From the SSF 664

Clearing Paper Jams From the Standard 250-Sheet Tray 668

Clearing Paper Jams From the Fuser 672

Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplexer 676

Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder 677

Troubleshooting 683

31 Troubleshooting Guide 685

Basic Printer Problems 685

Display Problems 685

Printing Problems 686

Print Quality Problems 688

The output is too light 689

Toner smears or print comes off. 692

Random spots/Blurred images ..... 693

The entire output is blank 694

Streaks appear on the output. 696

Part or the entire output is black ..... 697

Pitched color dots 698

Vertical blanks. 699

Ghosting 701

Light-induced fatigue 702

Fog 703

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO) 704

Jagged characters 705

Banding 706

Auger mark 706

Wrinkled/Stained paper 707

Damage on the leading edge of paper ..... 709

Jam/Alignment Problems.... 710

The top and side margins are incorrect ..... 710

Color registration is out of alignment ..... 710

Images are skewed. 712

Standard 250-Sheet Tray Misfeed Jam .....712

SSF Misfeed Jam 714

Optional 250-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam ..... 716

Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM) ..... 717

Exit Jam (Exit Sensor Off JAM) ..... 717

Standard 250-Sheet Tray/Optional 250-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam 718

SSF Multi-feed Jam 718

Noise 719

Copy Problem 720

Fax Problems 720

Scanning Problems 723

Problems With Installed Optional Accessories ..... 727

Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems ..... 728

Other Problems 730

Contacting Service 732

Appendix 737

B Appendix 739

Dell™ Technical Support Policy 739

Online Services 739

Warranty and Return Policy.... 740

Recycling Information 740

Contacting Dell 740

Before Beginning

Notes, Notices, and Cautions

NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your printer.

NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem.

CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

© 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.

Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.

Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Active Directory are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Adobe and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries; Wi-Fi is a registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance; Red Hat and Red Hat Enterprise Linux are registered trademarks of Red Hat. Inc. in the U.S. and other countries; SUSE is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc., in the United States and other countries.

XML Paper Specification (XPS): This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369; DES: This product includes software developed by Eric Young ([e-mail]); AES: Copyright (c) 2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved. This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms; TIFF (libtiff): Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler and Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.; ICC Profile (Little cms): Copyright (c) 1998-2004 Marti Maria.

Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.

The printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.

As for RSA BSAFE

RSA BSAFE software, produced by RSA Security Inc., has been installed on this printer.

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS

This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.

September 2010 Rev. A01

Dell™ 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer User's Guide

Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and operation of your printer. For information on other documentation included with your printer, see "Finding Information."

To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell:

NOTE: For Macintosh, start the Status Monitor Widget, and then select Order Supplies button to open Order window.

1 Double-click the icon on your desktop.

If you cannot find the icon on your desktop, follow the procedure below.

a Click DLRMM.EXE under x:\abc\Dell
Printers\Additional Color Laser
Software\Reorder, where x:\abc is the location where the printer software is installed.
b Click File on the toolbar, and click Create Shortcut on the drop-down menu.
c Right-click the shortcut icon.
d Choose Send To from the drop-down menu, and then click Desktop (create shortcut) on the submenu.

The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.

You can also launch the Dell Supplies Management System by clickingStart → All Programs → Dell Printers → Additional Color Laser Software → Dell Supplies Management System.

2 Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site link

(www.dell.com/supplies), or order Dell printer supplies by phone.

To ensure that you get the best service, have your Dell printer Service Tag ready.

For information regarding locating your Service Tag number, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag."

Finding Information

NOTE: The following are the optional accessories that you can buy separately.

• Additional memory (512 MB)
• 250-sheet feeder
- Wireless adapter
- USB cable
- Ethernet cable

What are you looking for? Find it here

• Drivers for my printer
• My User's Guide

Blue circular object with white horizontal lines and a central hole, resembling a CD or DVD (no text or symbols visible)

The Drivers and Utilities CD contains setup video, documentation, and drivers for your printer. You can use the CD to install drivers or access your setup video and documentation.

Readme files may be included on your CD to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to your printer or advanced technical reference material for experienced users or technicians.

What are you looking for? Find it here

• How to use my printer

Quick Reference Guide

Dell™ 2010c/FTS Mode Multichannel Color Printer Quick Reference Guide About Your Printer Automotive Chancard Reaches (AVF) 3. Alt Retouch 4. Power Switch 5. Smart Speaker Group 6. Smart Speaker Group (AVF) 7. Auto Control 8. Audio Control 9. Audio Control 10. Audio Control 11. Audio Control 12. Audio Control 13. Audio Control 14. Audio Control 15. Audio Control 16. Audio Control 17. Audio Control 18. Audio Control 19. Audio Control 20. Audio Control 21. Audio Control 22. Audio Control 23. Audio Control 24. Audio Control 25. Audio Control 26. Audio Control 27. Audio Control 28. Audio Control 29. Audio Control 30. Audio Control 31. Audio Control 32. Audio Control 33. Audio Control 34. Audio Control 35. Audio Control 36. Audio Control 37. Audio Control 38. Audio Control 39. Audio Control 40. Audio Control 41. Audio Control 42. Audio Control 43. Audio Control 44. Audio Control 45. Audio Control 46. Audio Control 47. Audio Control 48. Audio Control 49. Audio Control 50. Audio Control 51. Audio Control 52. Audio Control 53. Audio Control 54. Audio Control 55. Audio Control 56. Audio Control 57. Audio Control 58. Audio Control 59. Audio Control 60. Audio Control 61. Audio Control 62. Audio Control 63. Audio Control 64. Audio Control 65. Audio Control 66. Audio Control 67. Audio Control 68. Audio Control 69. Audio Control 70. Audio Control 71. Audio Control 72. Audio Control 73. Audio Control 74. Audio Control 75. Audio Control 76. Audio Control 77. Audio Control 78. Audio Control 79. Audio Control 80. Audio Control 81. Audio Control 82. Audio Control 83. Audio Control 84. Audio Control 85. Audio Control 86. Audio Control 87. Audio Control 88. Audio Control 89. Audio Control 90. Audio Control 91. Audio Control 92. Audio Control 93. Audio Control 94. Audio Control 95. Audio Control 96. Audio Control 97. Audio Control 98. Audio Control 99. Audio Control

• Safety information
• Warranty information

Product Information Guide

UAI® Process Product Information Guide ELSEVIA

CAUTION: Read and follow all safety instructions in your Product Information Guide prior to setting up and operating your printer.

What are you looking for? Find it here

• How to set up my printer

Setup diagram

graph TD
    A["Input Image"] --> B["Image Collection"]
    B --> C{Color Printer Setup}
    C -->|Yes| D["Output Display"]
    C -->|No| E["User Interface"]
    E --> F["Data Input"]
    F --> G["Output Display"]
    G --> H["Final Output"]

• Express Service Code and Service Tag

Service Tag Express Service Code xxxxxxxx 000 000 000 00

The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located inside the toner access cover of your printer.

- Latest drivers for my printer

Go to support.dell.com.

• Documentation for my printer

What are you looking for? Find it here

• Answers to technical service and support questions	support.dell.com provides several online tools, including:
	• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and online courses
	• Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as the printer drivers
	• Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair information
	• Downloads — Drivers
	• Manuals— Printer documentation and product specifications
	Go tosupport.dell.com. Select your region, and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information.

Product Features

This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links.

Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)

graph LR
    A["Input Document"] --> B["Processing Device"]
    B --> C["Output Image"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

The Print from USB Memory feature enables you to print files directly from a USB memory without requiring you to start your computer and an application.

Multiple Up in the Layout tab (N-up Print)

graph TD
    A["Computer"] -->|Data Packet 1| B["Printer"]
    B -->|Data Packet 2| A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333

The Multiple Up feature enables you to print documents as reduced-size documents containing 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 pages on a single sheet of paper by setting from the printer driver. This feature helps save paper.

Multiple-Up (2-in-1 Copy)

graph TD
    A["Input Image File A 1"] --> C["Device with Red Arrow"]
    B["Input Image File B 2"] --> C
    C --> D["Output Image with Red Arrow"]

You can copy documents as reduced-size two-page documents on one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting Multiple-Up on the operator panel. This feature helps save paper.

2 Sided (Duplex Copy)

graph TD
    A["User Profile"] --> B["Document Icon"]
    C["User Profile"] --> B
    D["User Profile"] --> B
    B --> E["Arrow Up/Down"]

You can copy documents on both sides of a sheet of paper by selecting 2Sided on the operator panel when you make a copy. This feature helps save paper.

Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image (Scan to E-mail)

graph TD
    A["Upload"] --> B["Download"]
    B --> C["Envelope"]
    C --> D["Arrow indicating direction of upload to download"]

When you want to send scanned data by e-mail, use the Scan to E-mail feature. You can directly send the data scanned as an e-mail attachment. You can choose destination e-mail addresses from the address book on the printer or server. Or, you can enter the address from the printer's operator panel using the numeric keypad.

Scanning to a USB Memory (Scan to USB Memory)

graph TD
    A["User"] -->|Download| B["Device"]
    B --> C["USB Icon"]
    C --> D["User ID Icon"]

With the Scan to USB Memory feature, you don't need a PC to connect a USB memory. You can specify the USB memory inserted into the printer's port as a data saving location when you scan data.

Scanning to Network (Scan to SMB/FTP)

graph TD
    A["File"] -->|Download| B["SMB"]
    B --> C["FTP"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

You can transfer data scanned to a PC or a server via SMB or FTP without service software. Although prior registration of the destination FTP server or PC on the address book is required, it helps save your time.

Making Copies From the Document Glass (Scan From Document Glass)

Simple illustration of a box with an open lid and a red downward arrow inside (no text or symbols)

You can scan the pages of a book or a brochure from the document glass. When you scan documents using the document glass, place them facing down.

Making Copies From the ADF (Scan From ADF)

Simple illustration of a box with a downward arrow, no text or symbols present

You can scan pieces of unbound paper using the ADF. When you scan documents using the ADF, load them facing up.

Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax) (Direct Fax from PC)

graph LR
    A["Computer monitor"] --> B["Printer"]
    B --> C{Feedback loop}
    C -->|Yes| D["Printer icon"]
    C -->|No| E["Printer icon"]

You can directly send faxes from your PC using the fax driver. You can specify the fax settings like the normal fax. Also, you can specify the recipient's fax number from the numeric keypad, or the address book or phone book.

Address Books (Address Book)

Diagram showing a device with speech bubbles and a speech bubble pointing to it, likely indicating chat or messaging.

Address Book simplifies the recipient specification. You can use the address book on the printer as well as on the server. Select the desired address or fax number from the address book when using the Scan to E-mail or Scan to SMB/FTP feature, or sending faxes.

About the Printer

This chapter provides an overview of your Dell™ 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

NOTE: In this manual, Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer is referred to as the "printer".

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Front and Rear View

Front View

Technical diagram of a printer with numbered parts and internal cross-section view

1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)	7 Duplexer (2155cdn only)
2 Side Button 8 Optional 250-Sheet Feeder
3 Power Switch 9 Standard 250-Sheet Tray
4 Toner Access Cover (toner cartridges inside)	10 Single Sheet Feeder (SSF)
5 Fuser 11 Front Cover

NOTE: You can open the front cover by pushing the side button (2).

NOTICE: To avoid irregular screen image or malfunctioning of your printer, avoid placing the printer in direct sunlight with the single sheet feeder opened.

Rear View

Technical diagram of a server rack with numbered components and an inset view highlighting internal wiring or connections.

1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) 6 "Blue" Plug
2 Control Board Cover 7 Power Connector
3 Control Board 8 Ethernet Port
4 Phone Connector 9 Wireless Adapter Socket
5 Wall Jack Connector 10 USB Port

Space Requirements

Provide enough room to open the printer trays, covers, and optional accessories, and for proper ventilation.

320 mm/12.60 inches 413 mm/16.27 inches 100 mm/3.94 inches 451 mm/17.75 inches 600 mm/23.62 inches 250 mm/9.84 inches 436 mm/17.16 inches 100 mm/3.94 inches

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Diagram of a printer with labeled parts including 1, 2, 3, and 4, showing internal structure and magnified detail view.

1 ADF Cover
2 Document Guides
3 Document Glass
4 Document Feeder Tray
5 Front USB Port

42 About the Printer

Operator Panel

Control panel interface with labeled buttons and input fields, including numeric keypad, function keys, and display icons

For more information on the operator panel, see "Using the Operator Panel Buttons."

Securing the Printer

To protect your printer from theft, you can use the optional Kensington lock. Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer.

Security Slot Security Slot

For details, see the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.

Ordering Supplies

You can order consumables from Dell online when using a networked printer. Enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser, launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the web address under Order Supplies at: to order toner or supplies for your printer.

You can also order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell:

NOTE: For Macintosh, start the Status Monitor Widget, and then select Order Supplies button to open Order window.

1 Double-click the icon on your desktop.

If you cannot find the icon on your desktop:

a Click DLRMM.EXE under x:\abc\Dell
Printers\Additional Color Laser
Software\Reorder, where x:\abc is the location where the printer software is installed.
b Click File on the toolbar, and then Create Shortcut on the drop-down menu.
c Right-click on the shortcut icon.
d Choose Send To from the drop-down menu, and then click Desktop (create shortcut) on the submenu.

The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.

You can also launch the Dell Supplies Management System by clickingStart → All Programs → Dell Printers → Additional Color Laser Software → Dell Supplies Management System.

2 Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site link

(www.dell.com/supplies), or order Dell printer supplies by phone.

To ensure that you get the best service, have your Dell printer's Service Tag ready.

For information regarding locating your Service Tag, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag."

Setting up the Printer (Printer Setup)

Preparing Printer Hardware

Removing Tape

1 Remove tapes and packaging material from the printer.

Illustration of a printer with yellow arrows indicating airflow or movement, no text or symbols present

2 Pull the protective sheet out of the printer.

Illustration of a printer with a hand inserting a yellow arrow into the print case (no text or symbols visible)

CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.

Removing the Print Head Device (PHD) Ribbons

1 Open the toner access cover.

Illustration of a printer with a hand inserting a card into a blue door, showing internal color bands (no text or symbols)

2 Completely pull out the eight yellow ribbons.

Illustration of a printer with cable being inserted into a rack, showing hands interacting with the device (no text or symbols present)

Installing the Toner Cartridges

1 Press and slide the blue latches of the four toner cartridges to the locked position.

Diagram illustrating printer operation with labeled parts and green arrows indicating process steps

2 Close the toner access cover.

3D rendering of a printer with a blue door and green arrow indicating a process (no text or symbols)

Installing Optional Accessories

You can make the printer more functional by installing the optional accessories. This chapter describes how to install the printer's options such as the memory module and optional 250-sheet feeder.

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Installing the Optional Memory Module

NOTE: Your printer supports additional 512 MB memory module.

1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.

2 Turn the screw on the control board cover counterclockwise.

NOTE: Loosen the screw. You do not need to remove the screw.

Illustration of a computer tower with a close-up view showing a hand inserting a component into a device (no text or symbols present)

3 Slide the control board cover towards the back of the printer.

Illustration of a computer tower with an inset showing a hand inserting a blue card into a device (no text or symbols present)

4 Open the control board cover completely.

3D diagram of a printer or printer unit with an open slot and a green arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols present)

5 Align the connector of the memory module with the slot and insert the memory module into the slot.

Illustration of a computer tower with an icon showing a green arrow pointing to a blue RAM module (no text or symbols present)

6 Push the memory module firmly into the slot.

Diagram showing a file organizer with an inset view of a printer's internal structure (no text or symbols present)

NOTE: Ensure that the memory module is firmly fixed in the slot and does not move easily.

7 Close the control board cover, and slide it towards the front of the printer.

Diagram showing a computer tower with a blue folder being inserted, and a magnified view of the internal components (no text or symbols present)

Illustration of a computer tower with a close-up view showing a hand inserting a component into a blue panel (no text or symbols present)

8 Turn the screw clockwise.

Illustration of a computer tower with a close-up view showing a hand inserting a green arrow into a device (no text or symbols present)

9 Turn on the printer.
10 Print the system settings report to confirm that the newly installed memory is detected by the printer.

Printing System Settings Report

When Using the Operator Panel

a Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

b Press button Syntlem Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

c Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

d Ensure that System Setting is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

The system settings report is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

a Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

b Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open.

c Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.

The Reports page appears.

d Click the System Settings button.

The system settings report is printed.

11 Confirm the amount of Memory Capacity listed in the system settings report under General.

If the memory capacity has not increased, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and re-install the memory module.

12 If you installed the optional memory module after installing the printer driver, update your driver by following the instructions for the operating system you are using. If the printer is on a network, update the driver for each client.

Updating Your Driver to Detect Memory Module

Microsoft® Windows®7/Windows 7 x64/Windows Server®2008 R2 x64	1 Click Start → Devices and Printers.2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Printer properties.3 Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.4 Click Apply, and then click OK.5 Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista®/Vista x64	1 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Properties.3 Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.4 Click Apply, and then click OK.5 Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 x64	1 Click Start → Control Panel → Printers.2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Properties.3 Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.4 Click Apply, and then click OK.5 Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2003 x64	1 Click start → Printers and Faxes.2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Properties.3 Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.4 Click Apply, and then click OK.5 Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.

If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these steps:

1 Click the Options tab, and then select Memory Capacity in the Items list box.

2 Select the total amount of the installed printer memory for the memory capacity setting.

3 Click Apply, and then click OK.

4 Close the Printers and Faxes(, Printers, or Devices and Printers) dialog box.

Installing the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder

CAUTION: If you install the optional 250-sheet feeder after setting up the printer, be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before starting this task.

1 Ensure that the printer is turned off, and then disconnect all cables from the back of the printer.
2 Remove all packaging from the optional 250-sheet feeder.
3 Place the optional 250-sheet feeder in the location that the printer is located.
4 Pull the standard 250-sheet tray out of the printer about 200mm . Hold the standard 250-sheet tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

3D illustration of a printer and its internal component, showing no text or symbols

5 Lift the printer and align the five guide pins of the optional 250-sheet feeder with the holes at the bottom of the printer. Gently lower the printer onto the optional 250-sheet feeder.

CAUTION: Two people are required to lift the printer. The printer should be lifted holding the front and back. Never lift the printer from its sides.

Diagram illustrating the process of printer internal components with green arrows indicating assembly steps

CAUTION: Be careful not to pinch your fingers when lowering the printer onto the optional 250-sheet feeder.

6 Secure the optional 250-sheet feeder to the printer by tightening the two screws provided with the feeder, with a coin or similar object.

Illustration of a printer with a magnified inset showing internal components (no text or symbols visible)

NOTE: The screw hole is located in 216 mm recess from the front of the printer.

7 Insert the standard 250-sheet tray into the printer, and push until it stops.

Illustration of a printer with a blue plastic tray inserted, showing internal components and a green arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

8 Re-connect all cables into the back of the printer, and turn on the printer.

NOTE: The printer will automatically detect the attached tray but will not detect the paper type.

9 Print the system settings report to confirm the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed correctly.

Printing System Settings Report

When Using the Operator Panel

a Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

b Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

c Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

d Ensure that System Setting is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

The system settings report is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

a Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

b Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open.

c Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.

The Reports page appears.

d Click the System Settings button.

The system settings report is printed.

10 Confirm Tray 2 (250 Sheet Feeder) is listed in the system settings report under Printer Options.

If the feeder is not listed, turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the optional 250-sheet feeder.

11 After loading paper in the optional 250-sheet feeder, specify the paper type from the printer operator panel.

a Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

b Press button Syntlem Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

c Press button Trial Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

d Press button T until 2 is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

e Press button Paper Type is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

f Press button until the paper type for the optional 250-sheet feeder is displayed, and then press the √ (Set) button.

g Confirm that the selected paper type is highlighted, and then press the ☐ (Menu) button.

12 If you installed the optional 250-sheet feeder after installing the printer driver, update your driver by following the instructions for each operating system. If the printer is on a network, update the driver for each client.

Updating Your Driver to Detect 250-Sheet Feeder

Microsoft Windows 7/Windows 7 x64/Windows Server 2008 R2 x64	1 Click Start → Devices and Printers.2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Printer properties.3 Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.4 Click Apply, and then click OK.5 Close the Devices and Printers dialog box.
Windows Vista/Vista x64	1 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Properties.3 Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.4 Click Apply, and then click OK.5 Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server 2008/Server 2008 x64	1 Click Start → Control Panel → Printers.2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Properties.3 Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.4 Click Apply, and then click OK.5 Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP/XP x64/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2003 x64	1 Click start → Printers and Faxes.2 Right-click the printer icon of the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer and select Properties.3 Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer.4 Click Apply, and then click OK.5 Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.

If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer, follow these steps:

1 Click the Options tab, and then select 250 Sheet Feeder on the Items list box.

2 Select Available for the optional 250-sheet feeder setting.

3 Click Apply, and then click OK.

4 Close the Printers and Faxes(, Printers, or Devices and Printers) dialog box.

Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter

The wireless adapter allows you to use the printer with wireless network connection.

The specifications of the wireless adapter are described below.

Item Specification
Connectivity Technology Wireless
Compliant Standards IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n
Bandwidth 2.4 GHz
Data Transfer Rate IEEE 802.11n: 65 MbpsIEEE 802.11g: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, and 6 MbpsIEEE 802.11b: 11, 5.5, 2, and 1 Mbps
Security 64 (40-bit key)/128	(104-bit key) WEP,WPA- PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA2-PSK (AES)(IEEE 802.1x attestation function of WPA 1x non-corresponds)
Wi-Fi ^ Protected Setup (WPS)	Push-Button Configuration (PBC),Personal Identification Number (PIN)

NOTE: When the wireless adapter is installed, you cannot use IEEE 802.1x authentication and/or the Ethernet port for a wired connection.

Verifying the Contents of the Box

Installing the Optional Wireless Printer Adapter Dell Wireless Adapter DELL® Installing the Optional Wireless Printer Adapter The wireless printer adapter offers you to use the prime with wireless network connections. The specifications of the wireless printer adapter are described below: Name Specification Community Technology Windows Compliant Standards DC116, DC116, and DC116 Standard 2.4 GBp Data Transfer Rate DC116: 87 Mbps DC116: 14, 40, 36, 24, 15, 12.9 and 8 Mbps DC116: 15, 57.2 and 11 Mbps Security #P-05 (Lab Basic) (200/0000000) P-05 (PLR) (PLR, TLR, ADR) PLR: P-05 (PLR, ADR) PLR: P-05 (PLR, ADR) P-05: P-05 (PLR, ADR) P-05: P-05 (PLR, ADR) P-05: P-05 (PLR, ADR) P-05: P-05 (PLR, ADR) P-05: P-05 (PLR, ADR) P-05: P-05 (PLR, ADR) P-05: P-10 (Configuration - PRL) Personal Mechanical Number - PRL NOTE: Once the wireless printer adapter is installed, you cannot use ESS.## to authentication prior to the Ethernet port for a virtual connection. ©2017

NOTE: To complete wireless installation, you require the corresponding Drivers and Utilities CD that comes with your printer, which can also be downloaded from support.dell.com.

Installing the Wireless Adapter Using Video Instructions (Recommended)

To install the Dell wireless adapter, perform the following method.

1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD in your computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.

2 Select Optional Accessories Setup on the Easy Setup Navigator window.

Adobe Flash Player 8 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn/Dell 2155cdn Welcome! Language: English Easy Setup Guided Setup Step by step instructions to set up your printer Software Installation Install print driver and supporting software. Advance Setup Advance Tools More Information Optional Accessories Setup Users Guide Troubleshooting Guide Product Features Exit

3 Click Wireless adapter.

Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 21SSce/Dell 21SScdn Home > Optional Accessories Setup Select an option to view its installation instructions. 1 250-sheet feeder 2 Memory module 3 Wireless adapter Previous Next

The instruction video starts.

Follow the on-screen instructions to configure wireless settings.

Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter

NOTE: You can also install the Dell wireless adapter by following the instructions described in Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter provided with the wireless adapter.

1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.

2 Align the connector and the three protrusions of the wireless adapter with the four holes and insert the adapter.

Diagram showing a device with a blue connector inserted into a rack, connected to a green signal line (no text or symbols present)

NOTE: Ensure that the adapter is fully inserted and secured.

3 Turn on the printer.

NOTE: If a message displays telling you to make initial setup on the operator panel, always do as instructed.

4 Print the system settings report to confirm that the wireless adapter is installed correctly.

Printing System Settings Report

When Using the Operator panel

a Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

b Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

c Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

d Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

The system settings report is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

a Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer → Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

b Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open.

c Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.

The Reports page appears.

d Click the System Settings button.

The system settings report is printed.

5 Confirm that the Network (Wireless) section exists.

Dell® 2155cdn Color MFP Printer Settings General Electric Power Electric Power Power, Type, Modulator Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedance Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedences Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power Impedence Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedANCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power ImpedENCE Power impedsing the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of that power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the power of the other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own or other's other's own, one or more. Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hireeland) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (Hirond) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNON) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network (HIRNon) Network(IRELAND) - 80000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

NOTE: For more information on configuring the wireless adapter, see "Configuring the Optional Wireless Adapter."

Determining the Wireless Network Settings

You need to know the settings for the wireless network to set up the wireless printer. For details of the settings, contact your network administrator.

Wireless Settings	SSID Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network with up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
	Network Type Specifies the network type from Ad-hoc or Infrastructure.
Security Settings	Security Selects the security method from No security, WEP, WPA-PSK TKIP, and WPA2-PSK-AES/WPA-PSK-AES.
	Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from the list.
	WEP Key Specifies the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP is selected for Security.
	Pass Phrase Specifies the pass phrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 bytes long only when WPA-PSK is selected for Encryption.

Configuring the Optional Wireless Adapter

This section describes how to configure a wireless adapter through Easy Setup Navigator.

You can select a method to configure a wireless adapter from the following:

Wizard Setup through USB connection

Advanced Setup through	Network (Ethernet) connection
	WPS-PIN*1
	WPS-PBC*2
	Operator Panel
	Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

*1 WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by entering PIN assignments in the printer and computer. This setting, performed through access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.

*2 WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.

NOTE: The optional wireless adapter must be installed on the printer.

NOTE: For information on how to install a wireless adapter, see "Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter."

Using Wizard Setup to Configure a Wireless Adapter

1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.

Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 215Scn/Dell 215Scdn Welcome! Language: English Easy Setup Guided Setup Step by step instructions to set up your printer. Software Installation Install print driver and supporting software. Advance Setup Advance Tools More Information Optional Accessories Setup Users Guide Troubleshooting Guide Product Features Exit

2 Click Guided Setup.

Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cx/Dell 2155cdn Welcome! Language: English Easy Setup Guided Setup Step by step instructions to set up your printer Software Installation Install print driver and supporting software. Advance Setup Advance Tools More Information Optional Accessories Setup Users Guide Troubleshooting Guide Product Features Exit

3 Click Connect Your Printer

Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cr/Dell 2155cdn Home > Guided Setup > Remove Tape Remove tapes and packaging material from the printer 1 Remove Tape 2 Remove PHD Ribbons 3 Set Toner Cartridges 4 Install Optional Accessories 5 Connect Your Printer 6 Load Paper 7 Check Setup Return Next

4 Select Wireless Connection, and then click the Next button.

Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 215Scx/Dell 215Scdn Home > Guided Setup > Connect Your Printer Select your type of connection, and then click [Next] USB Connection Ethernet Connection Wireless Connection 1 Remove Tape 2 Remove PHD Ribbons 3 Set Toner Cartridges 4 Install Optional Accessories 5 Connect Your Printer 6 Load Paper 7 Check Setup Return Previous Next

The Wireless Connection window appears.

5 Select Wizard, and then click the Next button.

The instruction video starts.

Follow the on-screen instructions to configure wireless settings.

Using Advanced Setup to Configure a Wireless Adapter

You can configure the wireless adapter with the following connection methods:

• Network Cable
• WPS-PIN
  • W P S - P B C
• Operator Panel
  • Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.

Adobe Flash Player II Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn/Dell 2155cdn Welcome! Language: English Easy Setup Guided Setup Step by step instructions to set up your printer Software Installation Install print driver and supporting software. Advance Setup Advance Tools More Information Optional Accessories Setup Users Guide Troubleshooting Guide Product Features Exit

2 Click Guided Setup.

Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn/Dell 2155cdn Welcome! Language: English Easy Setup Guided Setup Step by step instructions to set up your printer Software Installation Install print driver and supporting software. Advance Setup Advance Tools More Information Optional Accessories Setup Users Guide Troubleshooting Guide Product Features Exit

3 Click Connect Your Printer:

Adobe Flash Player Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155ce/Dell 2155cdn Home > Guided Setup > Remove Tape Remove tapes and packaging material from the printer 1 Remove Tape 2 Remove PHD Ribbons 3 Set Toner Cartridges 4 Install Optional Accessories 5 Connect Your Printer 6 Load Paper 7 Check Setup Return Next

4 Select Wireless Connection, and then click the Next button.

Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155ce/Dell 2155cdn Home > Guided Setup > Connect Your Printer Select your type of connection, and then click [Next] USB Connection Ethernet Connection Wireless Connection Remove Tape Remove PHD Ribbons Set Toner Cartridges Install Optional Accessories Connect Your Printer Load Paper Check Setup Return Previous Next

The Wireless Connection window appears.

For Network, follow the on-screen instructions to configure wireless settings.

1 Select Network Cable, and then click the Next button.

The instruction video starts.

Follow the on-screen instructions to configure wireless settings, and then click the Next button.

The Advanced Configuration Tool starts.

2 Select the printer, and then click the Next button.

Wireless Network Settings screen appears.

NOTE: If the printer cannot detect your printer and your printer is not listed, click Enter IP Address button and enter the IP address of your printer, and then click the OK button.

3 Set the wireless network settings, and then click the Next button.

IP Address Settings screen appears.

NOTE: For details on each item, see "Assigning an IP Address."

4 Set the IP address of the printer, and then click the Next button.

Confirm the settings screen appears.

5 Confirm the settings, and then click the Apply button.

Complete configuration screen appears.

6 Click the Next button.

For WPS-PIN, WPS-PBC, Operator Panel, and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, follow the on-screen instructions to configure wireless settings.

To configure wireless settings without using the video instructions, follow the following instructions.

WPS-PIN

The PIN code of WPS-PIN can only be configured from the operator panel.

NOTE: WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by entering PIN assignments to a printer and computer. This setting, performed through access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button until Network is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

5 Press button until Wireless Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

6 Press button until WPS is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

7 Press button PuntiCode is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

8 Write down the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the first line of the panel display or press button until Print PIN Code is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

The PIN code is printed.

9 Ensure that Start Configuration is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

10 Ensure that the message Please wait Wireless Setting is displayed, and enter the PIN code displayed on the step 7 into the wireless LAN access point (Registrar).

NOTE: For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point.

11 When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.

WPS-PBC

You can start Push Button Control only from the operator panel.

NOTE: WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS.

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button Admtln Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button Network is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

5 Press button until Wireless Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
6 Press button until WPS is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
7 Ensure that Push Button Control is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
8 Press button until Start is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
9 Ensure that the message Please wait Wireless Setting is displayed, and start the WPS-PBC on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar), within two minutes of the step 7 operation.

NOTE: For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point.

10 When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.

Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press button until Network is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
5 Press Button until Wireless Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
6 Ensure that Manual Setup is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
7 Enter the SSID, and then press the √ (Set) button.
8 Select the network mode from Infrastructure and Ad-hoc depending on your environment.

When you select Infrastructure, proceed to step 9.

When you select Ad-hoc, proceed to step 10.

9 Select the encryption type from No Security, WEP (64Bit), and WEP (128Bit).

When you do not set security for your wireless network:

a Ensure that No Security is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

To use 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption:

a Press button WUtil(64Bit) or WEP (128Bit) is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

b Enter the WEP key, and then press the √ (Set) button.

c Select the transmit key from WEP Key 1 to WEP Key 4.

To use WPA-PSK-TKIP or WPA-PSK-AES encryption:

a Press button WPA-PSK-TKIP or WPA-PSK-AES is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

b Enter the passphrase, and then press the √ (Set) button.

10 Select the encryption type from No Security, WEP (64Bit), and WEP (128Bit).

When you do not set security for your wireless network:

a Ensure that No Security is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

To use 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption:

a Press button WUtil(64Bit) or WEP (128Bit) is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

b Enter the WEP key, and then press the √ (Set) button.

c Select the transmit key from WEP Key 1 to WEP Key 4.

11 When the operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

2 Click Print Server Settings.

3 Click Print Server Settings tab.

4 Click Wireless LAN, and then enter the SSID.

5 Select the network type from Infrastructure and Ad-Hoc.
6 Select the encryption type from No Security, WEP, WPA-PSK-AES, and WPA-PSK-TKIP, and then set each item for the encryption type selected.

NOTE: For details on each item, see "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."

7 Click the Apply New Settings button to apply the settings.

8 When the operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.

Constructing a New Wireless Network Environment for Your Computer

When you setup your wireless connection first time, the following settings are required on your computer.

For DHCP network:

1 Setting up your computer for wireless connectivity:

NOTE: If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using this tool. Or you can change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system. See the instructions below.

For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:

a Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked.

NOTE: Be sure to write down the current wireless computer settings in step e and step g so that you can restore them later.

e Click the Advanced button.

f Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.

g Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.

h Under the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.

Network name (SSID): dell_device

Network Authentication: Open

Data encryption: Disabled

Ad hoc network: checked

Wireless network properties Association Authentication Connection Network name (SSID): dial_device Wireless network key This network requires a key for the following: Network Authentication: Open Data encryption: Disabled Network key Configure network key Key under (advanced) 1.0 The key is provided for no automaticly This is a computer-to-computer (all loc) network wireless access points are not used OK Cancel

i Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.

j Click OK to close the Property dialog box.

For Windows Vista:

a Open Control Panel.

b Select Network and Internet.

c Select Network and Sharing Center.

d Select Connect to a network.

e Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.

f Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.

g Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.

For Windows Server 2008:

a Open Control Panel.

b Select Network and Sharing Center.

c Select Connect to a network.

d Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.

e Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.

f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:

a Open Control Panel.

b Select Network and Internet.

c Select Network and Sharing Center.

d Select Connect to a network.

e Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.

2 Check the IP address assigned by AutoIP on the printer.

a Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

b Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

c Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

d Press button until Network is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

e Press button until TCP/IP is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

f Press button until IPv4 is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Check the IP address displayed on the operator panel.

3 Check that the IP address on your computer is assigned by DHCP.

Wireless Network Connection Status General Support Connection status Address Type: Automatic Private Address IP Address: 169.254.203.169 Submit Mask: 255.255.0.0 Default Gateway Details Windows did not detect problems with this connection. If you cannot connect, click Prefer... Regal: Close

4 Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the WEB browser.

https://179.249.204.Sci/des.html - Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address https://128.249.204.Sci/des.html Dell Printer Status Printer Jobs Printer Settings Print Server Settings Copy Printer Settings Print Volume Address Book Printer Information Tray Settings E-Mail Alert Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at: www.dell.com/supplies Contact Dell Support at: support.dell.com Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPv: CN 249-204-54 IPv6(Link Local): 6x60 x60 37x60 7x60 Location: Contact Person: Ready Printer Status Printer Status | Printer Events | Printer Information Printer Status - Refresh Cyan Cartridge Level : OK Magenta Cartridge Level : OK Yellow Cartridge Level : OK Black Cartridge Level : OK Consumables: Status: PHD unit OK Paper Trays: Status: Capacity: Size: Single Sheet Orders Add Paper 1 sheet Done Internet

5 Create wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
6 Reboot the printer.
7 Restore the wireless settings on your computer.

NOTE: If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using this tool. Or you can change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system. See the instructions below.

For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:

a Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c Select Wireless Network tab.
d Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked.

e Click Advanced.

f Do either of the following:

When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the printer:

Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.

When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the printer:

Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.

g Click Add to display Wireless network properties.

h Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK.

i Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.

j Click OK to close the Property dialog box.

For Windows Vista:

a Open Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.

g Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.

For Windows Server 2008:

a Open Control Panel.

b Select Network and Sharing Center.

c Select Connect to a network.

d Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network.

e Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.

f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:

a Open Control Panel.

b Select Network and Internet.

c Select Network and Sharing Center.

d Select Connect to a network.

e Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.

f Enter the Security key and click OK, if necessary.

For Fixed IP networks:

1 Setting up your computer for wireless connectivity:

NOTE: If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using this tool. Or you can change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system. See the instructions below.

For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:

a Select Network Connections from Control Panel.

b Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.

c Select the Wireless Networks tab.

d Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked.

NOTE: Be sure to write down the current wireless computer settings in step d and step f so that you can restore them later.

e Click the Advanced button.

f Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.

g Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.

h Under the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.

Network name (SSID): dell_device

Network Authentication: Open

Data encryption: Disabled

Ad hoc network: checked

Wireless network properties Association Authentication Connection Network name (SSID): dall_device Wireless network key This network requires a key for the following: Network Authentication Open Data encryption Disabled Network Key: Coptimal network key: Key Index (advanced) 1 □ The key is provided for me automatically □ This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network, wireless access points are not used OK Cancel

i Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.

j Click OK to close the Property dialog box.

For Windows Vista:

a Open Control Panel.

b Select Network and Internet.

c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.
g Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.

For Windows Server 2008:

a Open Control Panel.
b Select Network and Sharing Center.
c Select Connect to a network.
d Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.
f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:

a Open Control Panel.
b Select Network and Internet.
c Select Network and Sharing Center.
d Select Connect to a network.
e Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.

2 Check the IP address on your computer.

Wireless Network Connection Status General Support Connection status Address Type: Automatic Private Address IP Address: 169.254.209.169 Subset Mask: 255.255.0.0 Default Gateway Details... Windows did not detect problems with this connection. If you cannot connect, click Repair Close

3 Set the IP address on the printer.

a Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

b Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

c Press button until Admin menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

d Press button until Network is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

e Press button until TCP/IP is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

f Press button until IPv4 is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

g Ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

h Press button Panel is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

i Press button until IP Address is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

j Manually enter the IP address using the numeric keypad, and button on the operator panel, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the WEB browser.

https://71.249.204.Satndex.htm - Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address https://71.249.204.Satndex.htm DELL Printer Status Printer Jobs Printer Settings Print Server Settings Copy Printer Settings Print Volume Address Book Printer Information Tray Settings E-Mail Alert Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at: www.dell.com/supplies Contact Dell Support at: support.dell.com Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPv: 129-249-204.54 IPv6(Link Local): w60- a80-37F-w60-7a65 Location: Contact Person: Ready Printer Status Printer Status | Printer Events | Printer Information Printer Status - Refresh Cyan Cartridge Level : OK Magenta Cartridge Level : OK Yellow Cartridge Level : OK Black Cartridge Level : OK Consumables: Status: PHD unit OR Paper Trays: Status: Capacity: Size: Single Sheet Reader Add Paper 1 sheet Done Internet

5 Change the wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
6 Reboot the printer.
7 Restore the wireless settings on your computer.

NOTE: If your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using this tool. Or you can change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating system. See the instructions below.

a For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
b Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
c Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
d Select Wireless Network tab.
e Ensure the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked.
f Click Advanced.
g Do either of the following:

When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the printer:

Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.

When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the printer:

Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.

h Click Add to display Wireless network properties.

i Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK.

j Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.

k Click OK to close the Property dialog box.

For Windows Vista:

a Open Control Panel.

b Select Network and Internet.

c Select Network and Sharing Center.

d Select Connect to a network.

e Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network.

f Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.

g Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.

For Windows Server 2008:

a Open Control Panel.

b Select Network and Sharing Center.

c Select Connect to a network.

d Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a network.

e Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured area.

f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:

a Open Control Panel.

b Select Network and Internet.

c Select Network and Sharing Center.

d Select Connect to a network.

e Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in the available network list, and click Connect.

f Enter the Security key and click OK, if necessary.

Connecting Your Printer

Your Dell™ 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Connection type Connection specifications

USB USB 2.0

Ethernet 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000 Base-T

Wireless (optional) IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n

Wall jack connector RJ11

Phone connector RJ11

Diagram of a computer tower with labeled components including ports, connectors, and internal wiring

1 USB port
2 Wireless adapter socket
3 Ethernet port
4 Phone connector
5 Wall jack connector

Connecting Printer to Computer or Network

Direct Connection

A local printer is a printer which is directly connected to your computer using the USB cable. If your printer is connected to a network instead of your computer, skip this section and go to "Network Connection."

The following operating systems support USB connection:

• Microsoft ^ Windows ^ XP
• Windows XP 64-bit Edition
• Windows Server ^ 2003
  • Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
• Windows Server 2008
  • Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition
• Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition

• Windows Vista ^®
  • Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

• Windows 7
  • Windows 7 64-bit Edition
  • Mac OS X 10.3.9/10.4.11/10.5/10.6

• R e ^ d Enterprise Itinux ^ 4 WS/5 Client (x86)
• S U® ISnuEEnterprise Desktop 10/11 (x86)

To connect the printer to a computer:

1 Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the back of the printer.

Diagram illustrating network connection between a computer and a server, showing cable routing and port connections with labeled components.

1 USB port

NOTE: Ensure that you match the USB symbol on the cable to the USB symbol on the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of the computer.

NOTICE: Do not connect the printer USB cable to the USB port available on the keyboard.

Network Connection

To connect the printer to a network:

1 Connect the network cable.

Diagram showing server rack connection with labeled components and network topology diagram

1 Ethernet port

To connect the printer to the network, connect one end of an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on the rear of the printer, and the other end to a LAN drop or hub. To setup a wireless connection, insert the wireless adapter into the wireless adapter socket on the back of the printer.

For a wireless connection, see "Installing the Optional Wireless Adapter."

NOTE: To use the wireless adapter, be sure to disconnect the network cable.

Connecting the Telephone Line

NOTE: Do not connect your printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL). This may damage the printer. To use a DSL, you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter. Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.

1 Plug one end of a telephone line cord into the wall jack connector and the other end into an active wall jack.

Wall jack connector To the wall jack LINE

2 Remove the "Blue" plug from the phone connector.

Phone connector "Blue" plug PHONE

3 To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, plug the telephone or answering machine line cord into the phone connector ( ).

Phone connector To an external telephone or answering machine PHONE

If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland), and that you are supplied with a "Yellow" terminator, insert the "Yellow" terminator into the phone connector ( )

Phone connector "Yellow" terminator PHONE

Turning on the Printer

CAUTION: Do not use extension cords or power strips.

CAUTION: The printer should not be connected to a UPS system.

1 Connect the power cable to the power connector on the rear of the printer, and then to a power source.

Diagram of a computer tower with attached power socket and cable, showing internal components and connection arrows (no text or symbols)

2 Turn on the printer. When the printer is connected via a USB (Uninterruptible Power Supply) cable, the USB driver is automatically installed.

Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel

You need to set the printer language, country, clock date, and time when you turn on printer for the first time.

When you turn the printer on, the wizard screen to perform the initial setup appears on the operator panel. Follow the steps below to set the initial settings.

NOTE: If you do not start configuring the initial settings, Ready to Print appears on the operator panel in three minutes. After that, you can set the following initial setup by enabling Power on Wizard on the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool if needed.

For more information on operator panel, see "Understanding the Printer Menus."

For more information on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."

1 Please Select Language appears. Press button until the desired language is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

English

Français

Italiano

Deutsch

Español

Dansk

Nederlands

Norsk

Svenska

2 Please Select Country appears. Press button until the desired country is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

The default time zone, paper size, and display format are automatically set when you select a country.

Country Default TimeZone Setting		DefaultPaper Size	Display Format
Algeria +1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Australia +10:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Austria +1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Belgium +1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Bulgaria +2:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Canada -5:00 Letter	MM/DD/YY
Colombia	-5:00 Letter	DD/MM/YY
Costa Rica -6:00 Letter	DD/MM/YY
Cyprus	+2:00 A4 DD/MM/YY

Czech Republic +1:00 A4 YY/MM/DD
Denmark +1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Dominican Republic -4:00 Letter DD/MM/YY
Egypt +2:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Estonia +3:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Finland +2:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
France +1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Germany +1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Greece +2:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Guatemala -6:00 Letter DD/MM/YY
Hungary +2:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Iceland	-9:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Ireland 00:00	A4 DD/MM/YY
Italy	+1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Jamaica	-5:00 Letter MM/DD//YY
Jordan	+2:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Latvia	+3:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Liechtenstein	+1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Lithuania	+1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Luxembourg	+1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Malta	+1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Mexico -6:00 Letter DD/MM/YY
Netherlands	+1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
New Zealand	+12:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Nicaragua	-6:00 Letter DD/MM/YY
Norway	+1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Panama	-5:00 Letter DD/MM/YY
Poland	+1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Portugal	00:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Puerto Rico	-4:00 Letter MM/DD/YY
Romania	+2:00 A4 DD/MM/YY

Russia +3:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Saudi Arabia +3:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Slovakia +1:00 A4 YY/MM/DD
Slovenia +1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
South Africa +2:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Spain +1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Sweden +1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Switzerland	+1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Tunisia	+1:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
Turkey	+2:00	A4	DD/MM/YY
United Arab Emirates	+4:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
United Kingdom	00:00 A4 DD/MM/YY
United States	-5:00 Letter	MM/DD/YY
Unknown	00:00 Letter DD/MM/YY

3 Please Select Time Zone appears. Press on button until the desired time zone is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

UTC -12:00

UTC -11:00

UTC -10:00

UTC -09:00

UTC -08:00

UTC -07:00

UTC -06:00

UTC -05:00

UTC -04:00

UTC -03:30

UTC -03:00

UTC -02:00

UTC -01:00

UTC 00:00

UTC +01:00

UTC +02:00

UTC +03:00

UTC +03:30

UTC +04:00

UTC +04:30

UTC +05:00

UTC +05:30

UTC +05:45

UTC +06:00

UTC +06:30

UTC +07:00

UTC +08:00

UTC +09:00

UTC +09:30

UTC +10:00

UTC +11:00

UTC +12:00

UTC +13:00

4 Please Enter Date appears. Specify the date, and then press the √(Set) button.
5 Please Enter Time appears. Specify the time, and then press the √(Set) button.

This ends the basic printer settings. Press the √ (Set) button to set Fax settings or press the ▶ (Start) button to end the initial setup.

6 Please Enter Fax Number appears. Enter the fax number of the printer, and then press the √ (Set) button.
7 Please Enter Name appears. Enter the sender name, and then press the √ (Set) button.

The printer automatically restarts after resetting your regional clock and registering the fax information.

Setting the IP Address

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Assigning an IP Address

An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are delimited by a period and can include up to three digits in each section, for example, 111.222.33.44.

You can select the IP mode from Dual Stack, IPv4, and IPv6. If your network supports both IPv4 and IPv6, select Dual Stack.

Select the IP mode of your environment, and then set IP address, subnet mask (for IPv4 only), and gateway address.

NOTICE: Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues.

NOTE: Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system administrator.

When Using the Easy Setup Navigator

1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.

2 Click Advanced Tools on the Easy Setup Navigator window. The Advanced Tools window opens.

Adobe Flash Player 8 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155ca/Dell 2155cdn Welcome! Language: English Easy Setup Guided Setup Step by step instructions to set up your printer Software Installation Install print driver and supporting software. Advance Setup Advance Tools More Information Optional Accessories Setup Users Guide Troubleshooting Guide Product Features Exit

3 Click IP Configuration.

4 Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

When Using the Operator Panel

For more information on using the operator panel, see "Operator Panel."

1 Turn on the printer.

2 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

3 Press button System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button Admtln Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

5 Press button Nentilork is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

6 Press button Tort/LIP is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

7 Press button I will be highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

8 Ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

9 Press button Pantell is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

10 Press the ⬇ (Back) button.

11 Press button until IP Address is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

The cursor is located at the first octet of the IP address.

12 Use the ten keys to enter the first octet of the IP address, and then press > button.

The cursor moves to the next digit.

NOTE: You can only enter one octet at a time and must press > button after entering each octet.

13 Enter the rest of the octets, and then press the √ (Set) button.

14 Press the ⬇ (Back) button.

15 Press button Subtilet Mask is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

16 Repeat steps 12 and 13 to set Subnet Mask, and then press the √ (Set) button.

17 Press the ⬇ (Back) button.

18 Press button until Gateway Address is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

19 Repeat steps 12 and 13 to set the Gateway Address, and then press the √(Set) button.

20 Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.

3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.

The TCP/IP Settings page appears.

4 Select the mode from IP Address Mode, and then enter the values in IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address.

5 Press the Apply New Settings button to take effect.

You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the printer drivers with the installer. When you use the Network Installation feature, and the Get IP Address is set to AutoIP or DHCP on the operator panel menu, you can set the IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the printer selection window.

Verifying the IP Settings

You can confirm the settings by printing the system settings report or using the ping command.

Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report

1 Print the system settings report.

When Using the Operator Panel

a Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
b Press button Syntilem Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
c Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
d Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
The system settings report is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

a Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer → Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

b Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open.

c Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.

The Reports page appears.

d Click the System Settings button.

The system settings report is printed

2 Verify the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are listed in the system settings report under Network (Wired).

Verifying the Settings Using Ping Command

Ping the printer and verify that it responds. For example, at a command prompt on a network computer, type ping followed by the new IP address (for example, 192.168.0.11):

ping 192.168.0.11

If the printer is active on the network, you will receive a reply.

Loading Paper

NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.

NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in your printer.

1 Pull the tray out of the printer about 200 mm. Hold the tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

3D illustration of a printer with a blue plastic case and a green arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols)

2 Adjust the paper guides.

Diagram illustrating a mechanical assembly with three views of a device, showing tool positioning and green directional arrows indicating motion or force.

NOTE: Extend the rear side of the tray when you load Legal size paper.

3 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets and fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

Illustration showing two hand-drawn diagrams illustrating fabric deformation or folding, with arrows indicating movement direction (no text or symbols)

4 Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.

NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.

5 Align the width guides against the edges of the paper.

3D diagram of a computer chassis with internal components and green arrows indicating directional movement (no text or symbols)

NOTE: When loading user-specified print media, adjust the width guides and slide the extendable part of the tray by pinching the length guide and sliding it until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper.

6 After confirming that the guides are securely adjusted, insert the tray into the printer.

Illustration of a printer with a green arrow indicating print output (no text or symbols present)

NOTE: Select the paper type from the operator panel if the loaded print media is not standard plain paper.

Installing Printer Drivers on the Windows Computers

Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status

Before installing the printer driver on your computer, check the IP address of your printer by performing one of the following procedures.

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

- When Using the Operator Panel

- When Using the Tool Box

When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

The system settings report is printed.

5 Look under the TCP/IP heading on the system settings report.

If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your printer, see "Assigning an IP Address."

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Tool Box

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open.
3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page. The TCP/IP Settings page appears.

If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your printer, see "Assigning an IP Address."

Disabling Firewall Before Installing Printer Software

NOTE: This step is necessary if you have Windows XP Service Pack 2 or 3 installed.

If your printer is connected directly to a network, and the Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, or Windows 7 firewall is enabled, you cannot view your networked printer(s) when you run the Dell printer installation software. To prevent this situation, disable this firewall before you install the Dell printer software. To disable or enable your Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, or Windows 7 firewall, perform the following steps.

1 Click Start and click Help and Support.

NOTE: For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7, if you use Online Help, switch to Offline Help on Windows Help and Support window.

2 In the Search box, type firewall, and then press the Enter key.

In the list, click Turn Windows Firewall on or off, and then follow the instructions on the screen.

Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD

1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer and click setup_assist.exe to start Easy Setup Navigator.

NOTE: If the CD does not launch automatically, follow the procedure below.

For Windows XP, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 R2

Click start→Run, enter D:/setup_assist.exe (where D is the CD drive letter) in the Run dialog box, and then click OK.

For Windows Vista and Windows 7

Click Start → All Programs → Accessories → Run, enter

D:/setup_assist.exe (where D is the CD drive letter) in the Run dialog box, and then click OK.

Direct Connection Setup

For installing PCL printer driver

1 In the Easy Setup Navigator window, click Software Installation to launch the installation software.
2 Select Personal Installation, and then click Next.
3 Select the model name of your printer, and then click Next.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and the printer with a USB cable, and then turn the printer on.
The Plug and Play installation starts and the installation software proceeds to the next page automatically.

NOTE: If the installation software does not automatically proceed to the next page, click Install.

5 Select either Typical Installation or Custom Installation from the installation wizard, and then click Install. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the specific software you want to install.

6 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears. To print a test page, click Print Test Page.

USB Printing

A personal printer is a printer connected to your computer or a print server using a USB. If your printer is connected to a network and not your computer, see "Network Connection Setup."

For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver

NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.

Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS_2155.zip (where D is the CD drive letter)
2 Click Start→Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a local printer.
5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK.
9 Select your printer name and click Next.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next. To use this printer as the default printer, select the check box displayed under the Printer name, and then click Next.
Installation starts.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.

NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

11 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.

12 Click Finish.

Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.

1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS_2155.zip (where D is the CD drive letter)

2 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.

3 Click Add a printer.

4 Click Add a local printer.

5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.

6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.

7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.

8 Click OK.

9 Select your printer name and click Next.

10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.

To use this printer as the default printer, select theSet as the default printer check box, and then click Next.

11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it.

12 Click Next.

Installation starts.

13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.

14 Click Finish.

Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS_2155.zip(where D is the CD drive letter)

2 Click Start→ Devices and Printers.

3 Click Add a printer.

When you use Windows Server 2008 R2, click Add a local or network printer as an administrator.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.

NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

4 Click Add a local printer.

5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.

6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.

7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.

8 Click OK.

9 Select your printer name and click Next.

10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.

To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next.

11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it.

12 Click Next.

Installation starts.

13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.

14 Click Finish.

Network Connection Setup

NOTE: To use this printer in a Linux environment, you need to install a Linux driver. For more information on how to install and use these, see "Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers (CUPS)."

NOTE: When using a CD drive in a Linux environment, you need to mount the CD according to your system environment. The command strings are mount/media/CD-ROM.

Network Printer Setup on a Local Network

For installing PCL printer driver

1 In the Easy Setup Navigator window, click Software Installation to launch the installation software.
2 Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
3 Select the model name of your printer, and then click Next.
4 Select Local Installation, and then click Next.

5 Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then clickNext. If the target printer is not displayed on the list, clickRefresh to refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually. You may specify the IP address and port name at this point.

If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select the I am setting up this printer on a server check box.

NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0 is displayed in the installer. Before you can continue, you must enter a valid IP address.

NOTE: In some cases, Windows Security Alert is displayed in this step when you use Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, or Windows 7 64-bit Edition. In this case, select Unblock (Allow access for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7), and then continue the procedure.

6 Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.

a Enter the printer name.
b If you want other users on the network to access the printer, select Share this printer with other computers on the network, and then enter a share name that users can identify.
c If you want to set the printer as the default printer, select the Set this printer as default check box.
d If you want to restrict color printing, select the appropriate Dell ColorTrack option. Enter the password when Color-Password Enabled is selected for Dell ColorTrack
e If you want to install the Fax Driver, select the Fax Driver check box.

7 Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click Install. If you want to change the installation destination, click Browse and specify a new location.

8 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears.

To print a test page, click Print Test Page.

For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver

NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.

Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS_2155.zip (where D is the CD drive letter)
2 Click Start→Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click Next.
7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address, and then click Next.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.

NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.

9 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.

10 Click OK.

11 Select your printer name and click Next.

12 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.

To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next.

Installation starts.

13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.

14 Click Finish.

Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.

1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location. D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS_2155.zip (where D is the CD drive letter)
2 Click Start→Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.

When you select your printer, go to step 8.

When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.

6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click Next.
7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address, and then click Next.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.

NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
10 Click OK.
11 Select your printer name and click Next.
12 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then clickNext.

To use this printer as the default printer, select theSet as the default printer check box, and then click Next.

13 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it.
14 Click Next.

Installation starts.

15 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.
16 Click Finish.

Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS_2155.zip (where D is the CD drive letter)

2 Click Start→ Devices and Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.

NOTE: When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, Find a printer by name or TCP/IP address screen appears. Find your printer on the screen.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.

NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK.
9 Select your printer name and click Next.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.

To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box, and then click Next.

11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it.
12 Click Next.

Installation starts.

13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.

14 Click Finish.

Windows 7 or Windows 7 64-bit Edition

1 Extract the following zip file to your desired location.

D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS_2155.zip(where D is the CD drive letter)

2 Click Start→ Devices and Printers.

3 Click Add a printer.

4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.

5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.

When you select your printer, go to step 8.

When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.

6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click Next.

7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address, and then click Next.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.

NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.

8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.

9 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.

10 Click OK.

11 Select your printer name and click Next.

12 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then clickNext.

To use this printer as the default printer, select theSet as the default printer check box, and then click Next.

13 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network can find and use it.

14 Click Next.
Installation starts.
15 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.
16 Click Finish.

Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your desk. You can view and/or change the printer settings, monitor toner level, and acknowledge the timing of ordering replacement consumables. You can click the Dell supplies link for ordering supplies.

NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the printer is directly connected to a computer or a print server.

To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser. The printer configuration appears on the screen.

You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention.

To set up e-mail alerts:

1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
2 Click E-Mail Alert link.
3 Under E-Mail Server Settings, enter the Primary SMTP Gateway, Reply Address, and your or key operator's e-mail address in the e-mail list box.
4 Click Apply New Settings.

NOTE: Connection pending until printer sends an alert is displayed on the SMTP server until an error occurs.

Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network

Before Installation

Before you start remote installation, perform the following procedures.

Allow Print Spooler to Accept Client Connections

NOTE: This procedure is required for Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.

For Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, and Windows Server 2008:

1 Open the Run dialog box.
For Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, click start→ All Programs → Accessories → Run.
For Windows Vista, click Start → Run.

2 Typegpedit.msc, and then click OK.
3 Click Computer Configuration→ Administrative Templates→ Printers.
4 Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select Properties.
5 On the Setting tab, select Enabled, and then click OK.
6 Restart the computer.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:

1 Open the Run dialog box.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, click Start→Run.
For Windows 7, click Start→ All Programs→ Accessories→ Run.

2 Typegpedit.msc, and then click OK.
3 Click Computer Configuration→ Administrative Templates→ Printers.
4 Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select Edit.
5 Select Enabled, and then click OK.
6 Restart the computer.

Share the Firewall File and Printer

NOTE: This procedure is required for Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.

For Windows XP:

1 Click start→Control Panel.
2 Select Security Center.
3 Click Windows Firewall.
4 On the Exceptions tab, select the File and Printer Sharing check box, and then click OK.

For Windows Vista:

1 Click Start Control Panel.
2 Select Security.
3 Click Windows Firewall.
4 Click Change settings.
5 Click Continue.
6 On the Exceptions tab, select the File and Printer Sharing check box, and then click OK.

For Windows Server 2008:

1 Click Start→Control Panel.
2 Double-click Windows Firewall.
3 Click Change settings.
4 On the Exceptions tab, select the File and Printer Sharing check box, and then click OK.

For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:

1 Click Start→Control Panel.
2 Select System and Security.
3 Click Windows Firewall.
4 Click Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall

5 If the check boxes under Allowed programs and features: are dimmed, click Change settings.
6 Check the File and Printer Sharing check box. Home/Work (Private) or Public check box is automatically selected according to your settings.
If the File and Printer Sharing Properties dialog box appears, click OK.
7 Click OK.

Start Remote Registry

NOTE: This procedure is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.

1 Click Start→Control Panel.
2 Select System and Maintenance (System and Security for Windows 7).
3 Click Administrative Tools.
4 Double-click Services.
5 Click Continue (for Windows Vista only).
6 Right-click Remote Registry and select Start.
7 Right-click Remote Registry and select Properties.
8 Change Startup type to Automatic, and then click OK.

Disable User Account Control

NOTICE: Disabling the User Account Control might leave the system vulnerable to virus attacks.

NOTE: This procedure is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.

For Windows Vista:

1 Click Start→ Control Panel.
2 Select User Accounts and Family Safety.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Turn User Account Control on or off.
5 Click Continue.

6 Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer check box.
7 Restart the computer.

For Windows Server 2008:

1 Click Start Control Panel.
2 Double-click User Accounts.
3 Click Turn User Account Control on or off
4 Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer check box.
5 Click OK.
6 Restart the computer.

For Windows Server 2008 R2:

1 Click Start→Control Panel.
2 Select User Accounts.
3 Click Change User Account Control Settings.
4 Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK.
5 Restart the computer.

For Windows 7:

1 Click Start→Control Panel.
2 Select User Accounts and Family Safety.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Change User Account Control Settings.
5 Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK.
6 Click Yes in the User Account Control dialog box.
7 Restart the computer.

Enable Network Discovery and File Sharing for all Public Networks

NOTE: This procedure is required when you use Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition for the server computer.

1 Click Start→Network (Start → your user name→Network for Windows 7).
2 Click Network discovery and file sharing are turned off. Network computers and devices are not visible. Click to change.
3 Click Turn on network discovery and file sharing
4 Click Yes, turn on network discovery and file sharing for all public networks.

Disable Simple File Sharing

NOTE: This procedure is required for Windows XP, and Windows XP 64-bit Edition.

1 Click start→ Control Panel.
2 Select Appearance and Themes.
3 Select Folder Options.
4 On the View tab, clear the Use simple file sharing (Recommended) check box, and then click OK.
5 Click Start→ Control Panel.
6 Select Performance and Maintenance.
7 Select Administrative Tools
8 Click Local Security Policy.
9 Click Local Policies→Security Options.
10 Right-click Network access: Sharing and security model for local accounts and select Properties.
11 Ensure Classic - local users authenticate as themselves is selected.

Installing the Printer Driver

NOTE: Installation is not supported on Windows XP Home Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic, Windows Vista Home Premium, Windows Vista Home Basic 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista Home Premium 64-bit Edition, Windows 7 Starter, Windows 7 Home Basic, Windows 7 Home Premium, Windows 7 Home Basic 64-bit Edition, and Windows 7 Home Premium 64-bit Edition.

1 In the Easy Setup Navigator window, click Software Installation to launch the installation software.

2 Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
3 Select the model name of your printer, and then click Next.
4 Select Remote Installation, and then click Next.

a Enter the computer name, user ID, and password, and then click Add.
b Click Next.

NOTE: Windows Security Alert may appear on Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, or Windows 7 64-bit Edition. In this case, select Unblock (Allow access for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7), and then continue the procedure.

5 Select a printer from the printer list, and then click Next. If the target printer is not displayed on the list, click Refresh to refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually. You may specify the IP address and port name at this point.

NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0 is displayed in the installer. Before you continue, you must enter a valid IP address.

6 Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.

a Enter the printer name.
b If you want other users on the network to access this printer, select the Share this printer with other computers on the network, and then enter a share name that users can identify.
c If you want to set the printer as default, select the Set this printer as default check box.
d If you want to restrict color printing, select the appropriate Dell ColorTrack option. Enter the password when Color-Password Enabled is selected for Dell ColorTrack
e If you want to install the Fax Driver, select the Fax Driver check box.

7 Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click Install.

If you want to change the installation destination, click Input and specify new location.

8 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears.

Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your desk. You can view and/or change the printer settings, monitor toner level, and acknowledge the timing of ordering replacement consumables. You can click the Dell supplies link for ordering supplies.

NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the printer is directly connected to a computer or a print server.

To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser. The printer configuration appears on the screen.

You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention.

To set up e-mail alerts:

1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
2 Click E-Mail Alert link.
3 Under E-Mail Server Settings, enter the Primary SMTP Gateway, Reply Address, and your or key operator's e-mail address in the e-mail list box.
4 Click Apply New Settings.

NOTE: Connection pending until printer sends an alert is displayed on the SMTP server until an error occurs.

Setting Up for Shared Printing

You can share your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities CD that comes with your printer, or using Microsoft ^® point-and-print or peer-to-peer method. However, if you use one of the Microsoft methods, some features, such as the status monitor and other printer utilities, installed with the Drivers and Utilities CD, may not be available.

If you want to use the printer on a network, share the printer and install its drivers on all the computers on the network.

NOTE: You need to purchase an Ethernet cable for shared printing.

Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 Click start→ Printers and Faxes.

2 Right-click the printer icon and select Properties.
3 On the Sharing tab, select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.
5 Click OK.

If you are missing files, you are prompted to insert the server operating system CD.

Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start→Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.
3 Click Change sharing options.

The message Windows needs your permission to continue appears.

4 Click Continue.

5 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.

6 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.

7 Click OK.

Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start→Control Panel→Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.
3 Click Change Sharing Options if exists.
4 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
5 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.
6 Click OK.

Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Click Start→ Devices and Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3 On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options if exists.
Check the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients that print to the printer.
5 Click Apply, and then click OK.

To confirm that the printer is properly shared:

- Ensure that the printer object in the Printers, Printers and Faxes, or Devices and Printers folder is shared. The shared icon is shown under the printer icon.

- B r Networks or My Network Places. Find the host name of the server and the shared name you assigned to the printer.

Now that the printer is shared, you can install the printer on network clients using the point and print method or the peer-to-peer method.

Point and Print

Point and Print is a Microsoft Windows technology that allows you to connect to a remote printer. This feature automatically downloads and installs the printer driver.

Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer, double-click My Network Places.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.

Xp-eng File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back Search Folders Address \Xp-eng Network Tasks Add a network place View network connections Set up a home or small office network Set up a wireless network for a home or small office View workgroup computers Show icons for networked UPnP devices Other Places Mshome My Computer My Documents Shared Documents Printers and Faxes Details Print Open Connect... Create Shortcut Properties SharedDocs Scheduled Tasks

Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the Printers and Faxes folder. The copy time varies, based on network traffic and other factors.

4 Close My Network Places.
5 Print a test page to verify installation.

a Click start→ Printers and Faxes
b Select the printer you just created.
c Click File→Properties.
d On the General tab, click Print Test Page.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer, click Start→ Network.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.

3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Click Continue in the User Account Control dialog box.
6 Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the Printers folder. The time this takes varies, based on network traffic and other factors.
7 Print a test page to verify installation.

a Click Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound.

b Select Printers.

c Right-click the printer you just created and click Properties.

d On the General tab, click Print Test Page.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer, clickStart→Network.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the Printers folder. The time this takes varies, based on network traffic and other factors.
6 Print a test page to verify installation.

a Click Start→ Control Panel.

b Select Printers.

c Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.

d On the General tab, click Print Test Page.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2

1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer, click Start→ your user name→ Network (Start→ Network for Windows Server 2008 R2).

2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the Devices and Printers folder. The time this takes varies, based on network traffic and other factors.
6 Print a test page to verify installation.

a Click Start → Devices and Printers.
b Right-click the printer you just created and select Printer properties.
c On the General tab, click Print Test Page.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Peer-to-Peer

If you use the peer-to-peer method, the printer driver is fully installed on each client computer. Network clients retain control of driver modifications. The client computer handles the print job processing.

Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 Click start→ Printers and Faxes.
2 Click Add a Printer.
3 Click Next.
4 Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer, and then click Next. If the printer is not listed, type the path to the printer in the text box.

Add Printer Wizard Specify a Printer If you don't know the name or address of the printer, you can search for a printer that meets your needs. What printer do you want to connect to? ○Browse for a printer ●Connect to this printer for to browses for a printer, select this option and click. Next: Name: \\server\printer Example: 16/ server\printer ○Connect to a printer on the Internet or on a home or office network: URL: Example: http://server/printers/myprinters/ printer < Back Next > Cancel

For example: <|server host name>|

The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process.

5 Click Browse for a printer, and then click Next.

If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, you need to specify the path to available drivers.

6 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.

If you want to verify installation, click Yes to print a test page.

7 Click Finish.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start→Control Panel→Hardware and Sound→Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next. If the printer is listed, select the printer and clickNext, or select The printer that I want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next.

Find a printer by name or TCP/IP address Browse for a printer Select a shared printer by name \computername\printername Example: \c:\putername\printername or http://comput\primer/printers\printername/.printer Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname Browse... Next Cancel

For example: <||

The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process.

If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, you need to specify the path to available drivers.

4 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next
5 If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
6 Click Finish.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1. Click Start Control Panel Printers.
2. Click Add a Printer.
   3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next. If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed and type the path to the printer in the Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next.

For example: \\

The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process.

If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, then you will need to provide a path to available drivers.

4 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.
5 Click Print a test page if you want to verify installation.
6 Click Finish.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Click Start → Devices and Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed. Click Select a shared printer by name and type in the path of the printer in the text box, and then click Next.

For example: \\

The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process.

If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, then you will need to provide the path to the available driver.

4 Confirm the printer name, and then click Next.
5 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.
6 Click Print a test page if you want to verify installation.
7 Click Finish.

When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Installing Printer Drivers on the Macintosh Computers

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Installing the Drivers and Software

1 Run the Drivers and Utilities CD on the Macintosh computer.
2 Double-click the Dell 2155 Installer icon, and then click Continue.
3 When the popup dialog box prompts you for confirming the program included in the installation package, click Continue.
4 Click Continue on the Welcome screen.
5 Select a language for the Software License Agreement.
6 After reading the Software License Agreement, click Continue.
7 If you agree to the terms of the Software License Agreement, click Agree to continue the installation process.
8 Confirm the installation location, and then click Continue.
9 Click Install to perform the standard installation.

If you want to select a custom installation, click Customize to select items that you want to install.

• Dell 2155 Color MFP Printer Driver
• Dell 2155 Color MFP Fax Driver
• Dell 2155 Color MFP Scan Driver
• Dell Printer Status Monitor

10 Type the administrator's name and password, and then click OK.

11 Click Continue Installation to continue the installation.

12 When the Install Succeeded screen appears, click Logout to complete installation.

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or 10.6

When Using a USB connection

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer.
The printer is automatically added to your Macintosh computer.

When Using IP Printing

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.
If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.

3 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax.

4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click IP.

5 Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol.

6 Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.

7 Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP for Print Using.

NOTE: When printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.

8 Click Add.
9 Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue.

10 Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Fax dialog box.

When Using Bonjour

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.
If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.

If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.

3 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax.

4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click Default.

5 Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.

6 Name and Print Using are automatically entered.

7 Click Add.

8 Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue

9 Confirm that the printer is displayed in the Print & Fax dialog box.

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11

When Using a USB Connection

1 Turn on the printer.

2 Connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer.

3 Start Printer Setup Utility.

NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.

4 Click Add.

5 Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box.

6 Select the printer connected via USB from the Printer list.

7 Name and Print Using are automatically entered.

8 Click Add.

When Using IP Printing

1 Turn on the printer.

2 Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.

If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.

If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.

3 Start Printer Setup Utility.

NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.

4 Click Add.

5 Click IP Printer in the Printer Browser dialog box.

6 Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol.

7 Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.

8 Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP for Print Using.

NOTE: When printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.

NOTE: Entry of Location is optional.

9 Click Add.

When Using Bonjour

1 Turn on the printer.

2 Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.

If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.

If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.

3 Start the Printer Setup Utility.

NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.

4 Click Add.

5 Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box.

6 Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.

7 Name and Print Using are automatically entered.

8 Click Add.

9 Specify the options installed to the printer, and then click Continue.

10 Confirm that the printer is displayed on the Printer list dialog box.

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.3.9

When Using a USB connection

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Connect the USB cable between the printer and the Macintosh computer.
3 Start Printer Setup Utility.

NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.

4 Click Add.
5 Select USB from the menu.
The Printer Model is automatically selected.

6 Click Add.

When Using IP Printing

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.
If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.

3 Start Printer Setup Utility.

NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.

4 Click Add in the Printer List dialog box.
5 Select IP Printing from the menu.
6 Select LPD/LPR for Printer Type.
7 Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.
8 Select Dell for Printer Model, and select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP.

NOTE: When printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.

9 Click Add.

When Using Rendezvous (Bonjour)

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.

If you use wired connection, connect the LAN cable between the printer and the network.

If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.

3 Start Printer Setup Utility.

NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.

4 Click Add in the Printer List dialog box.

5 Select Rendezvous from the menu.

6 Select Dell for Printer Model, and select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP.

7 Click Add.

Configuring Settings

All the optional accessories are verified as installed.

Mac OS X 10.5 or 10.6

1 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax.
2 Select the printer in the Printer Name list, and click Options & Supplies.
3 Select Driver, and select the options that have been installed in the printer, and then click OK.

Mac OS X 10.3.9 or 10.4.11

1 Start Printer Setup Utility.
2 Select the printer in the Printer List dialog box, and click Show Info.
3 Select Installable Options, and select the options that have been installed in the printer, and then click Apply Changes.

Installing Printer Drivers on the Linux Computers (CUPS)

This section provides information for installing or setting up the printer driver with CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System) on Red Hat ^® Enterprise Linux ^® 4 WS/5 Client or SUSE ^® Linux Enterprise Desktop 10/11.

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS/5 Client

Setup Overview

Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS/5 Client:

1 Install the printer driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Specify the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.

Installing the Printer Driver

NOTICE: Before you install the printer driver on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4, confirm that Update 5 or higher is applied to your operating system. Consult your Linux distributor for the upgrade of your system.

1 Double-click Dell-2155-Color-MFP-x.x-x.i686.rpm in the Drivers and Utilities CD.
2 Type the administrator's password.
3 Click Continue in the Completed System Preparation window.

Installation starts. When the installation is complete, the window is automatically closed.

Setting Up the Queue

To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.

1 Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.
2 Click Administration.
3 Type root as the user name, and type the administrator password.
4 Click Add Printer.

Type the name of the printer in the Name box in the Add New Printer window, and click Continue.

You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further information.

For network connections:

a Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Device menu, and click Continue.
b Type the IP address of the printer in Device URI.
c Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (the IP address of the printer)

For USB connections with Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS:

a Select USB Printer #1 from the Device menu.
For USB connections with Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Client:

a Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP USB #1 or Dell 2155cdn Color MFP from the Device menu.

5 Select Dell from the Make menu, and click Continue.
6 Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP from the Model menu, and click Continue.
The message Printer xxx has been added successfully. appears.
The setup is complete.

Printing From the Applications

When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.

However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla). In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."

Setting the Default Queue

1 Select Applications→ System Tools→ Terminal.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.

su
(Type the administrator password)
lpadmin -d (Type the queue name) 

Specifying the Printing Options

You can specify the printing options such as color mode or double-sided printing.

1 Open the URL "http://localhost:631" using a web browser.
2 Click Manage Printers.
3 Click Configure Printer of the queue for which you want to specify the printing options.
4 Type root as the user name, and type the administrator password.
5 Specify the required settings, and click Continue.
The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.
The setting is complete.

Uninstalling the Printer Driver

1 Select Applications→System Tools→Terminal
2 Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.

su
(Type the administrator password)
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the print queue name) 

3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
4 Type the following command in the terminal window.

su
(Type the administrator password)
rpm -e Dell-2155cdn-Color-MFP 

The printer driver is uninstalled.

Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10

Setup Overview

SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10:

1 Install the printer driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Specify the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.

Installing the Printer Driver

1 Double-click Dell-2155-Color-MFP-x.x-x.i686.rpm in the Drivers and Utilities CD.
2 Type the administrator password, and click Install.

Installation starts. When the installation is complete, the window is automatically closed.

Setting Up the Queue

To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.

1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select YaST on the Application Browser.
2 Type the administrator password.

YaST Control Center is activated.

3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Center, and select Printer.
4 Printer setup: Autodetected printers is activated.

For network connections:

a Click Add.
b Select Network Printers as Printer Type, and click Next.
c Select the Print via LPD-Style Network Server as Printer Type, and click Next.
d Type the IP address of the printer in Host name of the printer server.
e Type the name of the printer queue in Name of the remote queue, and click Next.
f Type the printer name in Name for printing.

NOTE: The Description of Printer and Location of Printer do not have to be specified.

g Select the Do Local Filtering check box, and click Next.

h Select DELL as Select manufacturer: Select 2155cdn Color MFP as Select Model, and click Next.

i Confirm the settings in Edit configuration, and click OK.

For USB connections:

a Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP on USB
(//Dell/2155cdn%20Color%20MFP or /dev/usblp*) as Available are, and click Configure....
b Confirm the settings in Edit configuration, and click OK.

5 Click Finish.

Printing From the Applications

When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.

However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla). In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."

Setting the Default Queue

1 To activate the Printer setup: Autodetected printers, do the following.

a Select Computer→ More Applications... and select YaST on the Application Browser.

b Type the administrator password.

YaST Control Center is activated.

c Select Hardware on YaST Control Center, and select Printer.

2 Select the printer you want to set to default on the Printer Configuration, and select Set default in Other button menu.

3 Click Finish.

Specifying the Printing Options

You can specify the printing options such as color mode or double-sided printing.

1 Open a web browser.
2 Type http://localhost:631/admin in Location, and press the key.
3 Type root as the user name, and type the administrator password.
The CUPS window appears.

NOTE: Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If you have not set it, go to "Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator."

4 Click Manage Printers.
5 Specify the required settings, and click Continue.

The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.

The setting is complete. Execute printing from the application.

Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator

You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as the printer administrator.

1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select Konsole on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.

su

(Type the administrator password)

lppasswd -g sys -a root

(Type the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password prompt.)

(Retype the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password again prompt.)

Uninstalling the Printer Driver

1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select Konsole on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.

su

(Type the administrator password)

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the printer queue name)

3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
4 Type the following command in the terminal window.

su

(Type the administrator password)

rpm -e Dell-2155cdn-Color-MFP

The printer driver is uninstalled.

Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11

Setup Overview

SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11:

1 Install the printer driver.
2 Set up the print queue.
3 Specify the default queue.
4 Specify the printing options.

Installing the Printer Driver

1 Double-click Dell-2155-Color-MFP-x.x-x.i686.rpm in the Drivers and Utilities CD.
2 Type the administrator password, and click Continue.

Installation starts. When the installation is complete, the window is automatically closed.

Setting Up the Queue

To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.

1 Select Computer→ More Applications..., and select YaST on the Application Browser.
2 Type the administrator password.
YaST Control Center is activated.
3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Center, and select Printer.
The Printer Configurations dialog box opens.

For network connections:

a Click Add.
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens.
b Click Connection Wizard.
The Connection Wizard dialog box opens.
c Select Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol from Access Network Printer or Printserver Box via.
d Type the IP address of the printer in IP Address or Host Name:.
e Select Dell in the Select the printer manufacturer: drop-down menu.
f Click OK.
The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appear.
g Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP vx.x
[Dell/Dell_2155cdn_Color_MFP.ppd.gz] from the Search for Drivers: list.

NOTE: You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.

h Confirm the settings, and click OK.

For USB connections:

a Click Add.

The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box opens.

The printer name is displayed in the Determine Connection list.

b Select Dell 2155cdn Color MFP vx.x.

[Dell/Dell_2155cdn_Color_MFP.ppd.gz] from the Search for Drivers: list.

NOTE: You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.

Printing From the Applications

When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the applications. Start the print job from the application, and specify the queue in the print dialog box.

However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the application (for example Mozilla). In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default queue. For information on specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."

Setting the Default Queue

You can set the default queue when you add the printer.

1 Select Computer→ More Applications..., and select YaST on the Application Browser.
2 Type the administrator password.

YaST Control Center is activated.

3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Center, and select Printer.

The Printer Configurations dialog box opens.

4 Click Edit.

A dialog box to modify the specified queue opens.

5 Confirm that the printer you want to set is selected in the Connection list.
6 Select the Default Printer check box.
7 Confirm the settings, and click OK.

Specifying the Printing Options

You can specify the printing options such as color mode or double-sided printing.

1 Open a web browser.
2 Type http://localhost:631/admin in Location, and press the key.
3 Type root as the user name, and type the administrator password.
The CUPS window appears.

NOTE: Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If you have not set it, go to "Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator."

4 Click Manage Printers.
5 Specify the required settings, and click Continue.

The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.

The setting is complete. Execute printing from the application.

Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator

You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as the printer administrator.

1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window.

su

(Type the administrator password)

lppasswd -g sys -a root

(Type the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password prompt.)

(Retype the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password again prompt.)

Uninstalling the Printer Driver

1 Select Computer→ More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser.
2 Type the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.

su

(Type the administrator password)

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the printer queue name)

3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
4 Type the following command in the terminal window.

su

(Type the administrator password)

rpm -e Dell-2155cdn-Color-MFP

The printer driver is uninstalled.

Using Your Printer

13

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Overview

NOTE: This web tool is not available unless the printer is connected to a network using a network cable or the wireless printer adapter.

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

One of the features of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is E-Mail Alert Setup, which sends e-mail to you or the key operator when the printer needs supplies or intervention.

https://179.249.204.16/index.htm - Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address https://179.249.204.16/index.htm Dell Printer Status Printer Jobs Printer Settings Print Server Settings Copy Printer Settings Print Volume Address Book Printer Information Tray Settings E-Mail Alert Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at: www.dell.com/supplies Contact Dell Support at: support.dell.com Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPv4: 129 249 204 54 IP-E(Link Local): WD: a03 379 WD 7 av6 Location: Contact Person: Ready Printer Status Printer Status | Printer Events | Printer Information Printer Status - Refresh Cyan Cartridge Level : OK Magenta Cartridge Level : OK Yellow Cartridge Level : OK Black Cartridge Level : OK Consumables: Status: PHD unit OK Paper Trays: Status: Capacity: Size: Single Sheet Feedback Add Paper Labels Done Internet

To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all the printers in your area, use the Printer Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Enter the IP address of each printer on the network to display the asset tag number.

The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change the printer settings and keep track of printing trends. If you are a network administrator, you can copy the printer settings to one or all printers on the network using your web browser.

To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the system settings report or display the TCP/IP Settings page, which lists the IP address.

When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

The system settings report is printed.

If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your printer, see "Assigning an IP Address."

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer → Tool Box

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open.
3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.

The TCP/IP Settings page appears.

If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your printer, see "Assigning an IP Address."

Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool consists of the following menus:

• Printer Status
• Printer Jobs
• Printer Settings
• Print Server Settings
• Copy Printer Settings
• Print Volume
• Address Book
• Printer Information
• Tray Settings
  • E-Mail Alert
• Set Password
• Online Help
• Order Supplies at:
• Contact Dell Support at:

Printer Status

Use the Printer Status menu to get immediate feedback on the printer supply status. When a toner cartridge is running low, click the order supplies link on the first screen to order a new toner cartridge.

Printer Jobs

Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and Completed Jobs page.

These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.

Printer Settings

Use the Printer Settings menu to change the printer settings and to view the settings in the operator panel remotely.

Print Server Settings

Use the Print Server Settings menu to change the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for communications.

Copy Printer Settings

Use the Copy Printer Settings menu to copy the printer settings to another printer or printers on the network by typing the IP address of each printer.

NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.

Print Volume

Use the Print Volume menu to check the history of printing, such as paper usage, the types of jobs being printed, limit to which users can use the color mode, and the maximum number of pages they can print.

Address Book

Use the Address Book menu to view or edit the e-mail address, server address, and fax number entries in the Address Book, or to register new entries.

NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.

Printer Information

Use the Printer Information menu to get information on service calls, inventory reports, or the status of current memory and engine code levels.

Tray Settings

Use the Tray Settings menu to get information about the paper type and size for each tray.

E-Mail Alert

Use the E-Mail Alert menu to receive e-mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention. To be notified, type your name or the name of the key operator in the e-mail list box. Set E-mail Alert also when using the Scan to E-mail feature.

Set Password

Use the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that other users do not inadvertently change the printer settings that you have selected.

NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.

Online Help

Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support website.

Order Supplies at:

www.dell.com/supplies

Contact Dell Support at:

support.dell.com

Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool0

Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

It is recommended that you configure the environment settings of your web browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be displayed unreadable if the pages were configured by the language different from the language of your web browser.

Setting Up From Web Browser

It is recommended that you configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the operator panel before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

For Internet Explorer® 6.0, Internet Explorer 7.0, Internet Explorer 8.0

Setting Up the Display Language

1 Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.
2 Select Languages in the General tab.
3 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.
For example:

• Italian (Italy) [it-IT]
• Spanish (Traditional Sort) [es-ES tradnl]
• German (Germany) [de-DE]
• French (France) [fr-FR]
• English (United States) [en-US]
- Danish [da-DK]
• Dutch (Netherlands) [nl-NL]
• Norwegian (Bokmal) [no]
- Swedish [sv-SE]

Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non-Proxy

1 Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) Settings in the Connections tab.

3 Do either of the following:

• Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server.
• Click Advanced, and then specify the IP address of the printer in the Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with field under Exceptions.

After setting the language and proxy, type http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/ (the IP address of the printer) in the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

For Firefox 2.0 or Later

Setting Up the Display Language

1 Select Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click Advanced.
3 If you are using Firefox 2.0, click Choose in the General tab. If you are using Firefox 3.0, click Choose in the Content tab.
4 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Languages in order of preference list.enu.

For example:

• English [en] or English/United States [en-us]
- Italian [it]
- Spanish [es]
- German [de]
- French [fr]
• Dutch [nl]
- Norwegian [no]
- Swedish [sv]
- Danish [da]

Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non-Proxy

1 Select Options from the Tools menu
2 Click Advanced tab.
3 Click Network on the Options dialog box.
4 Click Connection → Settings.
5 If you are using Firefox 2.0, do one of the following:

• Select the Direct connection to the Internet check box.
• Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.
• Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter the IP address of the printer in the No Proxy for edit box.
• Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.

If you are using Firefox 3.0, do one of the following:

• Select the No Proxy check box, if you do not want to use a proxy.
• Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.
• Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter a hostname and a port number if you have a list of one or more proxy servers. If you have an IP address that does not use a proxy, enter the IP address of the printer in the No Proxy for edit box.
• Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.

After setting the language and proxy, type http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/ (the IP address of the printer) in the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Setting Up From Operator Panel

You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when EWS is set to Enable (the factory default) on the operator panel. Confirm the operator panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For more information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus."

Page Display Format

The layout of the page is divided into three sections listed below:

• Top Frame
• Left Frame
• Right Frame

Top Frame

The top frame is located at the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated, the current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page.

The following items are displayed in the top frame.

https://78.249.204.14/index.htm - Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address https://28.249.204.14/index.htm Go Dell Printer Status Printer Jobs Printer Settings Print Server Settings Copy Printer Settings Print Volume Address Book Printer Information Tray Settings E-Mail Alert Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at: www.dell.com/supplies Contact Dell Support at: support.dell.com 1 2 3 4 5 6 Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPd: 129.249.204.14 IP6(Link Local): 1000 400 379 460 7 sec Location: Contact Person: Ready: Printer Status Printer Status | Printer Events | Printer Information Printer Status - Refresh Cyan Cartridge Level : OK Magenta Cartridge Level : OK Yellow Cartridge Level : OK Black Cartridge Level : OK Consumables: Status: PHD unit: OK Paper Trays: Status: Capacity: Size: Single Short Seconds: Add Paper 1 check Done Internet

1 Dell 2155cdn Displays the product name of the printer. Color MFP

2 I P v 4 Displays the IP address of the printer. IPv6

3 Location Displays location of the printer. The location can be changed in the Basic Information section on the Print Server Settings page.

4 Contact Person Displays the name of the printer administrator. The name can be changed in the Basic Information section on the Print Server Settings page.

5 Event Panel Displays the indicator for the condition of the printer.

6 Machine image Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status menu appears in the right frame when you click on the image.

Left Frame

The left frame is located on the left side of all the pages. The menu titles displayed in the left frame are linked to corresponding menus and pages. You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.

The following menus are displayed in the left frame.

https://739-248.204.Satndex.htm - Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address https://739-248.204.Satndex.htm Dell Printer Status Printer Jobs Printer Settings Print Server Settings Copy Printer Settings Print Volume Address Book Printer Information Tray Settings E-Mail Alert Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at: www.dell.com/supplies Contact Dell Support at: support.dell.com 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPv4: 129.248.204.54 IPv6(Link Local): 400.378*400.7.pdf Location: Contact Person: Ready: Printer Status Printer Status | Printer Events | Printer Information Printer Status - Refresh Cyan Cartridge Level : OK Magenta Cartridge Level : OK Yellow Cartridge Level : OK Black Cartridge Level : OK Consumables: Status: PHD unit OK Paper Trays: Status: Capacity: Size: Single Sheet Seconds Add Paper 1 sheets Done Internet

1	Printer Status	Links to the Printer Status menu.
2	Printer Jobs	Links to the Printer Jobs menu.
3	Printer Settings	Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.
4	Print Server Settings	Links to the Print Server Reports menu.
5	C o p y P Settings	rLinks to the Copy Printer Settings menu.
6	Print Volume	Links to the Print Volume menu.
7	Address Book	Links to the E-Mail Address menu.
8	Pr i n t e Information	Links to the Printer Status menu.
9	Tray Settings	Links to the Tray Settings menu.
10	E-Mail Alert	Links to the Print Server Settings menu.
11	Set Password	Links to the Security menu.
12	Online Help Links to the Dell Support website.
13	Order Supplies at: Links to the Dell web page.
14	Contact Dell Support at:	Links to the Dell support page web address: http://support.dell.com/

Right Frame

The right frame is located on the right side of all the pages. The contents of the right frame correspond to the menu that you select in the left frame. For details on the items displayed in the right frame, see "Details of the Menu Items."

Buttons in the Right Frame

https://128.249.204.16/Adobe.com - Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address https://128.249.204.16/Adobe.com DELL Printer Status Printer Jobs Printer Settings Print Server Settings Copy Printer Settings Print Volume Address Book Printer Information Tray Settings E-Mail Alert Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at: www.dell.com/supplies Contact Dell Support at: support.dell.com Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPv4: 129.249.204.54 IPv6(Link Local): w00: a00.378 w00.7 w01 Location: Contact Person. Ready Print Server Reports Print Server Settings Security Set Password | LDAP Server | LDAP User Mapping | SSL/TLS | IPsec | 802.1x | IP Filter (IPv4) LDAP User Mapping - Refresh LDAP User Mapping Common Name m Surname m Given Name givename Email Address mail Fax Phone facsimile Telephone Number Apply New Settings Restore Settings Internet

1 Refresh Button Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information in the right frame.

2 Apply New Settings Button Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to the printer. The new settings replace the old settings of the printer.

3 Restor Restores the old settings that existed before any changes were Settings Button made. New settings will not be submitted to the printer.

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items

Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. When you access these menus, the authentication window appears on the screen. Type a user name and password for the printer administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.

The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can change only the password in the Set Password page in the Security menu. The user name cannot be changed. See "Set Password" for more information.

Details of the Menu Items

"Printer Status" "Printer Status" "Printer Status"
	"Printer Events"
	"Printer Information"
"Printer Jobs" "Printer Jobs" "Job List"
	"Completed Jobs"
"Printer Settings"	"Printer Settings Report" "Menu Settings"
	"Reports"
	"Printer Settings" "System Settings"
	"USB Settings"
	"PCL Settings"
	"PDF Settings"
	"Secure Settings"
	"Copy Defaults"
	"Copy Color Balance"
	"Copy Settings"
	"Fax Defaults"
	"Fax Settings"
	"Scan Defaults"
	"Print from USB Defaults"
	"Printer Maintenance" "Paper Density"
	"Adjust BTR"
	"Adjust Fuser"
	"Auto Registration Adjustment"
	"Color Registration Adjustments"
	"Clean Developer"
	"Reset Defaults"
	"Initialize PrintMeter"
	"Storage"*1
	"Non-Dell Toner"
	"Adjust Altitude"
	"Clock Settings"
	"Web Link Customization"
"Print Server Settings"	"Print Server Reports" "Print Server Setup Page"
	"Print Server Settings" "Basic Information"
	"Security" "Set Password"
"Copy Printer Settings"	"Copy Printer Settings" "Copy Printer Settings"

"Tray Settings" "Tray Settings"

*1 This item is available only when RAM disk is enabled.
*2 This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
*3 This item is available only when the printer is connected using LAN cable.

Printer Status

Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and specifications of the printer.

The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.

Printer Status

Purpose:

To check the status of the consumables, trays, and covers.

Values:

Cyan Cartridge Level	OK Indicates that there is enough amount of toner for use.
Magenta Cartridge Level
Yellow Cartridge Level	Replace Soon	Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced soon.
Black Cartridge Level	Replace Now	Indicates that the toner needs to be replaced now.
Consumables Status	OK	Indicates that the status of PHD unit is OK for use.
	Replace Soon	Indicates that the PHD unit needs to be replaced soon.
	Replace Now	Indicates that the PHD unit needs to be replaced now.
Paper Trays Status OK Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is unknown.
	Add Paper Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.
	Paper Low Indicates that paper is running low in the tray.
Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Size Displays the size of paper in the tray.
Output Tray Status OK Indicates that the tray is available.
	Full Indicates that the tray is not available.
Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Cover Status Closed Indicates that the cover is closed.
	Open Indicates that the cover is open.
Printer Type	Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser is displayed normally.
Printing Speed	Displays the printing speed.

Printer Events

Purpose:

When faults occur, such as Out of Paper or Cover is Open, the details of all alerts or indications of faults are displayed in the Printer Events page.

Values:

Location	Displays the location where a fault occurred.
Details	Displays the details of the fault.

Printer Information

Purpose:

To verify the printer details such as the hardware configuration and software version. This page can also be displayed by clicking on the Printer Information tab in the left frame.

Values:

Dell Service Tag Number		Displays Dell service tag number.
Express Service Code		Displays Dell express service code.
Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag number of the printer.
Printer Serial Number		Displays the serial number of the printer.
Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity.
Processor Speed Displays the processing speed.
Printer Revision Levels	Firmware Version	Displays the revision date (revision level).
	Network Firmware Version	Displays the revision date (revision level).

Printer Jobs

The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages. These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or the print jobs.

Job List

Purpose:

To confirm the print jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.

Values:

ID Displays the job ID.
Job Name	Displays the file name of the job being printed.
Owner Displays the name of the job owner.
Host Name Displays the name of the host computer.
Job Status Displays the status of the job being printed.
Job Type	Displays the type of the job.
Host I/F	Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Time	Displays the date when the print job was submitted.

Completed Jobs

Purpose:

To check the completed jobs. Up to the last 20 jobs are displayed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.

Values:

ID Displays the job ID.

Job Name Displays the file name of the job.

Owner Displays the name of the job owner.

Host Name Displays the name of the host computer.

Output Result Displays the status of the job.

Job Type Displays the type of the job.

Impression Number Displays the total number of pages for the job.

No. of Sheets Displays the total number of sheets for the job.

Host I/F Displays the status of the host interface.

Job Submitted Time Displays the date when the job was submitted.

Printer Settings

Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report, Printer Settings, and Printer Maintenance tabs and to configure the printer settings.

The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame.

Printer Settings Report

The Printer Settings Report tab includes the Menu Settings and Reports pages.

Menu Settings

Purpose:

To display the current settings of the operator panel menus.

Values:

System Settings Power Saver Time - Sleep	Displays the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job.
Power Saver Time - Deep Sleep	Displays the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has entered Sleep mode.
Power Saver Wake Up - OffHook Wake Up	Displays whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is Off.
Auto Reset Displays the amount of time before the printer automatically resets the settings on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made.
Fault Time-Out	Displays the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally.
Job Time-Out Displays the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.
Control Panel Tone	Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Invalid Key Tone	Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Machine Ready Tone	Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Copy Completed Tone	Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Job Completed Tone	Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than a copy job is complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Fault Tone	Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Alert Tone	Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Out of Paper Tone	Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Low Toner Alert Tone	Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Auto Clear Alert Tone	Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Base Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel screen is returned to the default setting by scrolling the loop menu. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
All Tones	Displays the volume of all the alert tones. Off indicates that all the tones are disabled.
mm / inch Displays the measurement unit that is used on the operator panel screen.
Default Print Paper Size	Displays the default print paper size.

Auto Log Print Displays whether to automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.

Print ID Displays where to print a user ID on the output paper.
Print Text Displays whether the printer outputs PDL (Page Description Language) data (which is not supported by the printer) as text when the printer receives it.
Banner Sheet Insert Position*1	Displays where to insert a banner sheet in the output paper.
Banner Sheet Specify Tray*1	Displays the tray to feed a banner sheet.
RAM Disk*2	Displays whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure Print, and Proof Print features.
Substitute Tray	Displays if paper of another size has to be used when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size setting for the current job.
Letterhead Duplex Mode*3	Displays whether to print both sides on letterhead.
Low Toner Alert Msg	Displays whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.
Panel Language Displays the language used on the operator panel screen.

USB Settings USB Port Displays whether to enable the USB interface.

PCL Settings Paper Tray Displays the paper input tray.

Paper Size Displays the paper size setting.
Custom Size - Y Displays the length of custom size paper.
Custom Size - X Displays the width of custom size paper.
Orientation	Displays how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Font Displays the selected font from the list of registered fonts.

Symbol Set Displays a symbol set for the specified font.

Font Size Displays the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Font Pitch Displays the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.
Form Line Displays the number of lines in a page.
Quantity Displays the number of copies to print.
Image Enhancement	Displays whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
Hex Dump Displays whether to enable the Hex Dump feature.
Draft Mode Displays whether to print in the draft mode.
Line Termination Displays whether to set the line termination.
Default Color Displays the color mode setting.

PDF Settings Quantity Displays the number of copies to print.

2 Sided*3	Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Print Mode Displays the print mode setting.
Collated Displays whether to sort a job.
Output Size Displays the output paper size.
Layout	Displays the output layout.

Output Color Displays the color mode setting.

Secure Settings	Panel Lock Set	Displays whether to lock Admin Menu with a password.
	Copy Displays whether to lock the Copy service with a password.
	Fax Displays whether to lock the Fax service with a password.
	Scan Displays whether to lock the Scan service with a password.
	Print from USB Displays whether to lock the Print from USB service with a password.
	Secure Receive Set	Displays whether a password is required to receive faxes.
	Login Error-Attempts	Displays how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock, Function Enabled, and Secure Receive.
Secure Settings - Print/Copy/Fax/Scan	Set Available Time	Displays whether to set the available time period for the Print, Copy, Fax, and Scan services, respectively.
	Start Time Displays the start time of the available time period for the Print, Copy, Fax, and Scan services, respectively.
	End Time Displays the end time of the available time period for the Print, Copy, Fax, and Scan services, respectively.
	Recurrence Displays the day of the week to repeat the setting.
Copy Defaults	Color	Displays whether to make copies in color or in black and white.
	Select Tray Displays the default input tray.
	SSF Paper Size	Displays the paper size setting of the single sheet feeder.
	SSF Paper Type	Displays the paper type settings of the single sheet feeder.
	Collated Displays whether to sort a copy job.
	Reduce/Enlarge	Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
	Document Size Displays the paper size of the original.
	Original Type Displays the type of the original.
	Lighter/Darker Displays the default copy density.
	Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.
	Color Saturation	Displays the default color saturation level.
	Auto Exposure	Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
	Auto Exposure Level	Displays the background suppression level.

Copy Color Balance	Yellow Low Dens.	Displays the color balance level of low density yellow.
	Yellow Medium Dens.	Displays the color balance level of medium density yellow.
	Yellow High Dens.	Displays the color balance level of high density yellow.
	Magenta Low Dens.	Displays the color balance level of low density magenta.
	Magenta Medium Dens.	Displays the color balance level of medium density magenta.
	Magenta High Dens.	Displays the color balance level of high density magenta.
	Cyan Low Dens.	Displays the color balance level of low density cyan.
	Cyan Medium Dens.	Displays the color balance level of medium density cyan.
	Cyan High Dens.	Displays the color balance level of high density cyan.
	Black Low Dens.	Displays the color balance level of low density black.
	Black Medium Dens.	Displays the color balance level of medium density black.
	Black High Dens.	Displays the color balance level of high density black.
Copy Settings 2 Sided *3		Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
		Multiple-Up Displays whether the Multiple-Up feature is enabled.
		Margin Top/Bottom	Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.
		Margin Left/Right	Displays the value of the left and right margins.
		Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.

Fax Defaults Resolution Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.

Lighter/Darker Displays the density level to be used for fax transmission.

Delayed Start Displays the fax transmission start time.

Fax Settings Receive Mode Displays the fax receiving mode.

Auto Receive Fax	Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.
Auto Receive Tel/Fax	Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Auto Receive Answer/Fax	Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.
Line Monitor	Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
Ring Tone Volume	Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker whenReceive Modeis set toTelephone/Fax.
Line Type Displays the line type; PSTN or PBX.
Tone/Pulse	Displays whether to use tone or pulse dialing.
Resend Delay Displays the interval between re-send attempts.
Redial Attempts	Displays the number of redial attempts to make if the destination fax number is busy.
Redial Delay Displays the interval between redial attempts.
Junk Fax Setup Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted stations.
Remote Receive	Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
Remote Receive Tone	Displays the 2-digit remote receive code whenRemote Receive isOn.
Fax Header	Displays whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.
Fax Header Name	Displays the name of the sender that will be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Number	Displays the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page	Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern	Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting.
Duplex Print*3	Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Sent Fax Forward	Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Fax Forward Number	Displays the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.
Prefix Dial	Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Number	Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size	Displays whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper.
ECM	Displays whether the Error Correction Mode (ECM) is enabled.
Modem Speed	Displays the modem speed.
Country	Displays the country where the printer is used.
Fax Activity	Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Fax Transmit	Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.
Fax Broadcast	Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.

Fax Protocol Displays whether to automatically print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.

Scan Defaults Scan To Network Displays whether to save scanned documents on a network server or on a computer.
File Format Displays the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved.
Color Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Black & White Button	Displays whether to scan in black and white or in grayscale when Black & White is selected for a color mode.
Color Button Displays whether to scan in color or in color (Photo) when Color is selected for a color mode.
Resolution Displays the default scan resolution.
Document Size Displays the paper size of the original.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default scan density level.
Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.
Contrast Displays the default contrast level.
Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scan.
Auto Exposure Level	Displays the background suppression level.
Margin Top/Bottom	Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.
Margin Left/Right	Displays the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.
TIFF File Format	Displays the selected TIFF file format; TIFF V6 or TTN2.
Image Compression	Displays the image compression level.
Max Email Size	Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.
Email From Field	Displays whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E-mail.
Print from USB Defaults	Color Displays whether to print in color or in black and white.
	Select Tray Displays the default input tray.
	SSF Paper Size	Displays the paper size setting of the single sheet feeder.
	SSF Paper Type	Displays the paper type settings of the single sheet feeder.
	2 Sided*3	Displays whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
	Layout Displays the output layout.
Paper Density	Plain	Displays the paper density of plain paper.
	Label Displays the paper density of labels.
Adjust BTR	Plain	Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-6 to 6) for plain paper.
	Plain Thick	Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-6 to 6) for thick plain paper.
	Covers	Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-6 to 6) for cover paper.
	Covers Thick	Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-6 to 6) for thick cover paper.
	Label	Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-6 to 6) for labels.
	Coated	Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-6 to 6) for coated paper.
	Coated Thick	Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-6 to 6) for thick coated paper.
	Envelope	Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-6 to 6) for envelopes.
	Recycled	Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller (-6 to 6) for recycled paper.
Adjust Fuser	Plain	Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (-2 to 2) for plain paper.
	Plain Thick	Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (-2 to 2) for thick plain paper.
	Covers	Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (-2 to 2) for cover paper.
	Covers Thick	Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (-2 to 2) for thick cover paper.
	Label	Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (-2 to 2) for labels.
	Coated	Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (-2 to 2) for coated paper.
	Coated Thick	Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (-2 to 2) for thick coated paper.
	Envelope	Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (-2 to 2) for envelopes.
	Recycled	Displays the temperature setting of the fuser (-2 to 2) for recycled paper.
Auto Registration Adjustment Displays whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.
Adjust Altitude Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
Non-Dell Toner		Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
Clock Settings	Date Format	Displays the default date format.
	Time Format	Displays the default time format; 24H or 12H.
	Time Zone	Displays the default time zone.
	Set Date	Displays the date setting.
	Set Time	Displays the time setting.
Web Link Customization	Select Reorder URL	Displays a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
	Regular Displays the regular URL (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order Supplies at:.
	Premier Displays the premier URL (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to Order Supplies at:.
Dell ColorTrack	ColorTrack Mode	Displays whether to enable the ColorTrack.
	No Account User Print	Displays whether to permit the printing of data without authentication information.
	ColorTrack Error Report	Displays whether to print the error report on the ColorTrack mode.
Tray Settings	Tray 1 Paper Size	Displays the paper size setting of the standard 250-sheet tray.
	Tray 1 Paper Type	Displays the paper type setting of the standard 250-sheet tray.
	Tray 1 Custom Size - Y	Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
	Tray 1 Custom Size - X	Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
	Tray 1 Display Popup	Displays whether to show a popup menu that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
	Tray 2 Paper Size*4	Displays the paper size setting of the optional 250-sheet feeder.
	Tray 2 Paper Type*4	Displays the paper type setting of the optional 250-sheet feeder.
	Tray 2 Display Popup*4	Displays whether to show a popup menu that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the optional 250-sheet feeder.

*1 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed to Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.
*2 This item is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed.
*3 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.
*4 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.

Reports

Purpose:

To print various types of reports and lists.

Values:

System Settings	Click the Start button to print the System Settings page.
Panel Settings	Click the Start button to print the Panel Settings page.
PCL Fonts List	Click the Start button to print the PCL (Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) Fonts List.
PCL Macro List	Click the Start button to print the PCL Macro List.
PDF Fonts List	Click the Start button to print the PDF Fonts List.
Job History	Click the Start button to print the Job History report.
Error History	Click the Start button to print the Error History report.
Print Meter	Click the Start button to print the Print Meter report.
Color Test Page	Click the Start button to print the Color Test Page.
Protocol Monitor	Click the Start button to print the Protocol Monitor report.
Speed Dial	Click the Start button to print the Speed Dial report.
Address Book	Click the Start button to print the Address Book report.
Server Address	Click the Start button to print the Server Address report.
Fax Activity	Click the Start button to print the Fax Activity report.
Fax Pending	Click the Start button to print the Fax Pending report.
Stored Documents*1	Click the Start button to print the Stored Documents list.

*1 This item is available only when RAM disk is enabled

Printer Settings

The Printer Settings tab includes System Settings, USB Settings, PCL Settings, PDF Settings, Secure Settings, Copy Defaults, Copy Color Balance, Copy Settings, Fax Defaults, Fax Settings, Scan Defaults, and Print from USB Defaults pages.

System Settings

Purpose:

To configure the basic printer settings.

Values:

Power Saver Time - Sleep Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job.
Power Saver Time - Deep Sleep Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has entered Sleep mode.
Power Saver Wake Up - OffHook Wake Up	Sets whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is set to Off.
Auto Reset Sets the amount of time before the printer automatically resets the settings on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made.
Fault Time-Out	Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally.
Job Time-Out	Sets the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.
Control Panel Tone	Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct, or disables the tone.
Invalid Key Tone	Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect, or disables the tone.
Machine Ready Tone	Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready, or disables the tone.

Copy Completed Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is complete, or disables the tone.

Job Completed Tone	Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than a copy job is complete, or disables the tone.
Fault Tone	Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally, or disables the tone.
Alert Tone	Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs, or disables the tone.
Out of Paper Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper, or disables the tone.
Low Toner Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low, or disables the tone.
Auto Clear Alert Tone	Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear, or disables the tone.
Base Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel screen returns to the default setting by scrolling the loop menu, or disables the tone.
All Tones	Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.
mm / inch Sets the measurement unit to be used on the operator panel screen as either mm or inches.
Default Print Paper Size Sets the default print paper size.
Auto Log Print Specifies if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.
Print ID	Sets where to print the user ID on the output paper.
Print Text	Sets whether the printer outputs PDL data (which is not supported by the printer) as text when the printer receives it.
Banner Sheet Insert Position*1	Sets where to insert a banner sheet in the output.
Banner Sheet Specify Tray*1	Sets from which tray a banner sheet is fed.
RAM Disk*2	Sets whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure Print and Store Print features.
Substitute Tray	Sets whether to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.
Letterhead Duplex Mode*3 Sets whether to print on both sides of letterhead.
Low Toner Alert Msg Alerts you if the toner is low.
Panel Language Used to set the language on the operator panel.
*1 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed to Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.
*2 This item is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed.
*3 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

USB Settings

Purpose:

To change USB settings on your printer.

Values:

USB Port Enables the USB interface on your printer.

PCL Settings

Purpose:

To change the PCL settings.

Values:

Paper Tray Sets the paper input tray.
Paper Size Sets the paper size.
Custom Size - Y	Sets the length of custom size paper. The available range is from 127 mm (5.0 inch) to 355 mm (14.0 inch).
Custom Size - X	Sets the width of custom size paper. The available range is from 77 mm (3.0 inch) to 215 mm (8.5 inch).
Orientation	Sets how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Font Sets the font from the list of registered fonts.
Symbol Set Sets a symbol set for the specified font.
Font Size	Sets the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Font Pitch	Sets the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.
Form Line Sets the number of lines in a page.
Quantity Sets the number of copies to print.
Image Enhancement	Sets whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
Hex Dump	Sets whether to help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.
Draft Mode Sets whether to print in the draft mode.
Line Termination	Sets how to handle line terminations.
Default Color	Sets the print color mode as Color or Black. This setting is used for print jobs without a specified color print mode.

PDF Settings

Purpose:

To change the PDF settings.

Values:

Quantity Sets the number of copies.
2 Sided*1	Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Print Mode Sets a print mode.
PDF Password Sets a password.
Re-enter PDF Password Confirms the set password.
Collated Sets whether to sort the output.
Output Size	Sets the output paper size.
Layout	Sets the output layout.
Output Color	Sets the output color.
*1 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Secure Settings

Panel Lock

Purpose:

To set a limited access to Admin Menu with a password, and to set or change the password.

Set the password of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.

Values:

Panel Lock Set	Enables/Disables password protection for the Admin Menu.
New Password	Sets a password that is required to access the Admin Menu.
Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.

NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel. When you change the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password on the left frame and set the password.

Function Enabled

Purpose:

To specify whether to lock the Copy, Scan, and Fax services with a password, and to set or change the password.

Set the password of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.

Values:

Copy	Sets whether to lock the Copy service with a password.
Fax Sets whether to lock the Fax service with a password.
Scan Sets whether to lock the Scan service with a password.
Print from USB Sets whether to lock the Print from USB service with a password.
New Password Sets a password that is required to access the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print from USB services.
Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.

Secure Receive

Purpose:

Allows you to password protect all the incoming faxes. When the Secure Receive feature is enabled, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.

Set the password of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server Settings.

Values:

Secure Receive Set	Enables/Disables password protection for all incoming faxes.
New Password Sets a password for incoming faxes.
Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.

Login Error

Purpose:

To specify how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock, Function Enabled, and Secure Receive.

Values:

Login Attempts

Displays how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock, Function Enabled, and Secure Receive.

Set Available Time - Print/Copy/Fax/Scan

Purpose:

To specify the time to enable the secure setting for the Print, Copy, Fax, and Scan services.

Values:

Set Available Time	Allows you to set the available time period for the Print, Copy, Fax, and Scan services.
Start Time Sets the start time of the available time period for the Print, Copy, Fax, and Scan services.

End Time Sets the end time of the available time period for the Print, Copy, Fax, and Scan services.

Recurrence Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.

Secure Job Expiration

NOTE: Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed.

Purpose:

To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.

Values:

Expiration Mode	Allows you to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the optional 512 MB memory module.
Expiration Time	Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the optional 512 MB memory module.
Recurrence Sets the period to repeat the setting.
Weekly Settings	Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.
Monthly Settings	Sets the day of the month to repeat the setting.

Copy Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own default Copy settings.

Values:

Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.

Select Tray Sets the default input tray.

SSF Paper Size Sets the size of paper loaded in the single sheet feeder.

SSF Paper Type Sets the type of paper loaded in the single sheet feeder.

Collated Sets whether to sort a copy job.

Reduce/Enlarge

Sets the default reduction/enlargement ratio.

Custom Reduce/Enlarge Sets the custom reduction/enlargement ratio.

Document Size Sets the paper size of the original.

Original Type Sets the type of the original.

Lighter/Darker Sets the default copy density.

Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.

Color Saturation Adjusts the saturation of colors to make the colors lighter or darker than the original.

Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.

Auto Exposure Level Sets the background suppression level.

Copy Color Balance

Purpose:

To specify the copy color balance.

Values:

Yellow Low Dens.	Sets the color balance level of low density yellow.
Yellow Medium Dens.	Sets the color balance level of medium density yellow.
Yellow High Dens.	Sets the color balance level of high density yellow.
Magenta Low Dens.	Sets the color balance level of low density magenta.
Magenta Medium Dens.	Sets the color balance level of medium density magenta.
Magenta High Dens.	Sets the color balance level of high density magenta.
Cyan Low Dens.	Sets the color balance level of low density cyan.
Cyan Medium Dens.	Sets the color balance level of medium density cyan.
Cyan High Dens.	Sets the color balance level of high density cyan.
Black Low Dens.	Sets the color balance level of low density black.
Black Medium Dens.	Sets the color balance level of medium density black.
Black High Dens.	Sets the color balance level of high density black.

Copy Settings

Purpose:

To configure the Copy settings.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Values:

2 Sided*1	Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Multiple-Up Off	*	Does not perform multiple-up printing.
	Auto	Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
	ID Copy	Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.
	Manual	Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the size specified for Reduce/Enlarge.
Margin Top/Bottom	Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
Margin Left/Right	Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
Margin Middle	Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
*1	This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Fax Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own default Fax settings.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Values:

Resolution Standard *	Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine	Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution.
Photo Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
Lighter/Darker Sets the default density to fax your documents lighter or darker.
Delayed Start Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.

Fax Settings

Purpose:

To configure the Fax settings.

NOTE: You cannot set up the items on the Fax Settings page unless you set up the country code under Country.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Values:

Receive Mode Fax *		Automatically receives faxes.
	Telephone	Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external phone and then pressing a remote receive code, or by setting OnHook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine) and then pressing the ▷ (Start) button.
	Telephone/Fax	When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
	Answer Machine/Fax	The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not supported.
	DRPD	Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Auto Receive Fax	Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after answering an incoming call.
Auto Receive Tel/Fax	Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Auto Receive Answer/Fax	Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.
Line Monitor	Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
Ring Tone Volume	Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.

Line Type Sets the default line type; PSTN or PBX.
Tone/Pulse Sets whether to use tone or pulse dialing.
Resend Delay	Sets the interval (3–255 seconds) between re-send attempts.
Redial Attempts	Sets the number of redial attempts (0–13) to make if the destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not redial.
Redial Delay	Sets the interval (1–15 minutes) between redial attempts.
Junk Fax Setup	Sets whether to reject unwanted faxes by accepting only the faxes from the numbers registered in the Phone Book
Remote Receive	Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
Remote Receive Tone	Sets a 2-digit remote receive code when Remote Receive is On.
Fax Header	Sets whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.
Fax Header Name	Allows you to enter a name that will be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Number	Allows you to enter the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page	Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern	Sets the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting from Pattern1 to Pattern7.DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies.
Duplex Print*1	Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Sent Fax Forward	Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Fax Forward Number	Allows you to enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Prefix Dial Sets whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Number	Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size	Sets whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page.
ECM	Sets whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.
Modem Speed	Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
Country Sets the country where the printer is used.
Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.
Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.
Fax Protocol	Sets whether to print the protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.
*1 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Scan Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own default Scan settings.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Values:

Scan To Network	Computer (Network)*	Stores scanned documents on a computer using the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.
	Server (FTP)	Stores scanned documents on a server using the FTP protocol.
File Format	Sets the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved.
Color	Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Black & White Button	Displays whether to scan in black and white or in grayscale when Black & White is selected for a color mode.
Color Button	Displays whether to scan in color or in color (Photo) when Color is selected for a color mode.
Resolution Sets the default scan resolution.
Document Size Sets the paper size of the original.
Lighter/Darker Sets the default scan density.
Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.
Contrast Sets the default contrast level.
Auto Exposure	Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Auto Exposure Level	Sets the default background suppression level.
Margin Top/Bottom	Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
Margin Left/Right	Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
Margin Middle	Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm (0.0 inch) to 50 mm (2.0 inch).
TIFF File Format	Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.
Image Compression	Sets the image compression level.
Max Email Size	Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes.
Email From Field	Sets whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E-mail.

Print from USB Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own Print from USB Defaults setting.

Values:

Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.

Select Tray Sets the default input tray.

SSF Paper Size Sets the size of paper loaded in the single sheet feeder.

SSF Paper Type Sets the paper type loaded in the single sheet feeder.

2 Sided*1 Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Layout Sets the output layout.

PDF Password Sets a password.

Re-enter PDF Password Confirms the set password.

*1 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Printer Maintenance

The Printer Maintenance tab includes the Paper Density, Adjust BTR, Adjust Fuser, Auto Registration Adjustment, Color Registration Adjustments, Clean Developer, Reset Defaults, Initialize PrintMeter, Storage, Non-Dell Toner, Adjust Altitude, Clock Settings, and Web Link Customization pages.

Paper Density

Purpose:

To specify the paper density.

Values:

Plain	Sets the density of plain paper to Light or Normal.
Label	Sets the density of labels to Light or Normal.

Adjust BTR

Purpose:

To specify the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller.

Values:

Plain	Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Plain Thick Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick plain paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Covers	Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Covers Thick	Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick cover paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Label	Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels within the range of -6 to 6.
Coated Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Coated Thick	Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick coated paper within the range of -6 to 6.
Envelope	Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for envelopes within the range of -6 to 6.
Recycled	Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled paper within the range of -6 to 6.

Adjust Fuser

Purpose:

To specify the temperature settings value for the fuser.

Values:

Plain Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for plain paper within the range of -2 to 2.

Plain Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick plain paper within the range of -2 to 2.

Covers	Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for cover paper within the range of -2 to 2.
Covers Thick	Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick cover paper within the range of -2 to 2.
Label Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for labels within the range of -2 to 2.
Coated Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for coated paper within the range of -2 to 2.
Coated Thick Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick coated paper within the range of -2 to 2.
Envelope Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for envelopes within the range of -2 to 2.
Recycled	Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for recycled paper within the range of -2 to 2.

Auto Registration Adjustment

Purpose:

To specify whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.

Color Registration Adjustments

Purpose:

To specify whether to manually perform color registration adjustment.

Manual Color Registration Adjustments are required such as when the printer is initially installed and after the printer is moved.

NOTE: The Color Registration Adjustments feature can be configured when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off.

Values:

Auto Correct Click the Start button to automatically perform color registration correction.

Color Regi Chart

Click the Start button to print a color registration chart. The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow, magenta, and cyan lines. On the chart, look at the values on the right side that are next to the line that is perfectly straight for each of the three colors. If the value for this line is 0, color registration adjustment is not required. If the value for this line is any value other than 0, specify the adjustment values under Color Registration Adjustments.

Color Registration Adjustments

Sets lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) and process (paper feed direction) color adjustment values individually for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan within the range of -9 to 9.

Clean Developer

Purpose:

To clean each toner cartridge or PHD unit, or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.

Values:

Clean Developer Stirs the toner in a new toner cartridge.
Yellow Toner Refresh	Cleans the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.
Magenta Toner Refresh	Cleans the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.
Cyan Toner Refresh Cleans the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.
Black Toner Refresh Cleans the toner in the black toner cartridge.
Drum Refresh Cleans the surface of the PHD unit.

Reset Defaults

Purpose:

To initialize wired network data stored in non-volatile memory (NVM). After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wired network settings are reset to their default values.

Reset Defaults Reset Defaults UserFax Section and restart printer.		Click the Start button to reset the fax number entries in the Address Book.
Power On Wizard	Power On Wizard	Click the Start button to perform the initial setup for the printer.

Initialize PrintMeter

Purpose:

To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to 0.

Storage

NOTE: Storage feature is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed.

Purpose:

To clear all files stored in the optional 512 MB memory module.

Values:

Clear Storage	All Clear	Click the Start button to clear all files stored as Secure Print and Proof Print in the optional 512 MB memory module.
	Secure Document	Click the Start button to clear all files stored as Secure Print in the optional 512 MB memory module.
	Stored Document	Click the Start button to clear all files stored in the optional 512 MB memory module.

Non-Dell Toner

Purpose:

To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

NOTICE: Using a non-Dell toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.

Adjust Altitude

Purpose:

To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.

Clock Settings

Purpose:

To specify the clock settings.

Values:

Date Format Sets the date format; yy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yy, or dd/mm/yy.

Time Format Sets the time format; 24H or 12H.

Time Zone Sets the time zone.

Set Date Sets the current date.

Set Time Sets the current time.

Web Link Customization

Purpose:

To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Values:

Select Reorder Sets a URL to be linked to Order Supplies at: URL

Regular	Displays the regular URL (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order Supplies at:.
Premier	Displays the premier URL (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to Order Supplies at:.

Print Server Settings

Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions for communication.

The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame.

Print Server Reports

The Print Server Reports tab includes the Print Server Setup Page and the E-Mail Alert Setup Page.

Print Server Setup Page

Purpose:

To verify the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol and printing ports. On this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.

Values:

Ethernet^*1	Ethernet Settings	Displays the current settings of Ethernet transmission rate and the duplex settings.
	Current Ethernet Settings	Displays the current Ethernet settings.

MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control Address (MAC) address of the printer.

Wireless Settings*2	SSID Displays the MAC address of the printer.
	Network Type Displays the name that identifies the network.
	MAC Address Displays the network type from either the Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure mode.
	Link Channel Displays the MAC address of the wireless printer adapter.
	Link Quality Displays the channel number of the connection.
TCP/IP Settings	IP Mode Displays the IP mode.
	Host Name Displays the host name.
	IPv4*3	IP Address Mode Displays the IP address mode.
		IP Address Displays the IP address.
		Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
		Gateway Address Displays the gateway address.
	IPv6*4	Enable Stateless Address Displays whether to enable the stateless address.
		Use Manual Address Displays whether to set the IP address manually.
		Manual Address *5 Displays the IP address.
		Stateless Address 1-3*6 Displays the stateless addresses.
		Link Local Address *6 Displays the link local address.
		Manual Gateway Address *5 Displays the gateway address.
		Auto Configure Gateway Address *6 Displays the gateway address.

DNS IPv4	*3	Get DNS Server Address from DHCP	Displays whether to automatically set the DNS server address via DHCP.
		Current DNS Server Address	Displays the current DNS server address.
	IPv6*4	Get DNS Server Address from DHCPv6-lite	Displays if the printer receives the DNS server address automatically from the DHCPv6-lite server.
		Current DNS Server Address	Displays the current DNS server address.
		Priority to IPv6 DNS Name Resolution*7	Displays whether to use the DNS Name Resolution feature.
WINS WINS Mode Displays whether to automatically set the primary and secondary WINS server addresses via DHCP.
LPD Port Status Displays the port status of the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) protocol.
Port9100 Port Status Displays the port status.
IPP Port Status Displays the port status.
	Printer URI Displays the printer URI.
	Connection Time-Out Displays the connection time-out period.
	Port Number Displays the port number.
	Maximum Sessions Displays the maximum number of connections received simultaneously by the client.
WSD Port Status Displays the WSD port status.
SMB Port Status Displays the port status.
	Host Name Displays the host name.
	Workgroup Displays the workgroup.
	Maximum Sessions	Displays the maximum number of sessions.
	Unicode Support	Displays whether to notify the host name and workgroup name in Unicode characters during SMB transmission.
	Auto Master Mode	Displays whether to enable the Auto Master Mode.
	Encrypt Password	Displays whether to encrypt the password during SMB transmission.
	Job Time-Out Displays the job time-out period.
	Connection Time-Out	Displays the connection time-out period.
Bonjour (mDNS)	Port Status Displays the port status.
	Host Name Displays the host name.
	Printer Name Displays the printer name.
Telnet Port Status Displays the port status.
			Connection Time-Out	Displays the connection time-out period.
SNMP Port Status Displays the port status.
			Enable SNMP v1/v2c Protocol	Displays the status of the SNMP v1/v2c feature.
			Enable SNMP v3 Protocol	Displays the status of the SNMP v3 feature.
Update Address Book	Port Status Displays the port status.
	Connection Time-Out	Displays the connection time-out period.
LLTD Port Status Displays the port status.
FTP Client Connection Time-Out		Displays the connection time-out period.
SMB Client Connection Time-Out		Displays the connection time-out period.
SSL/TLS HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication		Displays the status of the HTTP - SSL/TLS Communication.
IPsec Settings Protocol Displays the protocol status.
	IKE Displays IKE authentication.
802.1x*1	Enable IEEE 802.1x	Displays the status of IEEE 802.1x.
	Authentication Method	Displays the setting of authentication method for IEEE 802.1x.
IP Filter (IPv4)*8	Access List Displays the list of IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer.
*1	This item is available only when the printer is connected using LAN cable.
*2	This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network
*3	This item is displayed when IPv4 Mode is selected.
*4	This item is displayed when IPv6 Mode is selected.
*5	This item is displayed only when Use Manual Address is set to Enable.
*6	This item is displayed only when an IP address has been assigned.
*7	This item is available only when using IPv6 dual mode.
*8	This item is available only for LPD or Port9100.

E-Mail Alert Setup Page

Purpose:

To verify the current settings of SMTP/POP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol/Post Office Protocol) used for the e-mail feature and E-Mail Alerts feature. In this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.

Values:

E-Mail Server Settings	Port Status Displays the port status.
	Primary SMTP Gateway	Displays the primary SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) gateway.
	SMTP Port Number	Displays the SMTP port number.
	E-Mail Send Authentication	Displays the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
	POP3 Server Address	Displays the POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) server address.
	POP3 Port Number	Displays the POP3 port number.
	Reply Address	Displays the IP address of servers connected with SMTP protocol when data is incoming.
	SMTP Server Connection	Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.
E-Mail Alert Settings	E-Mail List 1 Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail List 1.
	Select Alerts for List 1	Supplies Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive status for consumables.
		Paper Handling Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive status for paper handling.
		Service Call Displays the e-mail alert receive status for service calls.
	E-Mail List 2 Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail List 2.
	Select Alerts for List 2	Supplies Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive status for consumables.
		Paper Handling Alerts Displays the e-mail alert receive status for paper handling.
		Service Call Displays the e-mail alert receive status for service calls.

Print Server Settings

The Print Server Settings tab includes the Basic Information, Port Settings, TCP/IP, SMB, E-Mail Alert, Bonjour (mDNS), SNMP, Scan to PC, LLTD, Wireless LAN, and Reset Print Server pages.

Basic Information

Purpose:

To configure basic information of the printer.

Values:

System Settings	Printer Name Sets the name of the printer.
	Location Sets the location of the printer.
	Contact Person Sets the contact name, number, and other information of the printer administrator and service center.
	Administrator E-Mail Address Sets the contact address of the printer administrator and service center.
	Asset Tag Number	Enters the asset tag number for the printer.
EWS Settings	Auto Refresh	Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages.
	Auto Refresh Interval	Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status display pages automatically from 15 to 600 seconds.

NOTE: The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame, Printer Status page, Job List page, and Completed Jobs page.

Port Settings

Purpose:

To enable or disable printing ports and management protocol features.

Values:

Ethernet^*1	Ethernet Settings	Auto Detects the Ethernet transmission rate and the duplex settings automatically.
		10BASE-T Half-Duplex	Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex as the default value.
		10BASE-T Full-Duplex	Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex as the default value.
		100BASE-TX Half-Duplex	Selects 100Base-TX Half-Duplex as the default value.
		100BASE-TX Full-Duplex	Selects 100Base-TX Full-Duplex as the default value.
		1000BASE-T Full-Duplex	Selects 1000Base-T Full-Duplex as the default value.
	Current Ethernet Settings Displays the current settings of the Ethernet.
	MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the printer.
Port Status LPD Sets whether to enable LPD.
				Network TWAIN Sets whether to enable Network TWAIN

*1 This item is available only when the printer is connected using LAN cable.

NOTE: The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is rebooted. When you change or configure the settings, click the Apply New

Settings button to apply the new settings.

TCP/IP

Purpose:

To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.

Values:

TCP/IP Settings	IP Mode Sets the IP mode.
	Host Name Sets the host name.
	IPv4 IP Address	Sets the method for acquiring the IP address.
	Manual IP Address	When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
	Manual Subnet Mask	When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255. 255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
	Manual Gateway Address	When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
IPv6 Enable	Stateless Address	Select the check box to enable the stateless address.
	Use Manual Address	Select the check box to set the IP address manually.
	Manual Address	Sets the IP address. To specify an IPv6 address, enter the address followed by a slash (/) and then "64". For details, consult your system administrator.
	Manual Gateway Address	Sets the gateway address.
DNS DNS Domain Name	Sets the DNS domain name.
IPv4 Get DNS	Server Address from DHCP	Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the DNS server address via DHCP.
	Manual DNS Server Address	Manually sets the DNS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when Get DNS Server Address from DHCP is not selected.
IPv6 Get DNS	Server Address from DHCPv6-lite	Select the check box to get the DNS server address automatically from the DHCPv6-lite server.
	Manual DNS Server Address	Sets the DNS server address.
	Priority to IPv6 DNS Name Resolution	Select the check box to enable the DNS Name Resolution feature.
WINS	WINS Mode	Allows you to enable or disable the automatic setting of the primary and secondary WINS server addresses via DHCP.
	WINS Primary Server	Manually sets the primary WINS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS Mode is not selected.
	WINS Secondary Server	Manually sets the secondary (backup) WINS server address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS Mode is not selected.
LPD Connection Time-Out		Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.
		IP Filter (IPv4) Click IP Filter (IPv4) to set the IP Filter settings on the IP Filter (IPv4) page.
Port9100 Port Number Sets the port number from 9,000 to 9,999.
			Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 1,000 seconds.
			IP Filter (IPv4) Click IP Filter (IPv4) to set the IP filter settings on the IP Filter (IPv4) page.
IPP Printer URI Displays the printer URI.
			Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.
			Port Number Displays the port number for receiving requests from the client.
			Maximum Sessions Displays the maximum number of connections received simultaneously by the client.
WSD Port Number Sets the port number to 80 or from 8,000 to 9,999.
			Receive Time-Out Sets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65,535 seconds.
			Notification Time-Out Sets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.
			Maximum Number of TTL Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.
			Maximum Number of Notification Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20.

Network TWAIN	Connection Time-Out	Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 65,535 seconds.
HTTP Port Number Sets the port number to 80 or from 8,000 to 9,999.
	Simultaneous Connections	Displays the maximum number of simultaneous connections.
	Connection Time-Out	Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255 seconds.
Telnet Password Sets the password for Telnet.
	Re-enter Password	Confirms the set password.
	Connection Time-Out	Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1,000 seconds.
Update Address Book	Connection Time-Out	Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 65,535 seconds.

To configure the IP Filter feature, enter an IP address to be filtered in the Address field and the Subnet Mask in the Address Mask field. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field. "*" is appended to the current value.

IP Filter Setup Procedure

You can set up to a maximum of five items and the first item set takes priority. When setting multiple filters, enter the shortest address first followed by a slightly longer address, a longer address and so on.

Enabling Printing From a Specified User

The following describes the procedure to enable printing only from the "192.168.100.10" IP address.

1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2 Enter "192.168.100.10" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.
3 Select Permit.
4 Click Apply New Settings.

Disabling Printing From a Specified User

The following describes the procedure to disable printing only from the "192.168.100.10" IP address.

1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2 Enter "192.168.100.10" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.
3 Select Reject.
4 Click the first column of the Access List row 2.
5 Enter "0.0.0.0" in the Address field and "0.0.0.0" in the Address Mask field.
6 Select Permit.
7 Click Apply New Settings.

Enabling and Disabling Printing from Network Addresses

You can enable printing from the "192.168" network address and disable printing from the "192.168.200" network address.

The example below describes how to enable printing from the "192.168.200.10" IP address.

1 Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2 Enter "192.168.200.10" in the Address field and "255.255.255.255" in the Address Mask field.
3 Select Permit.
4 Click the first column of the Access List row 2.
5 Enter "192.168.200.0" in the Address field and "255.255.255.0" in the Address Mask field.
6 Select Reject.
7 Click the first column of the Access List row 3.
8 Enter "192.168.0.0" in the Address field and "255.255.0.0" in the Address Mask field.
9 Select Permit.
10 Click Apply New Settings.

SMB

Purpose:

To specify the setting of the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.

Values:

Host Name Sets the host name of the server computer.
Workgroup Sets the workgroup.
Maximum Sessions Sets the maximum number of sessions.
Unicode Support	Sets whether to notify the host name and workgroup name in Unicode characters during SMB transmission.
Auto Master Mode Sets whether to enable the Auto Master Mode.
Encrypt Password Sets whether to encrypt the password.
Job Time-Out	Sets the job time-out period between 60 and 3,600 seconds.
Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period between 60 and 3,600 seconds.

E-Mail Alert

Purpose:

To configure detailed settings for the E-Mail Alert. This page can also be displayed by clicking the E-Mail Alert in the left frame.

Values:

E-Mail Server Settings	Primary SMTP Gateway	Sets the primary SMTP gateway.
	SMTP Port Number	Sets the SMTP port number. This must be 25,587 or between 5,000 and 65,535.
	E-Mail Send Authentication	Sets the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.

SMTP Login User	Sets the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.
SMTP Login Password	Sets the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter SMTP Login Password	Confirms the set SMTP account password.
POP3 Server Address*1	Sets the POP3 server address in IP address format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters.
POP3 Port Number*1	Sets the POP3 server port number. This must be 110 or between 5,000 and 65,535.
POP User Name*1	Sets the POP3 account user name. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.
POP User Password*1	Sets the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter POP User Password*1	Confirms the set password.
Reply Address	Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each E-mail Alert.
SMTP Server Connection	Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.

E-Mail Alert Settings	E-Mail List 1 Sets acceptable e-mail
			addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
	Select Alerts for List 1	Supplies Alerts	Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for consumables.
		Paper Handling Alerts	Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for paper handling.
		Service Call Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for Service Calls.
	E-Mail List 2 Sets acceptable e-mail
	Select Alerts for List 2	Supplies Alerts	Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for consumables.
		Paper Handling Alerts	Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for paper handling.
		Service Call Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for Service Calls.

*1 This item is available only when POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP (APOP) for E-Mail Send Authentication is selected.

Bonjour (mDNS)

Purpose:

To configure the detailed settings of Bonjour.

Host Name

Sets the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-" (dash).

The original setting will remain valid if no input is made.

Printer Name

Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol sets. The original setting will remain valid if no input is made.

SNMP

Purpose:

To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.

Values:

SNMPConfiguration	Enable SNMPv1/v2cProtocol	Select the check box to enable the SNMP v1/v2c protocol.
	Edit SNMPv1/v2cProperties	Click to display SNMP v1/v2c page and to edit the setting of SNMP v1/v2c protocol from the page.
	Enable SNMPv3 Protocol	Select the check box to enable the SNMP v3 protocol.
	Edit SNMP v3Properties	Click to display SNMP v3 page and to edit the setting of SNMP v3 protocol from the page.You can click this item only when SSL communication is enabled.

SNMP v1/v2c

Purpose:

To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v1/v2 protocol.

To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v1/v2 Properties in the SNMP page.

Values:

Community Name

Community Name (Read only) ^*1

Sets the community name to access (read only) data using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered for community name in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read Community is public.

Re-enter Community Name (Read only) ^*1	Enters the community name to access (read only) data again to confirm it.
Community Name (Read/Write) ^*1	Sets the community name to access (read and write) data using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered for community name in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read/Write Community is private.
Re-enter Community Name (Read/Write) ^*1	Enters the community name to access (read and write) data again to confirm it.
Community Name (Trap) ^*1	Sets the community name used for trap up to 31 alphanumeric characters.The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered for Community Name (Trap) in the previous settings will not be displayed on the screen. The default Trap Community is " "(NULL).
Re-enter Community Name (Trap) ^*1	Enters the community name used for trap again to confirm it.

Trap Notification 1-4	Trap Address Type	Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence. In this case, specify the IP address and IP socket in the following format:
	Trap Address Port Number	IPv4
	Notify	Specify the IP address and IP socket in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each section of "nnn" is a variable value between 0 and 255. Note that values 127 and 224-254 are not valid for the first three-digits only. IP socket mmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65,535.
		IPv6
		Specify the IP address and IP socket in the xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmm mm format. Each section of "xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff. IP socket mmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65,535.
	Authenticate Error Trap	Select the check box to notify Authenticate Error Trap.

*1 The default value can be changed by using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

SNMP v3

Purpose:

To edit the detailed settings of SNMP v3 protocol.

To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v3 Properties in the SNMP page.

Values:

Administrator Account	Account Enabled	Select the check box to enable the administrator account.
	User Name	Enters the user name of the administrator account.
	Authentication Password	Sets the authentication password of the administrator account using 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters.
	Re-enter Authentication Password	Confirms the set password.
	Privacy Password	Sets the privacy password of the administrator account using 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters.
	Re-enter Privacy Password	Confirms the set password.
Print Drivers / Remote Client Account	Account Enabled	Select the check box to enable the print drivers and remote client account.
	Reset to default Password	Click to reset the password for the print drivers and remote client account to default.

Scan To PC

Purpose:

To specify the client when scanning data.

Values:

FTP Client Connection Time-Out	Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.
FTP Passive Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.
SMB Client Connection Time-Out	Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.

LLTD

Purpose:

To specify the maximum number of devices.

Values:

Maximum number of device

Sets the maximum number of device from 64 to 1,024.

Wireless LAN

NOTE: Wireless LAN feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.

Purpose:

To configure the detailed setting for the wireless network.

To use the wireless adapter, be sure to disconnect the network cable.

NOTE: Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.

Values:

Wireless Settings	SSID Sets the name that identifies the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
	Network Type Sets the network type from either Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure.
	MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless adapter for the printer.
	Link Channel Displays the channel number of the wireless connection for the printer.
	Link Quality Displays the quality of the wireless network connection for the printer.
Security Settings	Encryption Select the security method from the list.
		No Security Sets No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying a security method from WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA-Enterprise.
		WEP Sets the WEP to use through the wireless network.
		WPA-PSK(WPA2-PSK) ^*1,2 Sets the WPA-PSK to use through the wireless network.
WEP	Encryption	Select the WEP key code from either Hex or Ascii.
	WEP Key 1 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.
	Re-enter WEP Key 1	Enters the WEP key 1 again to confirm it.
	WEP Key 2 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.
	Re-enter WEP Key 2	Enters the WEP key 2 again to confirm it.
	WEP Key 3 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.
	Re-enter WEP Key 3	Enters the WEP key 3 again to confirm it.
	WEP Key 4 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption.
	Re-enter WEP Key 4	Enters the WEP key 4 again to confirm it.
	Transmit Key Sets the transmit key type from the list.
WPA-PSK Pass Phrase Sets the pass phrase.
	Re-enter Pass Phrase	Enters the pass phrase again to confirm it.

*1 For encryption, AES or TKIP method is used.

*2 This item is available only when the Infrastructure mode is selected for Network Type.

NOTE: The optional wireless adapter supports WEP, WPA-PSK-TKIP, WPA-PSK-AES, and WPA-PSK-AES.

Reset Print Server

Purpose:

To initialize NVRAM (non-volatile RAM) for the network feature and reboot the printer. You can also initialize NVRAM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.

Values:

Initialize NICNVRAM Memory and restart printer	Click the Start button to initialize NVRAM, revert network settings to the factory default settings, and reboot the network capability.
Restart Printer	Click the Start button to reboot the printer.

Security

The Security tab includes Set Password, LDAP Server, LDAP User Mapping, SSL/TLS, IPsec, 802.1x and IP Filter (IPv4).

Set Password

Purpose:

To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Set the password of the operator panel from Panel Lock in the Printer Settings. This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the Left Frame.

NOTE: To restore the password to the default (NULL), initialize the non-volatile memory (NVM).

Values:

Administrator Password Sets the password using up to 10 alphanumeric characters.

Re-enter Administrator Password	Confirms the set password.
Access denial by the authentication failure of the Administrator	Sets the amount of time the administrator should wait for the access to the printer setup from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Sets the time period from 5 up to 255 seconds. The access is denied if the time-out time is exceeded. If you set 0, this mode is disabled.

LDAP Server

Purpose:

To specify the settings of the LDAP server.

Values:

Server Information (for Server Address/Phone Book)	IP Address / Host Name & Port	Sets IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port address must be 389, 3268, or between 5,000 and 65,535.
	Backup IP Address / Host Name & Port	Sets backup IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port address must be 389, 3268, or between 5,000 and 65,535.

LDAP Server Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.

Optional Information(for Server Address/Phone Book)	Search Directory Root	Enters the search directory root.
	Login Name Enters the login name of the administrator.
	Password Enters the administrator password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If the password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.
	Re-enter-Password	Enters the administrator password again to confirm it.
	Search Time-Out	Select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the LDAP server. Select Wait to specify the time between 5 and 120 seconds.
	Search Name Order	Sets the search order.
	Server Address Book	Select the check box to enable the server address book.
	Server Phone Book	Select the check box to enable the server phone book.

NOTE: Server Address Book must be set to On before you can use the server address book for the Scan to E-mail feature.

NOTE: Server Phone Book must be set to On before you can use the server phone book for the Fax service.

LDAP User Mapping

Purpose:

To specify the settings of the LDAP user mapping.

Values:

Common Name	Sets the attribute type of the common name set for the LDAP server.
Surname	Sets the attribute type of the surname set for the LDAP server.
Given Name	Sets the attribute type of the given name set for the LDAP server.
E-mail Address	Sets the attribute type of the e-mail address set for the LDAP server.
Fax Phone	Sets the attribute type of the fax phone number set for the LDAP server.

SSL/TLS

Purpose:

To specify the settings for the SSL encryption communication to the printer.

Values:

SSL/TLS	HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication^*1	Select the check box to enable the HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication.
	HTTP-SSL/TLSCommunicationPortNumber	Sets the port number, which is not identical with that of HTTP for SSL/TLS. This must be 443 or between 8,000 and 9,999.
MachineDigitalCertification	Generate Self-Signed Certificate*2	Click this button to display the Generate Self-Signed Certificate page.
	Certificate Details*3	Click this button to display the Certificate Details page for the contents of the certificate or to delete the certificate.
*1	This item is enabled only when you generate the self-signed certificate on the Generate Self-Signed Certificate page.
*2	This button is grayed out after you generate the self-signed certificate on the Generate Self-Signed Certificate page.
*3	This button is available only when HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication is set to Enable.

SSL/TLS (Generate Self-Signed Certificate)

Purpose:

To generate a self-signed certificate.

Values:

Generate Self-Signed Certificate	Size of Public Key	Sets the size of public key.
	Issuer	Sets the issuer of the self-signed certificate.
Generate Signed Certificate		Click this button to generate the signed certificate.
Back Click this button to go back to the previous page.

SSL/TLS (Certificate Details)

Purpose:

To refer to the contents of the certificate or delete the certificate.

Values:

Certificate Details	Category	Displays the category of the device to certificate.
	Issued To	Displays the device to certificate.
	Issuer Displays the issuer of the self-signed certificate.
	Serial Number Displays the serial number of the device.
	Size of Public Key Display the size of public key.
	Valid From Displays the time the certificate is valid.
	Valid Until Displays the time the certificate is invalid.
	Status Displays whether the certificate is valid or not.
	Certificate Purpose Displays the purpose of certificate.
	Certificate Selection Status	Displays the type of device certificate you selected.
Delete Click this button to delete the self-signed certificate.
Back Click this button to go back to the previous page.

IPsec

Purpose:

To specify the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol (IPsec) for encrypted communication to the printer.

Values:

IPsec Settings Protocol Select the check box to enable the protocol.
IKE	Sets IKE authentication. IKE is fixed to Pre-Shared Key.
Pre-Shared Key	Sets a shared key. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can be used.
Re-enter Pre-Shared Key	Enters the shared key again to confirm it.
IKE SA Lifetime	Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28,800 minutes.
IPsec SALifetime	Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2,880 minutes.
DH Group Sets the DH group.
PFS Select the check box to enable the PFS setting.
Remote peersIPv4 address	Sets the IP address to connect to.
Remote peersIPv6 address	Sets the IP address to connect to.
Non IPsec communication policy	Allows communication with a device which does not support IPsec.

NOTE: If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings, you must disable it using the Reset IPsec menu on the operator panel.

802.1x

Purpose:

To specify the settings for IEEE 802.1x authentication for encrypted communication to the printer.

Values:

Configure 802.1x	Enable IEEE 802.1x	Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1x authentication.
	Authentication Method	EAP-MD5 Selects the authentication method to use for IEEE 802.1x authentication.
		EAP-MS-CHAPv2
		PEAP/MS-CHAPv2
	Login Name: (Device Name)	Sets the login name (device name) for IEEE 802.1x authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric characters.
	Password Sets the login password for IEEE 802.1x authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric characters.
	Re-enter Password	Confirms the set login password.

IP Filter (IPv4)

Purpose:

To specify the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer.

Values:

Access List	Address	Sets the IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field.
	Address Mask Sets the subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field.
	Active Mode Reject Rejects printing from specified network address.

Copy Printer Settings

The Copy Printer Settings menu includes the Copy Printer Settings and Copy Printer Settings Report pages.

Copy Printer Settings

Purpose:

To copy the printer settings to one or more of the same model of the printer.

To copy the settings to another printer, specify the IP address and password of the printer to which the settings are copied in the IP Address text box and Password text box. Then, click the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list button. Copying the settings is complete. The connection time-out period is 60 seconds. After that, you can check whether the settings were copied to this page. And you need to check the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list and reboot the printer menu of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool in the destination printer to verify if the settings were actually copied or not.

If the settings can be copied but the printer configuration is different, the settings of only the same items are copied. Printer settings are simultaneously copied to printers of up to 10 IP addresses.

NOTE: You cannot copy the Address Book when the destination printer has a fax job.

Copy Printer Settings Report

Purpose:

To verify whether the printer setting is copied to other printers successfully.

NOTE: The history is cleared by turning off the printer.

Print Volume

The Printer Volume menu includes the Print Volume and Dell ColorTrack pages.

Print Volume

Purpose:

To verify the number of printed pages. This page can also be displayed by clicking Print Volume in the left frame.

Values:

Printer Page Count Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was shipped from the factory.
Paper Used	Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.

Dell ColorTrack

Purpose:

To specify which users have access to color printing and to limit print volume per user.

Values:

ColorTrack Mode	Sets whether to enable the ColorTrack mode, which specifies who has access to color printing.
No Account User Print	Sets whether to permit the printing of data without authentication information. To permit the printing for non-account user, set to On.
ColorTrack Error Report	Sets whether to automatically print error-related information if printing with ColorTrack results in an error.
User Registration*1	Click Edit User Registration to edit print user registrations.

*1 This item is available only when ColorTrack Mode is set to On.

Edit Print User Registration - List

Purpose:

To edit the print meter setting for each user.

Values:

User No. List to:	Selecting each button displays a list of print meter settings for the group of user registration numbers indicated on the button.
No. Displays the user registration number.
User Name	Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed in User Name when there is no registration.
MonoCount (Limit)	Displays the total number of monochrome pages printed to date and the maximum number of monochrome pages the user is permitted to print.
ColorCount (Limit)	Displays the total number of color pages printed to date and the maximum number of color pages the user is permitted to print.
Delete	Deletes the entry for the selected user registration number.
Confirm / Change	Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected user registration number.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user registration number.

Print User Settings (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:

To view or edit the user entries on the Edit Print User Registration page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the Edit Print User Registration page.

Values:

User Registration No.	Displays the selected user registration number.
Delete User*1	Click this button to display the Print User Settings - Delete page to delete the user from registration.
User Name Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the selected user registration number, or enter a user name for the new entry.
Password	Displays the password associated with the user name in asterisks, or allows you to enter a password for the new entry.
Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.
Color Mode Limitation	Sets whether to permit only monochrome printing or both color and monochrome printing.
Upper Limit for Color Print	Sets the maximum number of color pages the user is permitted to print.
Cumulative Color Page Count	Displays the total number of color pages printed to date.
Upper Limit for Monochrome Print	Sets the maximum number of monochrome pages the user is permitted to print.
Cumulative Monochrome Page Count	Displays the total number of monochrome pages printed to date.
Apply New Settings	Click this button to apply the new settings.
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back	Click this button to return to the Edit Print User Registration - List page.
*1 This item is available only when you click the Confirm / Change button.

Print User Settings (Delete)

Purpose:

To delete the user entries registered on the Edit Print User Registration page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the Edit Print User Registration page.

Values:

User Registration No.	Displays the selected user registration number.
User Name	Displays the name of the user registered under the user registration number.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Back	Click this button to return to the Edit Print User Registration page.

Address Book

The Address Book menu includes the E-Mail Address, Server Address, and Phone Book pages.

E-Mail Address	E-Mail Address	Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail address entries.
	E-Mail Group	Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.
	Default Setup	Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.
Server Address	Server Address	Allows you to view, edit, or create server address entries.
Phone Book	FAX Speed Dial	Allows you to view, edit, or create speed dial entries.
	FAX Group	Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.

E-Mail Address

The E-mail Address page includes the following subpages.

E-Mail Address Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail address entries.

E-Mail Group Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.

Default Setup Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.

E-Mail Address - Top Page

Purpose:

To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page.

Values:

Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user IDs indicated on the button.
ID Displays the user ID.
Name	Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed in Name when there is no registration.
Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.
Delete	Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.
Confirm / Change	Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected user ID.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user ID.

E-Mail Address (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:

To view or edit the e-mail address entries on the E-Mail Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the E-mail Address top page.

Values:

ID Displays the selected user ID.
Name	Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the user ID, or enter a name for the new entry.
Address	Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an e-mail address for the new entry.
Delete^*1	Click this button to delete the selected user.
Apply New Settings	Click this button to apply the new settings.
Restore Settings	Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.
*1 This item is available only when you click the Confirm / Change button.

E-Mail Address (Delete)

Purpose:

To delete the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the E-mail Address top page.

Values:

ID Displays the selected user ID.

Name Displays the name of the of the user registered under the selected user ID.

Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

E-Mail Group - Top Page

Purpose:

To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.

Values:

Group ID Displays the group ID.

Name Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed in Name when there is no registration.

Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.

Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.

Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.

E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:

To view or edit the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the E-Mail Group top page.

Values:

E-Mail Group ID Displays the selected group ID.

Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or enter a new group name.

Delete ^*1 Click this button to delete the current entry.

E-Mail Address	Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button.
	ID Displays the user ID.
		Select the check box on the left to create the group.
	Name	Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed in Name when there is no registration.
	Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an entry registered under the selected user ID, or enter an e-mail address for the new entry.
	Apply New Settings	Click this button to apply the new settings.
	Restore Settings	Click this button to restore the previous settings.
	Back Click this button to return to the top page.

*1 This item is available only when you click the Confirm / Change button.

E-Mail Group (Delete)

Purpose:

To delete the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the E-mail Group top page.

Values:

ID Displays the selected group ID.

Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

Default Setup

Purpose:

To set the default e-mail subject and message.

Values:

Default Subject Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject.

Body Text Allows you to enter the default e-mail message.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Server Address

Server Address - Top Page

Purpose:

To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.

Values:

Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button.
ID Displays the server ID.
Name	Displays the file directory name. (Not in Use) is displayed in Name when there is no registration.
Server Address	Displays the address of the file directory.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.
Confirm / Change	Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected server ID.
Create	Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected server ID.

Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:

To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm / Change or Create button on the Server Address top page.

Values:

ID Displays the selected server ID.
Name	Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server ID, or enter a new server name.
Server Type	Allows you to view the server type if you click the Confirm / Change button. Allows you to edit the server type if you click the Create button.
	FTP^*1	Select this to store scanned documents on a server via the FTP protocol.
	SMB^*1	Select this to store scanned documents on a computer via the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.
Server Address	Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the server ID, or enter a new server address.
Share Name*2	Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new shared name, when Server Type is set to SMB.
Server Path	Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new path.
Server Port Number	Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter a new port number. If you leave the text box blank, the default port number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) will be used.
Login Name Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a new login name.
Login Password	Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a new password.
Re-enter Password	Confirms the set password.
Delete^*3	Click this button to delete the current entry.
Apply New Settings	Click this button to apply the new settings.
Restore Settings	Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

*1 You can edit this item only when you click the Create button.
*2 This item is available only when Server Type is set to SMB.
*3 This item is available only when you click the Confirm / Change button.

Server Address (Delete)

Purpose:

To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the Server Address top page.

Values:

ID Displays the selected server ID.
Name Displays the name assigned for the server ID.
Server Address	Displays the server address registered under the server ID.
Apply New Settings	Click this button to apply the new settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.

Phone Book

The Phone Book page includes the following subpages.

FAX Speed Dial Allows you to view, edit, or create speed dial entries.

FAX Group Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.

FAX Speed Dial - Top Page

Purpose:

To view the fax number entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page.

Values:

Speed Dial List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial codes indicated on the button.

Speed Dial Displays the speed dial ID.

Name Displays the assigned name for a speed dial ID.
Phone Number	Displays the speed dial code. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected speed dial code.
Confirm / Change	Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected speed dial code.
Create	Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected speed dial code.

FAX Speed Dial (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:

To view or edit the speed dial entries on the FAX Speed Dial page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm / Change or Create button on the FAX Speed Dial top page.

Values:

Speed Dial Displays the selected speed dial code.
Name Allows you to view or edit the name of an entry registered under the speed dial code, or enter a name for the new entry.
Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.
Delete^*1	Click this button to delete the entry for the speed dial code. This button is available only on the dialog box for editing an existing entry.
Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.
Restore Settings	Click this button to restore the previous settings.
Back	Click this button to return to the top page.
*1 This item is available only when you click the Confirm / Change button.

FAX Speed Dial (Delete)

Purpose:

To delete the speed dial entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the FAX Speed Dial top page.

Values:

Speed Dial Displays the selected speed dial code.
Name	Displays the name registered under the speed dial code.
Phone Number	Displays the fax number registered under the speed dial code.
Apply New Settings	Click this button to apply the new settings.
Back Click this button to return to the top page.

FAX Group - Top Page

Purpose:

To view the fax group entries registered on the FAX Group page.

Values:

ID Displays a fax group ID.
Name	Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no registration.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.
Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.

FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)

Purpose:

To view or edit the fax number group entries on the FAX Group page, or create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the FAX Group top page.

Values:

FAX Group ID	Displays the selected group ID.
	Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or enter a new group name.
	Delete^*1	Click this button to delete the current entry.
FAX Speed Dial	Speed Dial List to:	Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed dial codes indicated on the button.
	Speed Dial Displays the speed dial code. Select the check box on the left to add the speed dial code in the group.
	Name Displays the name registered for the speed dial code. (Not in Use) is displayed in Name when there is no registration.
	Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under the selected speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.
	Apply New Settings	Click this button to apply the new settings.
	Restore Settings	Click this button to restore the previous settings.
	Back Click this button to return to the top page.

*2 This item is available only when you click the Confirm / Change button.

FAX Group (Delete)

Purpose:

To delete the fax number group entries registered on the FAX Group page. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete button on the FAX Group top page.

Values:

ID Displays the selected group ID.

Name Displays the name assigned for the group ID.

Apply New Settings Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back Click this button to return to the top page.

Tray Settings

Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray and the optional 250-sheet feeder.

Values:

Tray 1 Paper Size	Sets the size of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Paper Type	Sets the type of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Custom Size - Y	Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Custom Size - X	Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Display Popup	Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 2 Paper Size*1	Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional 250-sheet feeder.
Tray 2 Paper Type*1	Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 250-sheet feeder.
Tray 2 Display Popup*1	Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the optional 250-sheet feeder.
*1 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.

Print Media Guidelines

Print media refers to paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others. Your printer provides high-quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing troubles. This section describes selecting print media, caring for print media, and loading the print media in the standard 250-sheet tray.

Paper

For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m^2 (20 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. For the best print quality in black and white, use 90 g/m^2 (24 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media.

When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper accordingly. See "Loading Print Media in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder" and "Loading Print Media in the SSF" for detailed loading instructions.

Paper Characteristics

The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It is recommended that you follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper stock.

Weight

The tray automatically feeds paper weights from 60 g/m^2 to 216 g/m^2 (16 lb to 80 lb bond) grain long. The single sheet feeder automatically feeds paper weights from 60 g/m^2 to 216 g/m^2 (16 lb to 80 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than 60 g/m^2 (16 lb) may not feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m^2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper.

Curl

Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl usually occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper

unwrapped, even in the paper tray, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and cause feeding problems regardless of humidity. When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the single sheet feeder.

Smoothness

The degree of paper smoothness directly affects the print quality. If the paper is too rough, the toner does not fuse on to the paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems. Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture Content

The amount of moisture in the paper affects both the print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.

Grain Direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 g/m^2 to 135 g/m^2 (16 lb to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long fibers are recommended. For paper heavier than 135 g/m^2 (36 lb bond), grain short is preferred.

Fiber Content

Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100 % chemically pulped wood. Paper containing fibers such as cotton may lead to degraded paper handling.

Recommended Paper

To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m^2 (20 lb) xerographic paper. Business paper designed for general business use also provides acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand high temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. The laser printing process heats paper to high temperatures. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.

It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media. When choosing any print media, you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.

Unacceptable Paper

The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:

• Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless paper, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper.
• Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer.
• Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fuser.
• Preprinted paper that requires a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ± 0.09 inches, such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms.

In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.

• Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, and thermal paper.
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper.
• Recycled paper containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that does not meet DIN 19309.
• Multiple-part forms or documents.
• Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text) when printing on talc or acid paper.

Selecting Paper

Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.

To help avoid jams or poor print quality:

• Always use new, undamaged paper.
- Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
- Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed.
- Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam.

- Do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.

- Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the tray.

- Flex the paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

Illustration of two hands performing a foldable or folded device manipulation task, with green arrows indicating movement direction (no text or symbols present)

Selecting Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads

When selecting pre-printed and letterhead paper for the printer:

- Use grain long paper for best results.

- Use only forms and letterheads printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.

- Select paper that absorb ink, but does not bleed.

- Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

- Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must withstand temperatures of 225^ (437 °F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

- Use inks that are not affected by the resin in the toner or the silicone in the fuser. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.

Selecting Pre-Punched Paper

When selecting pre-punched paper for the printer:

- Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre-punched paper.

- Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam.

- Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper.

- Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched paper.

Printing on a Letterhead (Pre-Printed and Pre-Punched Paper)

Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the pre-printed letterhead that you have selected is acceptable for laser printers.

Page orientation is important when printing on pre-printed paper such as letterhead and pre-punched paper. The following table shows the orientation when loading letterheads in the tray or feeders. For other pre-printed and pre-punched paper, load the paper by reference to the following table.

Print media source Print side Page orientation

Standard 250-sheet tray and Optional 250-sheet feeder

Dell 2155cn Multifunction Color Printer Face up

Letterhead enters the printer last

LETTERIE40

Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Face down

Letterhead enters the printer first

NOTE: Set Letterhead Duplex Mode to Enable and Paper Type to Letterhead, Preprinted, or Prepunched from the operator panel or the printer driver even when you print on a single side of letterhead, pre-printed, or prepunched paper.

Print media source Print side Page orientation

Single sheet feeder (SSF)

Face down Letterhead enters

the printer first

Illustration showing a printer being inserted into a paper with a green arrow indicating the process.

Envelopes

Depending on the envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of wrinkling. It is recommended that you try a sample first before buying large quantities of any print media. See "Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder" or "Loading an Envelope in the SSF" for instructions on loading an envelope.

When printing on envelopes:

- Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.

- Set the print media source to the single sheet feeder or the standard 250-sheet tray. Set the paper type toEnvelope, and select the correct size of envelope from the printer driver.

- Use envelopes made from 75 ~g / m^-2 (20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105 g / m^2 (28 lb bond) weight for the envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25 % or less. Envelopes with 100 % cotton content must not exceed 90 ~g / m^2 (24 lb bond) weight.

- Use only freshly unpackaged, undamaged envelopes.

- Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205^ (401 °F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with the envelope supplier.

- Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.

- To load an envelope into the single sheet feeder, insert the envelope with the flaps closed and the short-edge of the envelope facing into the printer. The print side must be facing down.

- See " Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder" or "Loading an Envelope in the SSF" for instructions on loading an envelope.

- Use one envelope size during a print job.

- Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60% ) and the high printing temperatures may seal the envelopes.

- For best performance, do not use envelopes that:

• Have excessive curl or twist
• Are stuck together or damaged in any way
• Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
• Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
• Have an interlocking design
  – Have postage stamps attached
• Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
• Have nicked edges or bent corners
  – Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes

Labels

Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers.

When selecting labels:

• Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205^ (401 °F) and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi).
• Use labels that can be without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.

NOTICE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.

When printing on labels:

- Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205^ (401 °F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.

- Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver.

- Use "Standard Tray" for label.

- Do not print through "Single Sheet Feeder" for label.

- Do not load labels together with paper in the same tray.

- Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die-cut.

- Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.

- Do not print a label through the printer more than once.

- Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.

- Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.

- Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam.

- Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is recommended that zone coating of the adhesive is done at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your printer and could void your warranty.

CAUTION: Otherwise the printer occur in a jam and contaminate your printer and your cartridges with adhesive. As a result, could void your printer and cartridge warranties.

Storing Print Media

For proper print media storage, the following guidelines will help to avoid media feeding problems and uneven print quality.

- Store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21^ (70 °F) and the relative humidity is 40 %.

- Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.

• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

Identifying Print Media and Specifications

The following tables show print media information.

Supported Paper Sizes

Paper size Single sheet		Standard 250-sheet tray			Optional 250-sheet feeder			Duplexer
	feeder
	S i d e	1	S i d e	2	S i d e	1	S i d e	2
A4 (210 x 297 mm) Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
B5 (182 x 257 mm) Y Y Y Y Y Y N
A5 (148 x 210 mm) Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Letter (8.5 x 11 in) Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Folio (8.5 x 13 in) Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Legal (8.5 x 14 in) Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in) Y Y Y Y Y Y N
Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 in)	Y N Y N N N N
Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 in) Y	*2	N	Y	N	N	N	N	N
DL (110 x 220mm)	Y*2	N	Y	N	N	N	N	N
C5 (162 x 229mm)	Y N Y N N N N
Custom*1	Y	Y	Y	N	N	N	N	N
*1: Custom: width: 76.2 mm (3.0 inch) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inch)length: 127.0 mm (5.0 inch) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inch)*2: Monarch LEF and DL LEF are not available.

Supported Paper Types

Paper type Single sheet

feeder

Standard 250-sheet tray

Optional 250-sheet feeder

Duplexer

S i d e l S i d e 2 S i d e 1 S i d e 2 S i d e 1

P

l

a

i

n

L

i

g

h

t

Y

Y

Y

N

o

r

m

a

l

Y

Y

Y

Y

T

h

i

c

k

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

C

o

v

e

r

s

N

o

r

m

a

l

Y

T

h

i

c

k

Y

-

Y

-

N

-

N

C

o

a

t

e

d

N

o

r

m

a

l

Y

T

h

i

c

k

Y

-

N

-

N

-

N

Label

Normal

N

-

Y

-

N

-

N

-

T

h

i

c

k

N

-

Y

-

N

-

N

E

n

v

e

l

o

p

e

Y

-

Y

-

R

e

c

y

c

l

e

d

Y

Y

Y

Y

L

e

t

t

e

r

h

e

a

d

Y

-

P

r

e

p

r

i

n

t

e

d

Y

-

P

r

e

p

u

n

c

h

e

d

Y

-

C

o

l

o

r

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

NOTE: For Plain and Label paper, you can set the paper density by selecting the Paper Density (Light or Normal) under Printer Maintenance from the operator panel, Tool Box, or Dell Configuration Web Tool. Once you set the Paper Density settings, the printer uses the settings for Plain and Label paper.

Paper Type Specifications

Paper type	Weight (g/m2)	Remarks
Plain	60–90	-
Plain Thick	80/90–105	-
Recycled	60–105	-

Paper type Weight (g/m)	^2) Remarks
Labels - Inkjet printer paper cannot	be used.
Covers 106–163 -
Covers Thick 164–216 -
Envelope - -
Coated 106–163 Inkjet printer paper cannot	be used.
Coated Thick 164–216 Inkjet printer paper cannot	be used.
Letterhead - -
Preprinted 64 -
Prepunched 64 -
Color 64 -

Loading Print Media

Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.

Before loading any print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information is usually indicated on the print media package.

Capacity

The standard 250-sheet tray and optional 250-sheet feeder can hold:

• 250 sheets of the standard paper.

The SSF can hold:

• 1 sheet of the standard paper.

Print Media Dimensions

The maximum dimensions of print media that the standard 250-sheet tray, optional 250-sheet feeder, and SSF can handle are:

- Width — 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

- Length — 127 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)

Loading Print Media in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder

NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.

NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in the printer.

1 Pull the tray out of the printer about 200 mm. Hold the tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

3D illustration of a printer with a blue plastic tray and a green arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols)

2 Adjust the paper guides.

Diagram illustrating a mechanical assembly with three views of a device, showing tool positioning and green directional arrows indicating movement.

NOTE: Extend the rear side of the tray when you load Legal size paper.
3 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets and fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

Illustration showing two hands performing a foldable device manipulation technique (no text or symbols present)

4 Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.

NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.

5 Align the width guides against the edges of the paper.

3D diagram of a computer chassis with green arrows indicating directional movement or process (no text or symbols present)

NOTE: When loading user-specified print media, adjust the width guides and slide the extendable part of the tray by pinching the length guide and sliding it until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper.

6 After confirming that the guides are securely adjusted, insert the tray into the printer.

3D illustration of a printer with a green arrow indicating print output (no text or symbols present)

7 On the operator panel, press your button until the desired paper size is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

8 Press of button until the desired paper type is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder

Use the following guidelines when loading envelopes in the standard 250-sheet tray and optional 250-sheet feeder:

NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the standard 250-sheet tray and optional 250-sheet feeder right after they have been removed from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid jams, flatten them as shown below before loading the envelopes in the tray.

Line drawing of two hands holding a rectangular object with a dashed line indicating a measurement or alignment (no text or symbols)

Envelope #10

Load the envelopes short edge feed with the flaps closed and the print side up. Ensure that the flaps come at the right when you face towards the printer.

3D technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with internal components (no text or symbols)

Monarch or DL

The Monarch or DL envelopes can be loaded in one of the following ways: Load the envelopes short edge feed with the flaps closed and the print side up. Ensure that the flaps come at the right when you face towards the printer.

3D technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with internal components (no text or symbols)

OR

Load the envelopes long edge feed with the flaps open and the print side up. Ensure that the flaps come at the top when you face towards the printer.

3D technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with internal components (no text or symbols visible)

C5

Load the envelopes short edge feed with the flaps closed and the print side up. Ensure that the flaps come at the bottom when you face towards the printer.

3D technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with internal components (no text or symbols)

Loading Letterhead (Pre-Printed and Pre-Punched Paper)

When using the standard 250-sheet tray and optional 250-sheet feeder, the pre-printed paper such as letterhead and pre-punched paper enter the printer with the print side facing up for Dell 2155cn Multifunction Color Printer. As for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer, the pre-printed paper such as letterhead and pre-punched paper enter the printer with the print side facing down as shown below.

NOTE: For Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer, set Letterhead Duplex Mode to Enable and Paper Type to Letterhead, Preprinted, or Prepunched from the operator panel or the printer driver even when you print on a single side of letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper.

When using the single sheet feeder, the pre-printed paper such as letterhead enters the printer first with the print side facing down.

The following table shows the orientation when loading letterheads in the tray or feeders. For other pre-printed and pre-punched paper, load the paper by reference to the following table.

Print media source Print side Page orientation

Standard 250-sheet tray and optional 250-sheet feeder

Dell 2155cn Multifunction Color Printer Face up

Letterhead enters the printer last

LETTERME40

Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Face down

Letterhead enters the printer first

CASHBETTE 100%

NOTE: Set Letterhead Duplex Mode to Enable and Paper Type to Letterhead, Preprinted, or Prepunched from the operator panel or the printer driver even when you print on a single side of letterhead, pre-printed, or prepunched paper.

Print media source Print side Page orientation

Single sheet feeder (SSF)

Face down Letterhead enters

the printer first

Illustration showing a printer being inserted into a document, with a hand holding the paper and a green arrow indicating the process.

Loading Print Media in the SSF

1 Adjust the width guides to the print media's width.

Illustration of a printer with a magnified inset showing a green arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

2 Hold both sides of the print media facing down close to the single sheet feeder, and push it 8 cm to 9 cm (4 inches) into the printer until it automatically feeds.

Illustration of a printer being inserted into a paper, with a hand holding the paper (no text or symbols visible)

NOTE: Do not force the print media into the single sheet feeder.

NOTE: Load letterhead face-down, with the top of the sheet entering the printer first.

NOTE: If you experience problems with paper feed, turn the paper around.

Loading an Envelope in the SSF

Envelope #10, Monarch, or DL

To load an envelope into the single sheet feeder, insert the envelope short edge feed with the flap closed and the print side down. Ensure that the flap comes at the right when you face towards the printer.

Illustration of a printer emitting mail from a hand to a green envelope (no text or symbols present)

NOTICE: Never use envelopes with windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the printer.

NOTE: Ensure that you load an envelope with the flap completely closed.

NOTE: Insert an envelope with the flap side face up and with the stamp area on the top right side.

C5

To load an envelope into the single sheet feeder, insert the envelope short edge feed with the flap open and the print side down. Ensure that the flap comes at the bottom when you face towards the printer.

Illustration of a printer with a hand inserting a card into the base (no text or symbols visible)

OR

Illustration of a printer with a hand inserting a card into the base (no text or symbols visible)

NOTICE: Never use envelopes with windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the printer.

NOTE: Ensure that you load an envelope with the flap completely opened.

NOTE: Insert an envelope with the flap side face up and with the stamp area on the bottom right side.

Using the SSF

• Load only one size and type of print media during a single print job.
• To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality print media that is designed for use in laser printer. For more guidelines on print media, see "Print Media Guidelines."
• Do not add or remove print media when the printer is printing from the SSF. This may result in a paper jam.
• Print media should be loaded with the recommended print side down and the top of the print media going into the SSF first.
• Do not place objects on the SSF. Also, avoid pressing down or apply excessive force on it.
• The icons on the SSF show how to load the SSF with paper, and how to turn an envelope for printing.

Linking Trays

The printer automatically links the trays when you load the same size and type of print media in them. The first tray will be utilized until the media runs out after which the next tray will be used.

NOTE: The print media should be the same size and type in each tray.

The SSF cannot be linked to any of the tray sources.

After loading the selected trays with the same size and type of print media, select the Paper Type setting in the Tray Settings component for each source (tray).

To disable tray linking change the Paper type in one of the sources (trays) to a unique value.

NOTE: If different types of print media of the same size are loaded in each tray, the printer will automatically link them if the paper type is not specified in the printer driver properties/preferences.

Operator Panel

Using the Operator Panel Buttons

The operator panel has a 4-line by 28-character liquid crystal display (LCD), light-emitting diodes (LED), control buttons, and numeric keypad, which allow you to control the printer.

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 19 7 18 6 17 16 15 14 13 12 22 21 20 AC

1 One Touch Dial button

- Calls up the stored Fax number registered in the Phone Book. The first eight fax numbers in the Phone Book are assigned to the buttons in row order, starting from the left top corner.

2 (Copy) button

- Moves to the top level of the Copy menu.

3 (Fax) button

- Moves to the top level of the Fax menu.

4 Data LED

• Lights up for incoming, outgoing, or pending Fax jobs.

5 Ready / Error LED

• Lights up when the printer is ready. (Ready LED)
• Lights up when the printer has an error. (Error LED)

6 >> < button

- Moves a cursor or highlight right or left.

7 ▲▼ button

- Moves a cursor or highlight up or down.

8 √ (Set) button

- Confirms the entry of values.

9 (Contacts) button

- Moves to the Address Book menu for the Fax and Scan services.

10 (Redial / Pause) button

• Re-dials a telephone number.

- Inserts a pause into a telephone number.

11 X (Cancel) button

- Cancels the current processing or pending job.

12 B&W / Color LED

- Lights up to indicate which color mode is selected.

13 ● | 🎯 (Color Mode) button

- Switches the color mode.

14 (Start) button

- Starts a job.

15 (Speed Dial) button

- Calls up a stored telephone number.

16 ← (Backspace) button

- Deletes characters and numbers.

17 Numeric keypad

- Enters characters and numbers.

18 AC (All Clear) button

- Resets the current setting, and returns to the top menu.

19 (Back) button

- Returns to the previous screen.

20 LCD panel

- Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.

21 (Scan) button

- Moves to the top level of the Scan menu.

22 (Menu) button

- Moves to the top level of the Print from USB Memory, Job Status, and System menus.

NOTE: Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting. Make sure to press the √ (Set) button to save the current entry or setting.

NOTE: For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters."

Printing a Panel Settings Page

The panel settings page shows current settings for the operator panel menus.

When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press button until Panel Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

The panel settings page is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 ClickStart→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click Ok.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Reports tab is open.
3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.

The Reports page appears.

4 Click the Panel Settings button.

The panel settings page is printed.

Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing

17

Printing

This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain information from your printer, and how to cancel a job.

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Tips for Successful Printing

Tips on Storing Print Media

Store your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print Media."

Avoiding Paper Jams

NOTICE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.

By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you can avoid paper jams. See the following instructions on loading print media:

• "Loading Print Media in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder"
• "Loading Print Media in the SSF"
• "Avoiding Jams"

If you encounter a paper jam, see "Clearing Jams."

Sending a Job to Print

To support all of the printer features, use the printer driver. When you choose Print from a software program, a window representing the printer driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job that you are sending to print. Print settings selected from the driver override the default menu settings selected from the operator panel or Tool Box.

You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all of the available system settings you can change. If you are not familiar with a feature in the printer driver window, open the online Help for more information.

To print a job from a typical Microsoft ^® Windows ^® application:

1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the File menu, select Print.
3 Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the system settings as appropriate (such as the pages you want to print or the number of copies).
4 Click Preferences to adjust system settings that are not available from the first screen, and then click OK.
5 Click OK or Print to send the job to the selected printer.

Canceling a Print Job

There are several methods for canceling a job.

• Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel
• Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows

Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel

To cancel a job after it has started printing:

1 Press the X (Cancel) button.
2 From the Job List, press or button until Print is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will continue to print.

Canceling a Job From a Computer Running Windows

Canceling a Job From the Taskbar

When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the bottom right corner of the taskbar.

1 Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2 Select the job you want to cancel.
3 Press Delete on the keyboard.

Canceling a Job From the Desktop

1 Click Start→Printers and Faxes. For Windows XP®: Click start→ Printers and Faxes. For Windows Vista®: Click Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound→ Printers. For Windows Server® 2008: Click Start→ Control Panel→ Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: Click Start→ Devices and Printers.

A list of available printers appears.

2 Double-click the printer that you selected when you sent the job for print.

A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.

3 Select the job you want to cancel.

4 Press Delete on the keyboard.

Duplex Printing

Duplex printing (or two-sided printing) allows you to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. For sizes that are acceptable for duplex printing, see "Supported Paper Sizes."

Duplex Printing With Duplexer (Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer Only)

1 Click Start→Printers and Faxes.

For Windows XP: Click start→ Printers and Faxes.

For Windows Vista: Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.

For Windows Server 2008: Click Start→Control Panel→Printers.

For Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: ClickStart→ Devices and Printers.

2 Right-click the printer and select Printing Preferences.

The Paper/Output tab appears.

3 Select Paper Source from Tray 1, Tray 2, and Auto.

4 From Duplex, select Flip on Long Edge or Flip on Short Edge.

NOTE: For details on the Flip on Long Edge and Flip on Short Edge options, see "Flip on Long Edge" and "Flip on Short Edge."

5 Click OK.

Duplex Printing Without Duplexer (Dell 2155cn Multifunction Color Printer Only)

Manual duplex printing (or two-sided printing) allows you to manually print on both sides of the paper. For information on the paper sizes that support manual duplex printing, see "Supported Paper Sizes."

NOTE: You can use the manual duplex feature using PCL 6 printer driver.

NOTE: To use the manual duplex feature, select Paper Source other than Auto or SSF.

1 Click Start→Printers and Faxes.

For Windows XP: Click start→ Printers and Faxes.

For Windows Vista: Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.

For Windows Server 2008: Click Start → Control Panel → Printers.

For Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7: ClickStart→ Devices and Printers.

2 Right-click the printer and select Printing Preferences.

The Paper/Output tab appears.

3 From Paper Source, select Tray 1 or Tray 2.

4 From Duplex, select Flip on Long Edge or Flip on Short Edge.

NOTE: For details on the Flip on Long Edge and Flip on Short Edge options, see "Flip on Long Edge" and "Flip on Short Edge."

5 Click OK.

A window that shows the instructions for manual duplex printing appears.

The even-numbered pages are printed from the printer.

Clicking the OK button on your printer driver will first print the even-numbered pages of your document. If your document consists of six pages, its even-numbered pages are printed in the order of page 6, 4, and then 2.

After the even-numbered pages are printed, a message Insert Output to Tray 1 (Tray 2)(071-920 or 072-920) appears on the operator panel.

6 Remove the stack of output from the output tray. Load the stack back into the tray without turning it over (with the blank side face up).

Illustration of a printer with paper being inserted into a rack, showing internal components and a green arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

7 A message Press √ to continue printing (071-921 or 072-921) appears on the operator panel. Press the √ (Set) button.

The odd-numbered pages are printed in the order of page 1, 3, and then 5.

NOTE: You cannot duplex print mix-sized documents.

Using Booklet Print (Dell 2155cn and 2155cdn Models)

To use the booklet print feature, select Booklet Creation in the Booklet/Poster/Mixed Document dialog box displayed by clicking the Booklet/Poster/Mixed Document button. Flip on Long Edge binding position is selected by default. If you want to change the position, select Flip on Short Edge from the Duplex menu in the printer properties dialog box.

NOTE: For Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer, select Paper Source or Auto to use the booklet printing feature. For Dell 2155cn Multifunction Color Printer, select Paper Source. You cannot select Auto or SSF for booklet printing.

NOTE: When XPS driver is used, booklet print is not available.

Flip on Long Edge Assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation). The following illustration shows long-edge binding for portrait and landscape pages:

Portrait 2 3 Landscape 2 3

Flip on Short Edge

Assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation). The following illustration shows short-edge binding for portrait and landscape pages:

Portrait 2 3 Landscape 2 3

Using the Stored Print Function

When you send a job to the printer, you can specify in the driver that you want the printer to store the job in the memory. When you are ready to print the job, go to the printer and use the operator panel menus to identify which job in the memory you want to print. You can use this function for Secure Print, Private MailBox Print, Public MailBox Print, and Proof Print.

NOTE: Stored Print function is available when:

• The optional memory module is installed.
- The RAM disk is enabled in the operator panel menu.
• RAM Disk is set to Available in the printer driver.

NOTE: The data in memory is cleared when the printer is turned off.

The stored print function includes the following job types:

• Secure Print
• Private MailBox Print

• Public MailBox Print

- Proof Print

Secure Print

You can store print jobs temporarily in printer memory and print them later from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print confidential documents. A stored print job will be deleted after you print it or at a designated time.

NOTE: Secure Print is available when using the PCL driver.

Private MailBox Print

You can store print jobs temporarily in printer memory and print them at a more convenient time from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print confidential documents. The stored jobs remain in printer memory until you delete them on the operator panel or turn off the printer.

NOTE: Private MailBox Print is available when using the PCL driver.

Public MailBox Print

You can store print jobs temporarily in printer memory and print them at a more convenient time from the operator panel. A print job is stored until you delete it from printer memory on the operator panel or turn off the printer. You cannot use the password function with this feature. This function does not require a password to print a stored job.

NOTE: Public MailBox Print is available when using the PCL driver.

Proof Print

When you specify multiple copies for a collated job, this feature allows you to print only the first set for checking, before proceeding to print the remaining copies at the printer.

NOTE: If a print job is too large for the memory available, the printer may display error messages.

NOTE: If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the printer driver, the job's name will be identified using the printer's time and date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored under your name.

NOTE: Proof Print is available when using the PCL driver.

Storing Print Jobs

When you select a job type other than Normal Print in the Paper/Output tab of the printer driver, the job will be stored in temporary memory until you request to print it from the operator panel or turn off the printer.

NOTE: Secure Print and Private MailBox Print require specifying a password for confidentiality.

Printing the Stored Jobs

Once jobs are stored, you can use the operator panel to specify printing. Select the job type you are using from Secure Print, Private MailBox Print, Public MailBox Print, and Proof Print. Then, select your user name from a list. Secure Print and Private MailBox Print require the password you specified in the driver when you sent the job.

To print the stored documents, use the procedure below.

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button until Job Status is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Press button until Print Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press button until the desired job type is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

The stored document will be printed.

Specifying Your Password on the Operator Panel (Secure Print/Private MailBox Print)

When you select Secure Print or Private MailBox Print from the Print Menu after selecting your user name, the following prompt appears:

[***************]

Use the buttons on the operator panel to enter the numeric password you specified in the printer driver. The password you entered will be displayed as asterisks (***** ) to ensure confidentiality.

If you enter an invalid password, the message Wrong Password appears. Wait three seconds, or press the √ (Set) or ✗ (Cancel) button to return to the screen for user selection.

When you enter a valid password, you have access to all print jobs matching the user name and password you entered. The print jobs matching the password you entered appear on the screen. You can then choose to print or delete jobs matching the password you entered. (See "Printing the Stored Jobs" for more information.)

Deleting Stored Jobs

With Secure Print, a job that has been stored will be deleted after printing or deleted at a designated time if entered on the operator panel or at turning off the printer.

For other jobs, these jobs remain stored until you delete them on the operator panel or turn off the printer.

Printing from USB Memory

The Print from USB Memory feature allows you to print files stored in a USB memory by operating from the operator panel.

NOTICE: To prevent damage to your printer, DO NOT connect any device other than USB memory to the USB port of the printer.

NOTICE: DO NOT remove the USB memory from the USB port until the printer has finished printing.

The USB port of the printer is designed for USB 2.0 devices. You must use only an authorized USB memory with an A plug type connector. Use only a metal shielded USB memory.

A plug type

Supported File Formats

Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB memory.

• PDF
• TIFF
• J P E G

To print a file in a USB memory:

1 Insert a USB memory to the USB port of the printer.
2 Ensure that Print from USB Memory is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
3 Press button until the desired file is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button.

NOTE: Only the following characters are displayed on the operator panel: A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 \$ % ' - @ {} \~ ! # ( ) & _ ^

4 Select printing options as required.

NOTE: You can print files scanned and stored using the Scan to USB Memory feature. Files saved without using the feature such as files created by user may not be printed properly.

PDF Port Direct Printing

You can directly print PDF files in a computer by specifying LPR command (Windows):

lpr -S server_address -P lp -o | PDF_filename

The PDF file sent is printed in accordance with the printer settings set in the printer. You can however, change the PDF settings from the operator panel of the printer.

The following PDF settings can be changed:

• Quantity
  • 2 S i d e d
• Print Mode
• PDF Password
• Collated

• O u t p u t S i z e
- L a y o u t
- Output Color

NOTE: You should change the settings before the job starts.

NOTE: You can directly print PDF files scanned and stored using the Scan to USB Memory feature. Files saved without using the feature such as files created by user may not be printed properly.

Printing a Report Page

By using the Reports menu, you can print a variety of settings for your printer including system settings, panel setting, and font list. The following sections describe two examples of printing from the Reports menu.

- Printing System Settings Report

- Printing Font Sample List

Printing System Settings Report

To verify detailed printer settings, print a system settings report. A printed system settings report also allows you to verify whether or not options have been installed properly.

See "Understanding the Printer Menus" to identify the display and operator panel buttons if you need help.

When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button System Setup is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button.
3 Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
The system settings report is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open.
3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.

The Reports page appears.

4 Click the System Settings button.

The system settings report is printed

The message Send Printer Information. appears while the page prints. The printer returns to the standby mode after printing the system settings report.

If any other message appears when you print this page, see the online Help for more information.

Printing Font Sample List

To print samples of all the fonts currently available for your printer:

When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
4 Press button until PCL Fonts List is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

The PCL fonts list is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer → Tool Box

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open.
3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.

The Reports page appears.

4 Click the PCL Fonts List button.

The PCL fonts list is printed.

The message Send Printer Information. appears while the page prints. The printer returns to the standby mode after printing the font sample list.

Printer Settings

You can change most of the system settings from your software program. If your printer is attached to the network, you can change settings from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser. To find your printer's IP address, see "Printing System Settings Report."

Settings from the software program update the default system settings for the printer. Settings from the printer driver only apply to the job that you are currently sending to the printer.

If you cannot change a setting from your software program, use the operator panel, Tool Box or the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Changing a system setting from the operator panel, Tool Box or from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool makes that setting the user default.

Printing System Settings Report

You can verify the detailed system settings by printing a system settings report.

When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

The system settings report is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open.
3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.

The Reports page appears.

4 Click the System Settings button.

The system settings report is printed

Using the Operator Panel to Change the Printer Settings

You can select menu items and corresponding values from the operator panel.

When you first browse through the menus from the operator panel, you see some menu items are highlighted.

These highlighted items are the factory default and original system settings.

NOTE: Factory defaults may vary for different countries.

When you select a new setting from the operator panel, the item selected is highlighted to identify it as the current user default menu setting.

These settings are active until new ones are selected or the factory defaults are restored.

To select a new value as a setting:

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press or button until the desired menu is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

3 Press or button until the desired menu or menu item is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

• If the selection is a menu, the menu is opened and the first system setting in the menu appears.
• If the selection is a menu item, the default menu setting for the menu item appears. (The current user default menu setting is highlighted.)

Each menu item has a list of values for the menu item. A value can be:

• A phrase or word to describe a setting
• A numerical value that can be changed
- An On or Off setting

4 Press √ button until the desired value is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

NOTE: Some menu items require you to use the numeric key pad to enter the value.

5 Press the X (Cancel) or button to return to the previous menu.

To continue setting other items, select the desired menu. To quit setting new values, press the X (Cancel) button.

Driver settings may override changes previously made and may require you to change the operator panel defaults.

Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change the Printer Settings

If your printer is connected to the network, you can change the printer settings from your web browser. If you are a network administrator, you can clone the system settings of one printer to one or all the printers on the network.

Type the IP address of your printer in your web browser. Choose Printer Settings from the topics list, and then select the System Settings you want to change.

To change the paper type and size, choose Tray Settings from the topics list. To change the Color Track settings, choose Print Volume from the topics list, and then select the Dell Color Track tab.

To copy your system settings to another printer on the network, choose Copy Printer Settings from the topics list, and then type the other printer's IP address.

If you do not know your printer's IP address, see the system settings report or display the TCP/IP settings.

When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

The system settings report is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Report tab is open.
3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.

The TCP/IP Settings page appears.

Resetting Defaults

After resetting defaults and rebooting the printer, all the menu parameters, except the parameters for the network, are reset to their default values.

When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button System Setup is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button.
3 Press button Admtln Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
5 Press button until Reset Defaults is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
6 Press of button until the desired value is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
The Are you sure? message appears on the operator panel.
7 Press button to highlight Yes, and then press the √ (Set) button. The printer is turned off automatically to apply the settings.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer → Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select Reset Defaults from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reset Defaults page appears.
4 Select the desired option button.

The printer is turned off automatically to apply the settings.

Adjusting the Language

To display a different language on the operator panel:

Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press Button until Panel Language is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button until the desired language is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.

3 Select System Settings from the list at the left side of the page.

The System Settings page appears.

4 Select the desired language from Panel Language, and then press the Apply New Settings button.

Copying

Loading Paper for Copying

The instructions for loading documents are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying. For more details, see "Print Media Guidelines."

Selecting Paper Tray

After loading the print media for copy output, select the desired paper tray to be used for the copy job.

To select the tray:

1 Press the (Copy) button.
2 Ensure that Select Tray is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
3 Press or button until the desired tray is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

You can selectTray 1, Tray 2*, or SSF.

* Tray 2 is only available when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.

Preparing a Document

You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) to load an original document for copying, scanning, and sending a fax. You can load up to 35 sheets of 75 g/m^2 (20 lb) documents for one job using the ADF or one sheet at a time using the document glass.

CAUTION: Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5.5 in. by 5.5 in. (139.7 mm by 139.7 mm) or larger than 8.5 in. by 14 in. (215.9 mm by 355.6 mm), different sizes or weights together, or booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having other unusual characteristics in ADF.

CAUTION: Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or thin paper, wrinkled or creased paper, curled or rolled paper or torn paper cannot be used in ADF.

CAUTION: Do not use the documents with staples, paper clips or exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as glue, ink and correcting fluid in ADF.

NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the ADF.

Making Copies From the Document Glass

NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.

NOTE: Remove any documents from the ADF before copying from the document glass.

NOTE: Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy output. For best results, clean the document glass before use. For more information, see "Cleaning the Scanner."

To make a copy from the document glass:

1 Lift and open the document cover.

Illustration of a printer with an open lid and green arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

2 Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.

Illustration of a printer with an open lid and internal components, showing a close-up view of the printer's front panel (no text or symbols visible)

3 Close the document cover.

NOTE: Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the toner consumption.

NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the document cover open.

To customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, contrast, and image quality, see "Setting Copy Options."

To clear the option settings, press the AC (All Clear) button.

NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the next copy is performed or the auto clear timer is expired.

4 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

NOTE: You can cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document by pressing the (Cancel) button.

Making Copies From the ADF

NOTICE: Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35 sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.

NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.

1 Load up to 35 sheets of 75g / m^2 (20 lb) documents facing up on the ADF with top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the document guides to the document size.

Illustration of a printer with a green arrow indicating a loading or transfer process, showing no text or symbols on the device itself.

NOTE: Ensure that you use the document stopper before copying a legal-size document.

To customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, contrast, and image quality, see "Setting Copy Options."

To clear the option settings, press the AC (All Clear) button.

NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the next copy is performed or the auto clear timer is expired.

2 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

NOTE: You can cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document by pressing the (Cancel) button.

Setting Copy Options

Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after the next copy is performed or the auto clear timer is expired.

• Number of Copies
- Color

• Select Tray
• SSF Paper Size
• SSF Paper Type
• Collated
• Reduce/Enlarge
• Document Size
• Original Type
• Lighter/Darker
• Sharpness
• Color Saturation
• Auto Exposure
  • 2 S i d e d
• Multiple-Up
• Margin Top/Bottom
• Margin Left/Right
• Margin Middle

Number of Copies

To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the 📋 (Copy) button.

3 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad.

4 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Color

To select mode for color or black and white copying:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the Ⓐ | 🎨 (Color Mode) button to switch between Color and Black and White modes.

3 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Select Tray

To select a tray.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the (Copy) button.

3 Ensure that Select Tray is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Tray 1* The paper is fed from the tray 1.

Tray 2 The paper is fed from the tray 2.

SSF The paper is fed from the single sheet feeder.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

NOTE: Tray 2 is only available when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.

SSF Paper Size

To select the default paper size of the single sheet feeder:

NOTE: This setting is only available when the SSF is selected for the paper tray.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the 📋 (Copy) button.

3 Press button until SSF Paper Size is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

(Inch series)

Letter (8.5 x 11")*

Folio (8.5 x 13")

Legal (8.5 x 14")

A4 (210 x 297mm)

A5 (148 x 210mm)

B5 (182 x 257mm)

Executive (7.3 x 10.5")

Envelope #10 (4.1 x 9.5")

Monarch Env. (3.9 x 7.5")

DL Env. (110 x 220 mm)

C5 Env. (162 x 229mm)

(mm series)

A4 (210 x 297 mm)*

A5 (148 x 210 mm)

B5 (182 x 257 mm)

Letter (8.5 x 11")

Folio (8.5 x 13")

Legal (8.5 x 14")

Executive (7.3 x 10.5")

Envelope #10 (4.1 x 9.5")

Monarch Env. (3.9 x 7.5")

DL Env. (110 x 220 mm)

C5 Env. (162 x 229 mm)

* Denotes the factory default setting.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

SSF Paper Type

To select the default paper type of the single sheet feeder:

NOTE: This setting is only available when the SSF is selected for the paper tray.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the (Copy) button.

3 Press button S AntiPaper Type is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

Plain*

Plain Thick

Covers

Covers Thick

Coated

Coated Thick

Envelope

Recycled

Letterhead

Preprinted

Prepunched

Color

Plain S2

Plain Thick S2

Recycled S2

Color S2

* Denotes the factory default setting.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Collated

To sort the copy output: For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete three page document will be printed followed by the second complete document:

NOTE: You can collate more pages when optional memory module is installed.

1 2 3 1 2 3

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the (Copy) button.

3 Press button Coordinated is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

Off Does not copy in collated order.

On Copies in collated order.

Auto* Only the documents loaded from ADF are copied in collated order.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

To customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, contrast, and image quality, see "Setting Copy Options."

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

a When you are using the document glass and it is set to On, the display prompts you for another page.

If you want to place a new document, press √ button to select Yes, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Another display prompts you for placing next page.

Replace the document with a new document.

Ensure that Continue is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Reduce/Enlarge

To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25 percent to 400 percent when you copy original documents from the document glass or ADF:

NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the 📋 (Copy) button.

3 Press button until Reduce/Enlarge is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

(Inch series)

Custom 100%

50%

Ldgr→Ltr (64%)

Lgl→Ltr (78%)

100%*

Stmt→Ltr (129%)

Stmt→Lgl (154%)

200%

(mm series)

Custom 100%

50%

A4→A5 (70%)

B5→A5 (81%)

100%*

A5→B5 (122%)

A5→A4 (141%)

200%

* Denotes the factory default setting.

NOTE: You can also specify the value in increments of 1% from 25 to 400 by pressing < or > button or entering a value using the numeric keypad.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Document Size

To select the default document size:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the 📋 (Copy) button.

3 Press √ button Dantiment Size is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

(Inch series)

Auto*

Letter (8.5 x 11")

Folio (8.5 x 13")

Legal (8.5 x 14")

A4 (210 x 297mm)

A5 (148 x 210mm)

B5 (182 x 257mm)

Executive (7.3 x 10.5")

(mm series)

Auto*

A4 (210 x 297mm)

A5 (148 x 210mm)

B5 (182 x 257mm)

Letter (8.5 x 11")

Folio (8.5 x 13")

Legal (8.5 x 14")

Executive (7.3 x 10.5")

* Denotes the factory default setting.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Original Type

To select the copy image quality:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the (Copy) button.

3 Press button until Original Type is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Text Used for documents with text.

Text & Photo* Used for documents with both text and photos.

Photo Used for documents with photos.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Lighter/Darker

To adjust the contrast to make the copy lighter or darker than the original:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the (Copy) button.

3 Press button Limiter/Darker is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button.

4 Press or button to move for adjusting the darkness level, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Lighter3 Works well with dark print.

Lighter2

Lighter1

Normal* Works well with normal typed or printed documents.

Darker1 Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Darker3

* Denotes the factory default setting.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Sharpness

To adjust the sharpness to make the copy image sharper or softer than the original:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the (Copy) button.

3 Press button until Sharpness is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press or button until the desired settings is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Sharper Makes the copy image sharper than the original.

Normal* The color clarity of the image is the same as the original.

Softer Makes the copy image softer than the original.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Color Saturation

To adjust the amount of colors of the copy to make the colors darker or lighter than the original:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the (Copy) button.

3 Press button Contir Saturation is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press or button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

High Makes the color of the copy more vivid.

Normal* The color saturation is the same as the original.

Low Makes the color of the copy less vivid.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Auto Exposure

To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the 📋 (Copy) button.

3 Press √ button Auntil Exposure is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press for button until On is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

2 Sided

To make duplex copies with the specified binding position:

NOTE: This feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the (Copy) button.

3 Press button 2 is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

1 -> 1Sided*	Select 1 sided or 2 sided and specify binding position for the 2 sided copy.
Long Edge Biding
Short Edge Binding

* Denotes the factory default setting.
5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Multiple-Up

To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper:

Auto: Automatically reduces the pages to fit in one page.

ID Copy: Always prints two sides of the ID card in one page in the original size (by 100%).

Manual: Reduces the pages in the custom size depending on the setting of the Reduce/Enlarge menu.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the (Copy) button.

3 Press √ button Multiple-Up is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Off* Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto	Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
ID Copy	Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.
Manual	Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

To customize the copy settings including the number of copies, contrast, and image quality, see "Setting Copy Options."

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

a When you are using the document glass and it is set to Auto, ID Copy, or Manual, the display prompts you for another page.

If you want to place a new document, press button to select Yes, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Another display prompts you for placing next page.

Replace the document with a new document.

Ensure that Continue is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Margin Top/Bottom

To specify the top and bottom margins of the copy:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the 📧 (Copy) button.

3 Press √ button Maintin Top/Bottom is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press for button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

0.2 inch* (4 mm*) Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

0.0–2.0 inch (0–50 mm)

* Denotes the factory default setting.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Margin Left/Right

To specify the left and right margins of the copy:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the 📋 (Copy) button.

3 Press √ unMargin Left/Right is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press for button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

0.2 inch* (4 mm) Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

0.0–2.0 inch (0–50 mm)

* Denotes the factory default setting.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Margin Middle

To specify the middle margin of the copy:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Making Copies From the Document Glass" and "Making Copies From the ADF."

2 Press the 📧 (Copy) button.

3 Press button until Margin Middle is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the √(Set) button.

0.0 inch* (0 mm*) Specify the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

0.0–2.0 inch (0–50 mm)

* Denotes the factory default setting.

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin copying.

Changing the Default Settings

The default settings of the copy menu options including contrast and image quality can be set to the most frequently used modes. When you copy a document, the specified default settings are used unless they are changed by using the corresponding buttons on the operator panel.

To create your own default settings:

1 Press the ☐Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press √ button Defaults Settings is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
4 Ensure that Copy Defaults is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
5 Press button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
6 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 as needed.
To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

Setting the Power Saver Timer Option

You can set the power saver timer for the printer. The printer enters the power saver mode when the printer is not used for a certain period of time.

To set the power saver timer:

1 Press the ☐ Menu) button.
2 Press button System Setup is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button.
3 Press button Admtin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press button Syntlem Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
5 Ensure that Power Saver Timer is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
6 Press button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
7 Press for button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

You can specify from 1 to 30 minutes for Sleep or 5 to 60 minutes for Deep Sleep.

To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

Scanning

Scanning Overview

Use your Dell ^™ 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer to turn pictures and text into editable images on your computer.

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

The Dell 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer provides several ways to scan your document. There are two main scanning types. One is operated on the printer side without using the scanner driver, and the other is operated on the computer side using a software and the scanner driver. See the available features below to help you find the information you need.

- Scanning - With scanner driver

- Scanning - Without scanner driver

Scanning - With scanner driver

- Scan into a graphic software such as PaperPort ^ (bundled software for Windows) and Adobe ^ Photoshop ^ using a TWAIN driver (Supporting USB and Network connections for both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh using a graphic software) See "Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver."

- Scan into a Microsoft's default program such as Windows Photo Gallery and Microsoft Paint, using a Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver (Supporting USB and Network connections on Windows only) See "Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver."

- Scan and send the scanned document to computer connected via USB cable (Supporting USB connection for both Microsoft® Windows® and Apple Macintosh using bundled software tool of ScanButton Manager)

Using the feature of "Scan to Application" on the operator panel of your printer, the scanned image is saved in the location of your computer specified with the ScanButton Manager.

See "Scanning From the Operator Panel."

Scanning - Without scanner driver

- Scan and save the scanned document in a USB memory

See "Scanning to a USB Memory."

- Scan and send the scanned document by e-mail

See "Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image."

- Scan and send the scanned document to computer or server connected to network

See "Scanning to Network."

The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how you plan to use the image or document after you scan it to your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.

Type Resolution
Documents 300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or color
Documents of poor quality or that contain small text	400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscale
Photographs and pictures 100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale
Images for an inkjet printer 150–300 dpi
Images for a high-resolution printer 300–600 dpi

Scanning above these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application. If you require a resolution above those recommended in the above table, you should reduce the size of the image by previewing (or pre-scan) and cropping before scanning the image.

PaperPort

PaperPort that comes bundled with this printer can be used to manage all your documents. You can organize, search, and share all of your scanned documents.

NOTE: PaperPort, is supported only on Windows.

NOTE: You can use PaperPort's built-in Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software to copy text from scanned documents so that you can use and edit the text in any text editing, word processing, or spreadsheet program. The OCR process requires textual images scanned at 150–600 dpi and 300 dpi or 600 dpi is recommended for graphics.

If you prefer to use another application, such as Adobe PhotoShop, you must assign the application to the printer by selecting it from the list of available applications through the Select Software button each time you start scanning. If you do not assign an application to the Select Software button, PaperPort is automatically selected when you start scanning. See "Printer Settings Utility."

Dell ScanCenter

Dell ScanCenter is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send them directly to PaperPort or other programs on your computer without first running PaperPort. Dell ScanCenter runs as a separate application from the Windows start menu and displays the Dell ScanCenter bar. For more information about using Dell ScanCenter, refer to the PaperPort's Help menu.

ScanDirect - Scan page to PaperPort Desktop

Icons on the Dell ScanCenter bar represent the programs that are limited to PaperPort and to Dell ScanCenter. To scan and send an item to a program, click the program icon and then scan the item. Dell ScanCenter automatically starts the selected program when the scan is complete.

Scanning From the Operator Panel

NOTE: You must connect your computer via USB for selecting the Scan to Application feature from the operator panel. Network connection is not supported.

NOTE: This feature is supported on both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Press the (Scan) button.

3 Press √ button Start to Application is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Specify the scan options such as file format, color mode, resolution, and document size. For details, see "Scan to Application."

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button.

NOTE: If the following dialog box appears on your computer, select 2155 Color MFP ScanButton Manager, and then click OK.

For Microsoft Windows:

Dell 2155 Color MFP Scanner Scanner Button Event Select the program to launch for this action: Dell 2155 Color MFP Scan Button Manager Dell 2155 Color MFP Scan Button Manager Always use this program for this action OK Cancel

NOTE: Once you select 2155 Color MFP ScanButton Manager with the Always use this program for this action check box selected, 2155 Color MFP ScanButton Manager will automatically open without selecting an application.

NOTE: You must use ScanButton Manager on your computer to change the settings for scanning. For details, see "ScanButton Manager."

NOTE: For Macintosh, the dialog box for selecting a program is not displayed.

ScanButton Manager

The Scan to Application stores the image files in the My Documents folder by default, and then you can open them using the related application. Use ScanButton Manager to change the output destination of the obtained image files and to select whether to open the image files using the related application.

For Microsoft Windows:

ScanButton Manager Configure the image file scanned by the scanner. Destination Path: C:\Documents and Settings \admin\ My Documents Browse... Open the image file OK Cancel Help

For Apple Macintosh:

ScanButton Manager Destination Path: /Users/MacUser/Desktop Browse... ✓ Open the image file ? Defaults Cancel OK

Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver

Your printer supports the TWAIN driver for scanning images that supports Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Vista®, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Apple Mac OS X 10.3.9, Mac OS X 10.4.11, Mac OS X 10.5, Mac OS X 10.6 works with various scanners.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Start the drawing software that supports TWAIN, such as PaperPort for Windows. For using other than PaperPort, proceed to step 6.

3 To set the location where to store the scanned images:

Click Desktop→Folders.

In the Folders panel, specify a destination folder.

4 To set the scanner:

Click Desktop→Scan Settings→Select...

In the Available Scanners dialog box, select TWAIN: Dell 2155 Color MFP, and then click OK.

5 Make sure that Display scanner dialog box check box is selected on the Scan or Get Photo panel.

6 Click Scan to begin scanning process.

The Dell 2155 Color MFP TWAIN Driver window appears.

For Microsoft Windows:

Dell 2155 Color MFP TWAIN Driver (LAND) Basic Scanning Image Quality Image Options Scan from: Document Feeder Image type: 24-bit Full Color Scan size: Letter (8.5 x 11") Resolution: 300 dpi Reduce / Enlarge: 100 % Auto Exposure: Off Favorites: Scanner Defaults Delete Save... Defaults Default All Units: Pixels Width 2550 px Height 3300 px Size: 24.0 MB Preview Scan Close About... Help

For Apple Macintosh:

Dell 2155 Color MFP (LAN) Basic Scanning Image Quality Image Options Scan from: Document Glass Image Type: 24-bit Full Color Scan Size: Letter (8.5 x 11") Resolution: 300 dpi Reduce / Enlarge: 100 % Auto Exposure: Off Favorites Default All Pixels W: 2550 H: 3300 Size: 24.1MB Settings... About... Preview Scan Close

NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.

7 In the Basic Scanning tab, set the desired preferences, and click Preview to display the preview image.
8 Adjust the settings in the Image Quality and Image Option tabs.

9 Click Scan to start scanning.

10 When the scanning is completed, click Close to exit the window.

11 Click Done to close the PaperPort - Scan window.

The scanned image is automatically saved in the specified location.

If you want to scan more pages, follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.

Scan Setting Tool

You can check the IP address of the printer or set the password using the Scan Setting Tool.

To open the Scan Settings Tool:

For Microsoft Windows:

Click Start→Program→Dell Printers→Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→Scan Settings Tool.

Scan Settings Tool IP Address Settings Password Setting To select a scanner, enter its IP Address or search one from the network. IP Address: Search all scanners from the network Name Location IP Address Search again Search Criteria... About... OK Cancel Help

For Apple Macintosh:

Click Settings on the main scanning window of the Dell 2155 Color MFP window.

Dell 2155 Color MFP (LAN) IP Address Settings Password Settings To select a scanner, enter its IP Address or search one from the network. IP Address: SPR200 SPR200 Scanner List: Name Model Name IP Address Dell 2155cdn Color MFP (60:... Del 2155cdn Color MFP Limit Select Date Line Dell 2155cdn Color MFP (60:... Del 2155cdn Color MFP Start user limit Start Applicable Search again Cancel OK Settings... About... Preview Scan Close

IP Address Settings

In the IP Address Settings tab, you can check the IP address that is set for your scanner or change the scanner selection.

- IP Address

Enter the IP address.

- Search all scanners from the network (Windows only)

Searches scanners in your network.

- Scanner List

Displays a list of scanners that are detected.

- Search again

Searches the scanners in your network.

- Search Criteria (Windows only)

Displays the Search Criteria dialog box for setting the search condition.

Search Criteria Dialog Box (Windows only)

Search Criteria Subnet Address: Search Time: 4 Seconds Community Name public OK Cancel Help

- Subnet Address

Enter the subnet address.

• IPv4: Broadcast Address such as "192.168.1.255"
• IPv6: Multicast Address such as "ff02::1"

- Search Time

Specify a time period for searching a scanner.

- Community Name

Enter the SNMPv1/v2 community name. The default community name is "public."

Password Setting

In the Password Setting tab, you can input the password that is set for your scanner to access from your computer to the printer.

For Microsoft Windows:

Scan Settings Tool IP Address Settings Password Setting If a password has been set for the scanner, you need to enter the password before scan jobs can be run. Password for Scanner: About... OK Cancel Help

For Apple Macintosh:

Dell 2155 Color MFP (LAN) IP Address Settings Password Settings If a password has been set for the scanner, you need to enter the password before scan jobs can be run. Password for Scanner: Cancel OK Settings... About... Preview Scan Close

- Password for Scanner

Enter the password.

Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver

Your printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and later operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional software.

NOTE: The Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver is supported only on Windows.

To scan an image from the drawing software:

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Start the drawing software, such as Microsoft Paint for Windows.

NOTE: When you use Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, use Windows Photo Gallery instead of Microsoft Paint.

3 Click File→ From Scanner or Camera (Paint button→ From scanner or camera for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).

The Scan using Dell 2155 Color MFP Scanner window appears.

Scan using (LAN) Dell 2155 Color MFP Scanner What do you want to scan? Paper source Flatbed Select an option below for the type of picture you want to scan. Color picture Greyscale picture Black and white picture or text Custom Settings You can also: Adjust the quality of the scanned picture Page size: Legal 8.5 x 14 inches (216 x 356 Preview Scan Cancel

NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.

4 Select your desired type of picture that you want to scan, and click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture to display the Advanced Properties dialog box.

5 Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then click OK.

6 Click Scan to start scanning.

7 Click File→Save to save your scanned document in your desired location on your computer.

To scan an image from Control Panel:

NOTE: This feature is supported on Microsoft Window Server 2003 and Windows XP only.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Click Start → Control Panel → Printers and Other Hardware → Scanners and Cameras.
3 Double-click the scanner icon. The Scanner and Camera Wizard launches.
4 Click Next to display the Choose Scanning Preferences page.

Scanner and Camera Wizard Choose Scanning Preferences Choose your scanning preferences, and then click. Preview to see how your preferences affect the picture. Picture type: Color picture Grayscale picture Black and white picture or text Custom Custom settings Paper source: Flatbed Page size: Legal 0.5 x 14 inches (216 x 356 mm) Preview < Back Next > Cancel

NOTE: The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.

5 Select your desired type of picture, paper source, and paper size, and click Next.
6 Enter a picture name, select a file format, and specify the desired location to save the scanned document.
7 Click Next to start scanning.
8 Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.

Scanning to Network

NOTE: This feature does not require a network scan driver.

Overview

The Scan to Network feature allows you to send the scanned documents to a computer or FTP server.

graph TD
    A["Scan"] --> B["Using FTP"]
    B --> C["FTP Server"]
    C --> D["Computer"]
    C --> E["Computer"]
    B --> F["Using SMB"]
    F --> G["Computer"]

Required operating systems:

For FTP:

NOTE: For information on how to configure the FTP service, refer to the manual provided with the software.

NOTE: Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Mac OS X 10.3.9/10.4.11/10.5 support IPv4 only.

• Microsoft Windows XP Professional
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 5.1

• Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1

FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0

• Microsoft Windows Vista

Microsoft Windows Server 2008

FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7.0

• Microsoft Windows 7 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 7.5

• Mac OS X 10.3.9/10.4.11/10.5/10.6 FTP service of Mac OS X

For SMB:

NOTE: Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Mac OS X 10.3.9/10.4.11/10.5/10.6 support IPv4 only.

• Microsoft Windows XP
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
• Microsoft Windows Vista
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2008
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
• Microsoft Windows 7

• M a c O S X 10.3.9/10.4.11/10.5/10.6

Procedures

For FTP:

1 "Setting a Destination Using an Address Book"
2 "Sending the Scanned File on the Network"

For SMB:

1 "Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)"
2 "Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)"
3 "Setting a Destination Using an Address Book"
4 "Sending the Scanned File on the Network"

Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)

The Scan to Network feature requires a user login account with a valid and non-empty password for authentication. Confirm a login user name and password.

For Microsoft Windows:

Log On to Windows Copyright © 1985-2001 Microsoft Corporation Microsoft® Windows XP Professional User name: Password: OK Cancel Options >>

If you do not use a password for your user login, you need to create a password on your User Login Account with the following procedure.

For Windows XP:

1 Click start→ Control Panel→ User Accounts.
2 Click Change an account.
3 Click Create a password and add in a password for your user login account.

For Windows Vista and Windows 7:

1 Click Start→ Control Panel.
2 Click User Accounts and Family Safety.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.

For Windows Server 2008:

1 Click Start→ Control Panel.
2 Double-click User Accounts.
3 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.

For Windows Server 2008 R2:

1 Click Start→ Control Panel.

2 Select User Accounts.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.

For Mac OS X 10.3.9:

1 Click System Preferences→Accounts.
2 Enter a password for your user login account in Password.
3 Re-enter the password in Verify.

For Mac OS X 10.4.11/10.5/10.6:

1 Click System Preferences→Accounts.
2 Select Change Password.
3 Enter a password for your user login account in New password.
4 Re-enter the password in Verify.

Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)

Create a shared folder to store the scanned document from your printer.

For Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).
2 Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties.

The Properties dialog box appears.

3 Click on the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder on the network.
4 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.

NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.

MyShare Properties General Sharing Customize Local sharing and security To share this folder with other users of this computer only, drag it to the Shared Documents folder. To make this folder and its subholders private so that only you have access, select the following check box. Make this folder private Network sharing and security To share this folder with both network users and other users of this computer, select the first check box below and type a share name. Share this folder on the network Share name: MyShare Allow network users to change my files Learn more about sharing and security. Windows Firewall is configured to allow this folder to be shared with other computers on the network. View your Windows Firewall settings OK Cancel Apply

5 Select the Allow network users to change my files check box, and click OK.

NOTE: When the following screen appears, click If you understand the security risks but want to share files without running the wizard, click here, then select Just enable file sharing, and then click OK.

MyShare Properties General Sharing Customize Local sharing and security To share this folder with other users of this computer only, drag it to the Shared Document folder. To make this folder and its subfolders private so that only you have access, select the following check box. Make this folder private Network sharing and security As a security measure, Windows has disabled remote access to this computer. However, you can enable remote access and safety share files by running the Network Setup Wizard. If you understand the security links but want to share files without running the wizard, click here. Learn more about sharing and security. OK Cancel Apply Enable File Sharing If you enable sharing on this computer without using the Network Setup Wizard, the computer could be vulnerable to attacks from the Internet. We strongly recommend that you run the Network Setup Wizard to protect your computers. ● Yes the server enables file sharing (Recommended) ● Just enable file sharing OK Cancel

NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.

For example:

Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level

folder name: John

You should now seeMyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.

For Microsoft Windows XP Professional:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare) and double-click the folder.
2 Select Folder Options from Tools.

MyShare File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back Map Network Drive... Disconnect Network Links... Synchronize... Folder Options... File and Folder Tasks Make a new folder Publish this folder to the Web Share this folder

3 Click View tab, and then deselect the check box of Use simple file sharing (Recommended).

Folder Options General View File Types Offline Files Folder views You can apply the view (such as Details or Tiles) that you are using for this folder to all folders. Apply to All Folders Reset All Folders Advanced settings: Do not show hidden files and folders Show hidden files and folders Hide extensions for known file types Hide protected operating system files (Recommended) Launch folder windows in a separate process Remember each folder's view settings Restore previous folder windows at logo Show Control Panel in My Computer Show encrypted or compressed NTFS files in color Show pop-up description for folder and desktop items Use remote To Home Recommended Restore Defaults OK Cancel Apply

4 Click OK.
5 Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.

The Properties dialog box appears.

6 Select the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder.

7 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.

NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.

New Folder Properties General Sharing Security Customize You can share this folder with other users on your network. To enable sharing for this folder, click Share this folder. Do not share this folder Share the folder Share name: MyShare Comment: User limit: Maximum allowed Allow this number of users: To set permissions for users who access this folder over the network, click Permissions. To configure settings for offline access, click Caching. New Share Windows Firewall is configured to allow this folder to be shared with other computers on the network. View your Windows Firewall settings OK Cancel Apply

8 Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.

9 Click Add.

10 Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name, Myself).

Select Users or Groups Select this object type: Users, Groups, or Built in security principals Object Types... From this location: XXXX Locations... Enter the object names to select (examples): Myself Check Names Advanced... OK Cancel

11 Click OK.

NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.

12 Click on the user login name that you have just entered. Select Full Control check box. This will grant you permission to send the document into this folder.

Permissions for MyShare Share Permissions Group or user names: Everyone Myself (XXXX) Add... Remove Permissions for Karin Allow Deny Full Control Change Read OK Cancel Apply

13 Click OK.

NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.

For example:

Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John

You should now seeMyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.

For Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, or Windows 7:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).

2 Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties.

The Properties dialog box appears.

New Folder Properties General Sharing Security Previous Versions Customize Network File and Folder Sharing New Folder Not Shared Network Path Not Shared Share... Advanced Sharing Set custom permissions, create multiple shares, and set other advanced sharing options. Advanced Sharing... Password Protection People must have a user account and password for this computer to access shared folders. To change this setting, use the Network and Sharing Center. OK Cancel Apply

3 Click on the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing.
4 Select the Share this folder check box.
5 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.

NOTE: Write down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.

Advanced Sharing ✓ Share this folder Settings Share name: MyShare Add Remove Limit the number of simultaneous users to: 10 Comments: Permissions Ceaching OK Cancel Apply

6 Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.
7 Click Add.

8 Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name, Myself).

Select Users or Groups Select this object type: Users, Groups, or Built-in security principals Object Types... From this location: XXXX Locations... Enter the object names to select [examples]: Myself Check Names Advanced... OK Cancel

9 Click OK.

10 Click on the user login name that you have just entered. Select Full Control check box. This will grant you permission to send the document into this folder.

NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.

Permissions for New Folder Share Permissions Group or user names: Everyone Myself (XXXX) Add... Remove Permissions for Kain Allow Deny Full Control ✓ ✓ ✓ Change ✓ ✓ Read ✓ ✓ Learn about access control and permissions OK Cancel Apply

11 Click OK.

NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.

For example:

Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level

folder name: John

You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.

For Mac OS X 10.3.9/10.4.11:

1 Select Go from the Finder menu, and then click Home.

2 Double-click Public.

3 Create a folder (Example of folder name, MyShare).

4 Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.

5 Select the Personal File Sharing check box and Windows Sharing check box.

For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).

2 Select the created folder, and then select Get Info from the File menu.

3 Select the Shared Folder check box.

4 Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.

5 Select the File Sharing check box, and then click Options.

6 Select the Share Files and folders using SMB and account name check boxes.

7 Click Done.

Setting a Destination Using an Address Book

You can register the connection details for SMB and FTP server in the address book using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.

Before beginning to setup a destination, make sure you have the IP addresses you need such as printer and computer.

Verifying the IP Address Setting of the Printer

To setup the server address book through the network, you will first need to locate the IP address of the printer. You can obtain this IP address from the system settings report by performing the following steps:

When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ Menu) button.
2 Press √ button System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
3 Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
4 Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
The system settings report is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start→All Programs→Dell Printers→Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Ensure that the Printer Settings Reports tab is open.

3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page. The TCP/IP Settings page appears.

Locating the IP Address Setting of Your Computer

You can locate the IP address of your computer by the following operations.

1 Click Start Run. For Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2: Click Start Run.

For Windows Vista/Windows 7: Click Start → All Programs → Accessories → Run.

2 Type cmd in the text field and click OK. A command prompt window will open.

3 Type ipconfig and press Enter.

4 Write down the IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.

Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

1 Open a web browser.
2 Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar, and press the Enter key.

The web page of the printer appears.

NOTE: For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Address Setting of the Printer."

3 Click Address Book. If a security login dialog box appears, type in the correct User Name and Password.

NOTE: The default user name is "admin", and the default password is left blank (NULL).

https://index.htm - Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back Search Favorites Address http://www.dell.com/ DELL Printer Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP IPy4: 108.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00 Printer Jobs IPv6(Link Local): https://www.dell.com/ Location: Contact Person: Print Server Settings Printer Status Copy Printer Settings Printer Status | Printer Events | Printer Inform Print Volume Printer Information - Refr Address Book Dell Service Tag Number

4 Click the Server Address tab, and then click a Create button.

Dell Printer Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP Fv4 (Link Local) Fv6(Link Local) Location: Contact Person Printer Jobs Print Server Settings E-Mail Address | E-Mail Group | Default Setup Print Server Settings Copy Printer Settings Print Volume E-Mail Address Address List to: 001-020 021-040 041-060 061-080 091-100 Address Book ID Name Address Printer Information 001 (Not in Use) Tray Settings 002 (Not in Use) E-Mail Alert Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at: www.dell.com/supplies Contact Dell Support at: support.dell.com 003 (Not in Use) 004 (Not in Use) Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at: www.dell.com/supplies Contact Dell Support at: support.dell.com 005 (Not in Use) 006 (Not in Use) Online Help Order Supplies at: www.dell.com/supplies Contact Dell Support at: support.dell.com 007 (Not in Use) 008 (Not in Use) Online Help Order Supplies at: www.dell.com/supplies Contact Dell Support at: support.dell.com 009 (Not in Use) 010 (Not in Use) Online Help E-Mail Address Address List to: 001-020 021-040 041-060 061-080 091-100

Server Address page appears.

Server Address ID 10 (New-Registration) Name a.g. ProtShare, Shared Folder Server Type # FTP C:\MB FTP\ftp\Server Address/Sensor Path\ SME( 3\Sense Address/SMean Kernel/Green Path ) Server Address a.g. imgPC, 400.000.000.000 Share Name a.g. SME(Share, Shareholder) Server Path a.g. FTP\gout, puttnraseq, SMB\finance, seasonPster, seasonPeter\Satec Server Port Number FTP/21.6003 - 88529, SMB/21.445, 5000 - 88529 Logis Nover a.g. FTP(anonymous, Fines: SMB/Feter, Demand/Feter) Logis Password: No access Password:

To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:

(1) Name	Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book.
(2) Server Type	Select FTP if you store document on a FTP server.Select SMB if you store documents in a shared folder on your computer.
(3) Server Address	Enter a FTP server name that you have shared out or a server name or IP address of your computer.·For FTP:Server name: myhost.example.com(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)IP address: 192.168.1.100·For SMB:Server name: myhostIP address: 192.168.1.100
(4) Share Name	Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.
(5) Server Path	Enter the subdirectory path where you want the scanned document to be stored. Ensure that the subdirectory path is already created in the shared folder or FTP server.
(6) Server Port Number	Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 21 for FTP or 139 for SMB.Available ports are:FTP: 21, 5000 - 65535SMB: 139, 445, 5000 - 65535
(7) Login Name	Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on your computer or to a FTP server.·For FTP: Contact the system administrator.·For SMB: Windows login name that you have specified in the procedure 1.
(8) Login Password	Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.·For FTP: Contact the system administrator·For SMB: Empty password is not valid in the Network (Computer) feature. Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account. (See "Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)" for details on how to add a password in your user login account.)
(9) Re-enter Password	Re-enter your password.

Using Address Book Editor

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Address Book Editor.
2 Click Tool→New (Device Address Book)→Server.

For Microsoft Windows:

Address Book Editor File Edit View Tools Help New (Device Address Book) Fax New (PC Fax Address Book) E-Mail E-mail E-Mail Subject Settings... Server... Device Address Book Fax E-Mail Server PC Fax Address Book Name Register / Group Infor Updated On Entry Data 0, Group Data 0

For Apple Macintosh:

Address Book Editor New Fax Entry... New Fax Group... New E-Mail Entry... New E-Mail Group... New Server... E-Mail Server PC Fax Address Book ID Name Register / Group Updated On Entry Data: 6, Group Data: 0

Server Address dialog box appears.

For Microsoft Windows:

Server Address - 001 : Address ID: Name: Server Type: Computer Specify an Address Number Computer Settings wizard. Server Name / IP Address: Share Name: Path: Login Name: Login Password: Confirm Login Password: Port Number: Use Default Port Number OK Cancel Help

For Apple Macintosh:

Server Address - 001 : Address ID : 1 Specify an Address Number Name : Server Type : Computer Server Server Name / IP Address : Share Name : Path : Login Name : Login Password : Confirm Login Password : Port Number : 139 Use Default Port Number Cancel OK

To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:

(1) Name	Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book.
(2) Server Type	Select Computer if you store documents in a shared folder on your computer.Select Server if you store documents on a FTP server.
(3) Server Name/IP Address	Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server name that you have shared out.The following are examples:For Computer:Server name: myhostIP address: 192.168.1.100For Server: myhost.example.com(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)IP address: 192.168.1.100
(4) Share Name	Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.
(5) Path	Enter the subdirectory path where you want the scanned document to be stored. Ensure that the subdirectory path is already created in the shared folder or FTP server.
(6) Login Name	Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on your computer or to a FTP server.For Computer: Windows login name that you have specified in the procedure 1.For Server: Contact the system administrator.
(7) Login Password	Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.For Computer: Empty password is not valid in the Network (Computer) feature. Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account. (See "Setting a Login Name and a Password (SMB Only)" for details on how to add a password in your user login account.)For Server: Contact the system administrator.
(8) Confirm Login Password	Re-enter your password.
(9) Port Number	Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 139 for Computer and 21 for FTP server.Available ports are:For Computer: 139, 445, 5000 - 65535For Server: 21, 5000 - 65535

Sending the Scanned File on the Network

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Press the (Scan) button.

3 Press √ button Start to Network is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Ensure that Scan to is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

5 Press button until the desired address book is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

Network (Computer): Stores the scanned image on the computer by using the SMB protocol.

Network (Server): Stores the scanned image on the server by using the FTP protocol.

Search Address Book: Searches a network address from the Address Book.

NOTE: The network addresses need to be registered before you can select Network (Computer) or Network (Server) on the operator panel.

6 Press button until the desired destination is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

7 Specify the scan options such as file format, color mode, resolution, and document size. For details, see "File Format."

8 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin sending the scanned files.

Scanning to a USB Memory

The Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to store scanned image directly to a USB memory attached to the printer without using software.

Types of a USB Memory

You can use a USB memory with the following interfaces:

The USB memory must be formatted in FAT file systems (FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT) before inserting the memory device into the USB port of the printer.

NOTE: If the USB memory is formatted in a file system other than above, the printer may not recognize that the USB memory is attached.

NOTE: A USB memory with authentication feature and some brands of USB memories cannot be used with this printer.

To store the scanned images to a USB memory:

1 Insert a USB memory into the USB port of the printer. See "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory" for more details.
2 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

3 Press the (Scan) button.
4 Ensure that Scan to USB Memory is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
5 Press the ▷ (Start) button to begin scanning the document.
6 Remove the USB memory from the printer. See "Inserting and Removing a USB Memory" for more details.

Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Image

To save the scanned image to a USB memory, specify a folder in the USB memory before executing the scan job.

1 Select a folder to save the scanned image from the printer operator panel.

NOTE: The default saving location is the root directory of the USB memory.

NOTE: You cannot directly enter a folder path using the numeric keypad.

NOTE: You can select any folder in the USB memory but cannot create a new folder in this step. You should always create a new folder before connecting the memory to the printer.

If the name of the scanned image has already existed in the folder, the printer automatically generate a new file name to save the data.

Inserting and Removing a USB Memory

You can insert the USB memory before scanning images.

Before removing the USB memory, ensure that the printer is not accessing the USB memory.

Illustration of a printer with a green arrow pointing to the printer's tip (no text or symbols present)

NOTICE: If you remove the USB memory while the printer is accessing, the data in the USB memory or the USB memory device itself may be destroyed.

Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned Image

To send an e-mail attached with the scanned image from your printer, follow the steps below:

• Set E-Mail Alert
• Register a user
• Start to send e-mail with the scanned file

Setting an E-Mail Alert

1 From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click E-Mail Alert.

The E-Mail Server Settings page appears.

https://10.8.10.8.10/index.htm - Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back Search Favorites Address http://www.dell.com/ DELL Printer Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP Printer Jobs Pvt: https://www.dell.com/ Print Settings PV6(Link Local): www.dell.com/4x749 Location: Contact Person: Print Server Settings Print Server Settings Security Copy Printer Settings Basic Information | Port Settings | TCP/IP | SMB | E-Mail Alert | Bonjour (eDNS) | SNMP | Scan to PC | LLTD | Reset Print Server Print Volume E-Mail Alert - Refresh Address Book E-Mail Server Settings Printer Information Primary SMTP Gateway SMTP Port Number SMTP Port Number 35 (25, 597, 5000 - 65535) Tray Settings E-Mail Send Authentication *Invalid E-Mail Alert SMTP Login User Set Password SMTP Login Password ***** Online Help Re-enter SMTP Login Password ***** Order Supplies at: POP3 Port Number 110 (110, 5000 - 65535) www.dell.com/supplies POP User Name Contact Dell Support at: POP User Password ***** support.dell.com Re-enter POP User Password ***** Reply Address SMTP Server Connection Send with every E-Mail Connection pending until printer sends as alert

2 Specify the settings for E-Mail Alert as follows:

Primary SMTP Gateway: Enter the IP address of the e-mail server.

E-Mail Send Authentication: Specify Invalid to enable the e-mail server.

NOTE: If an error message including 016-506 or 016-764 is displayed, contact your server administrator for the settings for E-Mail Send Authentication.

3 Click the Apply New Settings button.

Registering a New User

1 From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool click Address Book, and then click the E-Mail Address tab.
2 Click the Create button.

The E-Mail Address page for registering a new user appears.

https://doi.org/2155/index.htm - Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Promotion Book Help Search Favorites Dell Printer Status Dell 2155cdn Color MFP Pv4 link local links Pvb(Link Local) link link link link Location: Contact Person: Printer Jobs Printer Settings Print Server Settings E-Mail Address Server Address Phone Back Copy Printer Settings E-Mail Address | E-Mail Group | Default Setup Print Volume Address Book E-Mail Address B: (0): New Registration) Name: Address: Appy New Settings Posters Settings Back E-Mail Alert Set Password Online Help Order Supplies at: www.dell.com/supplies Contact Dell Support at: support.dell.com

3 Enter the following:

- N a m e

- Address

4 Click the Apply New Settings button.

Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File

1 Press the (Scan) button.

2 Press button Start to E-Mail is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button.

3 Ensure that Email to is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press button until the desired menu is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button.

Keypad: Enter an e-mail address directly.

Address Book: Select an e-mail address registered in the address book.

Email Group: Select a group of e-mails registered in the address book.

Search Local Address Book: Search an e-mail address from the local address book.

Search Server Address Book: Search an e-mail address from the LDAP server address book.

NOTE: For more information on address book and server address book, see "Address Books."
NOTE: If you are using the LDAP server address book, Server Address Book must be set to On. For details, see "LDAP Server" and "Server Address Book."
NOTE: The e-mail addresses need to be registered before you can select Address Book on the operator panel.

5 Press button to select TO or BCC.

6 Press the ▶ (Start) button to begin sending e-mail.

Faxing

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Easy Setup Navigator

You can specify the country, line type, tone/pulse, receive mode, DRPD pattern, fax header name, and fax number.

1 Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.
2 Click Advanced Tools on the Easy Setup Navigator window. The Advanced Tools window appears.

Adobe Flash Player 9 Easy Setup Navigator Dell 2155cn/Dell 2155cdn Welcome! Language: English Advance Setup Advance Tools More Information Optional Accessories Setup Users Guide Troubleshooting Guide Product Features Exit

3 Click Fax Configuration.
4 Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

Available settings are:

• Country
• Line Type

• Tone/Pulse

• Receive Mode

• DRPD Pattern

(This setting is available only when a distinctive ring service is installed on your telephone line by your telephone company.)

• FAX Header Name
• FAX Number

NOTE: To make initial settings from the printer operator panel, see "Setting Your Country."

Setting Your Country

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button
3 Press button Admtih Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
5 Press button Country is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
6 Select the country where the printer is used.

The printer must be rebooted after you set the country settings. When a message prompting you to reboot the printer, select Yes. After the reboot, the top menu is displayed on the operator panel.

NOTE: In case of either one, when you configure the country setting, the information, which is registered to the device, is initialized.

Setting the Printer ID

In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send. The printer ID, containing your telephone number and name or company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from your printer.

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

5 Press button until Fax Number is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

6 Enter your fax number using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the (Backspace) button to delete the last digit.

7 Press ▲ or button Fax unidder Name is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

8 Enter your name or company name using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

You can enter alphanumeric characters using the numeric keypad, including special symbols by pressing the 1, *, and # buttons.

For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters."

To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters

As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For example, when you set up your printer, you enter your name or your company's name and telephone number. When you store speed or group dial numbers, you may also need to enter the corresponding names.

Control panel interface with labeled buttons and numeric keypad, likely from a software application or system interface.

- When prompted to enter a letter, press the appropriate button until the correct letter appears on the display.

For example, to enter the letter O, press 6:

– Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O and finally 6.

- To enter additional letters, repeat the first step.

- Press the √ (Set) button when you are finished.

Keypad Letters and Numbers

Key Assigned numbers, letters or characters

1 1 @ . _ - (space) \ & () ! " # \$ % ' \~ ^ | ; : ? , + * / = [ ] { } < >

2a b c A B C 2

3 d e f D E F 3

4g h i G H I 4

5 j k l J K L 5

6m n o M N O 6

7 p q r s P Q R S 7

8 t u v T U V 8

9 w x y z W X Y Z 9

0 0

* @

# (space) \ & ()

Changing Numbers or Names

If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, press the (Backspace) button to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the correct number or character.

Inserting a Pause

For some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen for a second dial tone. A pause must be entered in order for the access code to function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then press the 📋

(Redial/Pause) button before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on the display to indicate when a pause is entered.

Setting the Time and Date

NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the printer occurs.

To set the time and date:

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button until System Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

5 Press button until Date & Time is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

6 Ensure that Set Date & Time is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

7 Press or button until the desired time zone is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

8 Press or button or enter the date using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

9 Press or button or enter the time using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

NOTE: The printer beeps and does not allow you to proceed to the next step if a wrong number is entered.

Changing the Clock Mode

You can set the current time using either the 12-hour or the 24-hour format.

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button
3 Press button Aointin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press button Syntlem Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
5 Press √ button Daniel & Time is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
6 Press button Time Format is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
7 Press for button until the desired format is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

Setting Sounds

Speaker Volume

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button
3 Press button Aointin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press √ button FuntilSettings is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

5 Press button until Line Monitor is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

6 Press for button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

7 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on again.

Ringer Volume

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

5 Press button until Ring Tone Volume is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

6 Press for button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

7 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on again.

Specifying the Fax Settings Options

Changing the Fax Settings Options

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

5 Press button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

6 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

If necessary, repeat steps 5 and 6.

To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

Available Fax Settings Options

You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system:

Option Description

Receive Mode

You can select the default fax receiving mode.

• Fax: (automatic receive mode)
• Telephone (manual receive mode): Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code, or by setting OnHook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine) and then pressing the ▷ (Start) button.
• Telephone/Fax: When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Rec Fax/Tel, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
• Ans Machine/Fax: The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.
• DRPD: Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.

Option	Description
Auto Rec Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 0 second.
Auto Rec Tel/Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 6 seconds.
Auto Rec Ans/Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 21 seconds.
Line Monitor	Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
Ring Tone Volume	Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
Line Type You can select the default line type.PSTNPBX
Tone/Pulse You can select the dialing type.TonePulse (10PPS)Pulse (20PPS)
Resend Delay You can specify the interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to 255 seconds. The default is 8 seconds.
Redial Attempts	You can specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy, within the range of 0 to 13. If you enter 0, the printer will not redial.
Redial Delay	Your printer can automatically redial a remote fax machine if it was busy. Intervals from 1–15 minutes can be entered.
Option Description
Junk Fax Setup	You can reject faxes sent from unwanted stations. The system only accepts faxes from the remote stations registered in the speed dial. This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes.Select Off to turn the feature off. Anybody can send you a fax.Select On to turn the feature on.
Remote Receive	You can receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.
Remote Rcv Tone You can specify the tone when Remote Receive is set to On.
Fax Header Prints the sender's information on the header of faxes.Select Off to turn this feature off.Select On to turn this feature on.Note that if United States is selected for the setting of Country, this option does not appear on the menu. The setting is fixed to On and cannot be changed.For information on the country setting, see "Setting Your Country."
Fax Header Name	Specifies the sender's name to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Number Specifies the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes. This feature is available when you set Fax Header to On. The number specified in Fax Number is used in the printer ID.
Fax Cover Page	You can set whether to attach a cover page to faxes when sending faxes.
DRPD Pattern Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)option, distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Duplex Print	You can set whether to make duplex print when you print faxes.Select Off to print faxes on one side of a sheet of paper.Select On to print faxes on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Sent Fax Fwd You can set your printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax number. When a fax arrives at your printer, it is stored in the memory. Then, the printer dials the fax number that you have specified and sends the fax.Select Off not to forward incoming faxes.Select Forward to forward incoming faxes without printing. If an error occurs during forwarding a received fax, the printer prints the fax.Select Print and Forward to forward and print incoming faxes.
Fax Fwd Number	You enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Prefix Dial You can specify whether or not to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Num You can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PBX).
Discard Size When receiving a document as long as or longer than the paper installed in your printer, you can set the printer to discard any excess at the bottom of the page. If the received page is outside the margin you set, it will print on two sheets of paper at the actual size. When the document is within the margin and Discard Size is set to Auto Reduction, the printer reduces the document to fit it onto the appropriate sized paper and discard does not occur. IfDiscard Size is set to other than Auto Reduction, the data within the margin will be discarded.
ECM You can set whether to enable or disable the ECM (Error Correction Mode).
Modem Speed You can set the modem speed.
Country You can select the country where the printer is used.You can change this setting when:No jobs in operationNo fax jobs waiting in the memory

Fax Activity You can set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.

Option Description
Fax Transmit	You can set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.
Fax Broadcast	You can set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple locations.
Fax Protocol	You can set whether to print the protocol monitor report after a fax transmission to monitor fax protocol problems.

NOTE: Prefix Dial supports only the environment where you send a fax to the external line number. To use Prefix Dial, you must do the following from the operator panel.

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Press button Admtin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press button FantiSettings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
5 Press √ button Limit Type is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
6 Press button until PBX is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
7 Press √ button Netflix Dial is highlighted, and then press √ (Set) button.
8 Press √ button ○ unishighlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
9 Press button Netflix Dial Num is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
10 Enter a maximum of five-digit prefix number from 0–9, *, and #, and then press the √ (Set) button.
11 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on again.

Advanced Fax Settings

NOTE: The advanced fax settings are only meant for advanced users. Incorrect settings on the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer may damage the device.

If you are experiencing fax send or receive errors, there is an advanced fax settings menu which you can access and change the settings accordingly.

To enter the Diagnostic Menu (Customer Mode), follow the instructions.

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Disconnect all network, phone line, and USB cables from the device.
3 Turn on the printer while holding down and buttons to start in Customer Mode.

After all the advanced fax settings have been made, you will need to turn off and on the printer for the new settings to be effective.

Fax Data Encoding Method

Some of the legacy fax devices do not support the Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) data encoding method. You may experience fax send or receive errors due to this data encoding method. You can disable the JBIG and select the Modified Huffman (MH), Modified Read (MR), or Modified Modified Read (MMR) encoding with the following instructions.

You can change the modem transmission encoding with the following instructions.

1 Turn on the printer while holding down and buttons to start in Customer Mode.
2 Press button to select Fax/Scanner Diag, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Press button until Parameter appears, and then press the √ (Set) button.
4 Ensure that FAX Parameter appears, and then press the √ (Set) button.
5 Press button until G3M TX Coding appears, and then press the √(Set) button.
6 Press button until the desired encoding appears, and then press the (Set) button.
You can selectMH, MR, or MMR.

You can change the modem receive encoding with the following instructions.

1 Turn on the printer while holding down and buttons to start in Customer Mode.

2 Press button to select Fax/Scanner Diag, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Press button Parameter appears, and then press the √ (Set) button.
4 Ensure that FAX Parameter appears, and then press the √ (Set) button.
5 Press button GmtiRX Coding appears, and then press the √(Set) button.
6 Press button until the desired encoding appears, and then press the (Set) button.
You can select MH, MR, or MMR.

Diagnosing the Fax Connection

You can diagnose the Fax connection using the FAX Line Diagnosis feature that can detect the abnormalities of telephone line connection.

1 Turn on the printer while holding down and buttons to start in Customer Mode.
2 Press button to select Fax/Scanner Diag, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Press button FAntilTest appears, and then press the √ (Set) button.
4 When the message Check FAX Connection appears, press the √(Set) button.
5 When the message Ready to Start appears, press the √ (Set) button to start diagnosing the FAX connection.
One of the following diagnosing result is displayed.

Diagnosing result Description

Connection not Detected The telephone line cord is not connected. Make Please Reconnect sure that the telephone line cord is securely Telephone Line connected.

Cable Connected WronglyReconnect TelephoneLine from Wall Jack toLine Connection	The telephone line cord is connected to the wrong connector. Make sure that the telephone line cord is connected at one end to the wall jack connector (LINE) of your printer and at the other end to an active wall jack. If you use a telephone or answering machine, connect to the phone connector ( ).
Fax Connection OKPlease Check Setting of Tone/Pulse in Admin Menu after Restart Printer	The telephone line cord is properly connected. Check the Tone/Pulse setting. For information on Tone/Pulse setting, see "Available Fax Settings Options."

Sending a Fax

You can fax data from your printer. You can also directly fax data transferred from the computer running a Microsoft ^® Windows ^® operating system.

Loading an Original Document

You can use the ADF or the document glass to load an original document for faxing. Using the ADF, you can load up to 35 sheets of 75 g/m^2 (20 lb) paper at a time. Using the document glass, you can load one sheet at a time.

NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the ADF.

To fax a document using the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF):

1 Place the document(s) facing up on the ADF with the top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the document guides to the correct document size.

Illustration of a printer with green directional arrows indicating file transfer or download (no text or symbols present)

2 Adjust the document resolution. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution.")

To fax a document from the document glass:

1 Open the document cover.

Illustration of a printer with an open lid and green arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

2 Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.

Illustration of a printer with an open lid and internal components, showing a close-up view of the printer's handle (no text or symbols present)

3 Adjust the document resolution. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution.")

4 Close the document cover.

NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the ADF, it takes priority over the document on the document glass.

NOTE: If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start faxing with the cover open.

Adjusting the Document Resolution

You can improve the quality of the fax document by adjusting the resolution, especially for the document in low-quality or containing the photographic image.

1 Press the (Fax) button.

2 Press button until Resolution is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Standard* Used for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine	Used for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine	Used for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution. See the note below.
Photo	Used for documents containing photographic images.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine resolution transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.

Adjusting the Document Contrast

You can adjust the contrast of the fax document to be lighter or darker than the original.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Press the (Fax) button.

3 Press button Limiter/Darker is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button.

4 Press or button to move for adjusting the darkness level, and then press the √(Set) button.

Lighter3 Works well with dark print.

Lighter2
Lighter1
Normal*	Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1	Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Darker3

* Denotes the factory default setting.

Sending a Fax Automatically

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Press the (Fax) button.
3 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")
4 To select a fax number, do one of the followings:

- Ensure that Fax to is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

Press Button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

- Press the One Touch Dial button, and go to step 6.

You need to register a speed dial number before you can use the One Touch Dial button. (For details, see "Setting Speed Dial.")

- Press the (Contacts) button, and select one of the followings:

• All Entries - Displays a list of registered fax numbers.
• Group Dial - Displays a list of registered group dial numbers.
- Search Local - Searches a fax number from the local Phone Book.
- Search Server - Searches a fax number from the LDAP server. This item is displayed when Server Phone Book is On.

- Press the 🎨 (Redial/Pause) button to redial, and go to step 6.

- Press the 📋 (Speed Dial) button. (For details, see "Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial.")

5 Press button until the desired recipient is highlighted, and then press button to select the recipients. Press the √ (Set) button to confirm.

6 Press the ▷ (Start) button.

When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display prompts you for another page. Press for button to select Yes to add more documents or to select No to begin sending the fax immediately, and then press the √ (Set) button.

The printer starts dialing the number, and then sending the fax when the remote fax machine is ready.

NOTE: You can cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax by pressing the X (Cancel) button.

NOTE: Pressing the ▶ (Start) button does not start sending a fax when the available time is set or the Fax service is locked. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function Enabled" for the Fax service.)

Sending a Fax Manually

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF. OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Press the (Fax) button.

3 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")

4 Press button 🚪 🔘 🔘 is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

5 Press or button until on is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

6 Enter the remote fax machine's fax number using the numeric keypad.

7 If the document is loaded on the ADF, press the ▶ (Start) button. If the document is not loaded on the ADF, press the ▶ (Start) button, press or ▽ button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

NOTE: You can cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax by pressing the (Cancel) button.

NOTE: Pressing the ▶ (Start) button does not start sending a fax when the available time is set or the Fax service is locked. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function Enabled" for the Fax service.)

Confirming Transmissions

When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and returns to the standby mode.

If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the display.

If you receive an error message, press the X (Cancel) button to clear the message and try to send the document again.

You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax transmission. For further details, see "Printing a Report."

Automatic Redialing

If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the printer will automatically redial the number every minute based on the number set in the redial settings.

To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see "Available Fax Settings Options."

NOTE: The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when the number was manually entered.

Sending a Delayed Fax

The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned documents for transmission at a specified time to take advantage of lower long distance rates.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Press the (Fax) button.

3 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")

4 Press button Dentryed Start is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

5 Press or button until On is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

6 Enter the start time using the numeric keypad or press for button, and then press the √ (Set) button.

7 Press for button until Fax to is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

8 Ensure that Keypad is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

9 Enter the number of the remote machine using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

You can also use speed or group dial numbers. (For details, see "Automatic Dialing.")

10 Press the ▷ (Start) button to scan data.

Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them at the specified time. After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.

NOTE: If you turn off and on the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as the printer is activated.

NOTE: If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax service, the printer cannot send the delayed fax at the specified time. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function Enabled" for the Fax service.)

Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)

You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the driver.

NOTE: Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.

NOTE: If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax service, the printer cannot send the delayed fax at the specified time. (For details, see "Set Available Time" for the Available time and "Function Enabled" for the Fax service.)

Example

graph LR
    A["Computer"] --> B["Send data via the Dell 2155cdn MFP Fax driver"]
    B --> C["Sending machine (Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer)"]
    C --> D["Receiving machine (fax machine/multifunction printer)"]
    D --> E["Send fax"]

Procedure

NOTE: The names of the dialog boxes and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on the application you are using.

NOTE: To use this feature, you must install the fax driver. (For details, see "Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD" for Windows or "Installing the Drivers and Software" for Macintosh.)

1 Open the file you want to send by fax.
2 Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell 2155cdn MFP Fax.
3 Click Preferences in Windows, or selectFAX Setting in Macintosh.

For Microsoft Windows:

Print General Select Printer Add Printer DELL 2156cdn MFP Fax DELL 2156cdn MFP PCL6 Status: Offline Location: Comment: Print to file Preferences Find Printer... Page Range All Selection Current Page Pages: Number of copies: 1 Cylate 1 2 3 1 2 3 Print Cancel Apply

For Apple Macintosh:

Printer: Dell 2155cdn Color MFP Presets: Standard Copies: 1 Collated Pages: All From: 1 to: 1 Paper Size: A4 20.99 by 29.70 cm Orientation: FAX Setting

4 When the setting dialog box appears, specify the following settings.

NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.

For Microsoft Windows:

Printing Preferences Paper/Output Graphics Layout Watermarks/Forms Advanced Job Type: Fax Favorites: Standard Says. Edit. Duplex: 1 Sized Print Output Color: Color (Auto) Copies: 1 Collected Paper Summary: A4 Paper Size: A4 (210 x 297 mm) FAX Setting Transmission image quality: High Quality Transmission report: Output for non-transmission Fax Cover Page Settings... Address Book... DOLL Printer Status Restore Defaults OK Cancel Help

For Apple Macintosh:

Transmission image quality High Quality Transmission report Output for non-transmission Fax Cover Page Settings Fax Cover Page None Sender According to Printer Settings Sender Name Address Book Restore Defaults

a. Transmission image quality

Purpose:

To set the output quality.

Values:

Standard For documents with normal sized characters.
High Quality*	For documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super-high image quality	For documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports Super Fine resolution. See the notes below.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

NOTE: Faxes printed in the Super-high image quality by Direct Fax driver transmits at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.

b. Transmission report

Purpose:

To specify whether to print a fax transmission result.

Values:

Output regularly	Prints a transmission result after every fax transmission.
Output for non-transmission*	Prints a transmission result only when an error occurs.
Do not output	Does not print fax transmission results.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

c. Fax Cover Page Settings

Click Fax Cover Page Settings button in Windows or select Fax Cover Page Settings for Feature Sets in Macintosh.

Fax Cover Page

Purpose:

To specify whether to attach a cover page to your fax.

Values:

According to Printer Settings

Determines whether to attach a cover page to your fax depending on the setting you specify in Fax Cover Page on the operator panel.

Attach Attaches a cover page to your fax.

None* Does not attach a cover page to your fax.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

Sender

Purpose:

To specify whether to print the sender's name on the fax cover page.

Values:

According to Printer Settings*	Determines whether or not to print the sender's name on the fax cover page based on the printer settings.
Enter a sender name	Allows you to enter a sender's name that will be printed on the fax cover page in Sender Name.

* Denotes the factory default setting.

Sender Name

Purpose:

To enter a sender's name that will be printed on the fax cover page.

The sender's name can be up to 30 characters. If it exceeds 30 characters, only the first 30 characters will be printed.

5 For Windows, click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box, and then click Print.

For Macintosh, click Print.

The Set/Check Fax Transmission dialog box appears.

For Microsoft Windows:

Set/Check Fax Transmission: New Text Document - Notepad Recipient Setting Name: Phone number: My Phone Book file: Browse... Lock Up Phone Book... Lock Up Device Data... Import and add file... Authorization Password: Recipient List: Phone number Name Delete Add to Phone Book Delayed Send Delayed Send Hours: Minutes: 00 : 00 Start Sending Stop Sending Help

For Apple Macintosh:

Set/Check Fax Transmission: Name Add >> Phone number Edit << My Phone Book file: default.dad Look Up Phone Book... Look Up Device Data... Authorization Password Recipient List: Name Phone number Delete Add to Phone Book Delayed Send □ Delayed Send Time 9:00 Stop Sending Start Sending

6 Enter the destination for the recipient. The following procedure is for entering the destination. For details on how to enter the destination, please refer to the Help file for the driver.

a Enter the name and fax number directly.

b Select a fax number from a phone book.

- Look Up Phone Book: Displays a list of fax numbers that are saved in the file specified for My Phone Book file.

- Look Up Device Data: Displays a list of fax numbers that are saved in the Phone Book on the 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

- Import and add file (Windows only): Allows you to select a source file such as a CSV file, WAB file, MAPI, or a LDAP server. (For details on LDAP server, see "LDAP Server" and "Server Phone Book.")

NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the fax service is locked with a password.

To lock the fax service with a password:

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

5 Press button Function Enabled is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

6 Press button until Fax is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

7 Press button until On (Password) is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

8 Enter a password, and then press the √ (Set) button.

To check whether the fax has been sent:

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press button JuntilHistory is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

The job history report is printed.

Receiving a Fax

About Receiving Modes

NOTE: To use the Telephone/Fax or Ans Machine/Fax, connect an answering machine to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer.

When the memory is full, the fax is received in the Telephone mode.

Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes

The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-sized, A4-sized, or Legal-sized paper. For details about loading paper, see "Loading Print Media." For details about setting the paper type and size in the tray, see "Print Media Guidelines."

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode

Your printer is preset to the fax mode at the factory.

If you receive a fax, the printer automatically goes into the fax mode after a specified period of time and receives the fax.

To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after receiving an incoming call, see "Available Fax Settings Options."

Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode

You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote receive code (see "Available Fax Settings Options"), or by setting OnHook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine) and then pressing the ▶(Start) button.

The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to the standby mode when the reception is completed.

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans Machine/Fax

To use the Telephone/Fax or Ans Machine/Fax mode, you must connect an external telephone to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer.

If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it would normally. If your printer hears a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive a fax.

NOTE: If you have set your printer to Ans Machine/Fax and your answering machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to your printer, your printer will automatically go into the Fax mode after a predefined time.

Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone

This feature works best when you are using an external telephone connected to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the external telephone without having to go to the printer.

When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones, press the two-digit keys on the external telephone, or set OnHook to Off and then press the ▷ (Start) button.

The printer receives the document.

Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try pressing the two-digit keys once again.

The remote receive code is set to Off at the factory. You can change the two-digit number to whatever you choose. For details on changing the code, see "Available Fax Settings Options."

NOTE: Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.

Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD

The DRPD is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds.

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will need another telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your FAX number from outside.

To set up the DRPD:

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button. 2 Press √ button System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

3 Press button Aointin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button FantilSettings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

5 Press button Drill Pattern is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

6 Press for button until the desired pattern is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

7 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on again.

To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD. For details, see "Available Fax Settings Options."

Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone company, ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.

Receiving Faxes in the Memory

Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, your printer stores incoming faxes in the memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables, the printer automatically prints the fax.

Polling Receive

You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.

1 Press the (Fax) button.
2 Press button until Polling Receive is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Press or button until on is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
4 Enter the number of the remote machine using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

NOTE: For information on how to enter the fax number of the remote machine, see "Sending a Fax Automatically" or "Sending a Fax Manually."

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button.

Automatic Dialing

Speed Dialing

You can store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (001–200).

When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you cannot change the speed dial number from the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Setting Speed Dial

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Ensure that Phone Book is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
5 Ensure that Speed Dial is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

6 Press button until the desired speed dial number between 001 and 200 is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

7 Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

8 Enter the name, and then press the √ (Set) button.

9 Press button Phantile Number is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

10 Enter the number you want to store using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

To insert a pause between numbers, press the ⚙ (Redial/Pause) button. "-" appears on the display.

To assign a name to the number, enter the name. For details about how to enter names, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters."

11 Press button until Apply Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

When a message prompting you to apply settings, press 📋 button to select Yes, and then press the √ (Set) button.

To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 6 to 11.

To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 To enter the speed dial number do one of the followings after pressing the

(Fax) button:

- Ensure that Fax to is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button. Press √ button Spatid Dial is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

- Press the 🎋 (Speed Dial) button.

3 Enter the speed dial number between 001 and 200 using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button.

The corresponding entry's name briefly displays. To confirm the name again, press the √ (Set) button.

4 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. (For details, see "Adjusting the Document Resolution." For adjusting the contrast, see "Adjusting the Document Contrast.")

5 Press the ▷ (Start) button.

The document scans into the memory.

When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display prompts you for another page. Press or button to select Yes to add more documents or to select No to begin sending the fax immediately, and then press the √ (Set) button.

The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed. The document is sent when the remote fax machine answers.

NOTE: Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple locations. For example, if you enter 00*, you can send a document to the locations registered between 001 and 009.

Group Dialing

If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can create a group of these destinations and set them under a one-digit group dial location. This enables you to use a group dial number setting to send the same document to all the destinations in the group.

NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number.

Setting Group Dial

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Ensure that Phone Book is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

5 Press button Group Dial is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

6 Press button until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6 is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

If a number is already stored in the location you chose, the display shows the number to allow you to change it. To start over with another group-dial number, press the ⬇ (Back) button.

7 Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

8 Enter the name that you want to store using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button. For details about how to enter names, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters."

9 Press button Spatid Dial No is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

10 Press button until the desired number is highlighted, and then press button to select the speed dial numbers. Press the √ (Set) button to confirm.

11 Press button until Apply Settings is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button.

When a message prompting you to apply settings, press √ button to select Yes, and then press the √ (Set) button.

To store more group dial numbers, repeat steps 6 to 11.

To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

Editing Group Dial

You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number to the selected group.

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button Aointin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Ensure that Phone Book is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

5 Press button until Group Dial is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

6 Press button until the group dial number that you want to edit is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

7 Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

8 Enter a new name, and then press the √ (Set) button.

9 Press button until Speed Dial No is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

10 Press button until the speed dial number that you want to edit is highlighted, and then press button to select or deselect the speed dial number. Press the √ (Set) button.

11 Press button until Apply Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

When a message prompting you to apply settings, press √ button to select Yes, and then press the √ (Set) button.

To delete an existing group dial number, press the X (Cancel) button.

NOTE: When you delete the last speed dial in a group, the group itself is not deleted.

If you want to edit another group dial number, repeat steps 6 to 11.

To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

Sending a Fax Using Group Dial (Multi-address Transmission)

You can use group dialing for Broadcasting or Delayed transmissions.

Follow the procedure of the desired operation. (For Delayed transmission, see "Specifying the Fax Settings Options.")

You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the procedure to complete the desired operation.

Your printer automatically scans the document loaded in the Automatic Document Feeder or on the document glass into the memory. The printer dials each of the numbers included in the group.

Printing a Speed Dial List

You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a Speed Dial list.

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press √ button Syntilem Setup is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
3 Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
4 Press √ button Speed Dial is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

A list of your speed dial entries is printed.

Phone Book

You can select or search the registered phone numbers from the phone books.

1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.

OR

Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and close the document cover.

For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document."

2 Press the (Fax) button.

3 Ensure that Fax to is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 To select a destination, do either one of the followings:

- Select from the local phone book:

Press √ button Phuntile Book is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

- Search from the local phone book or the server phone book:

Press √ button Search Local Phone Book or Search Server Phone Book is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

NOTE: For more information on phone book and server phone book, see "Address Books."

NOTE: If you are using the server phone book, Server Phone Book must be set to On. For details, see "Server Phone Book" and "LDAP Server."

NOTE: The phone numbers need to be registered before you can select Phone Book on the operator panel.

5 Press button to select or enter a keyword to search destinations, and then press the √ (Set) button.

6 Press the ▷ (Start) button.

Other Ways to Fax

Using the Secure Receiving Mode

You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes will go in memory. When the mode turns off, any faxes stored will be printed.

NOTE: Before operation, ensure Panel Lock is enabled.

To turn the secure receiving mode on:

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
5 Press button until Secure Receive is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
6 Ensure that Secure Receive Set is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
7 Press for button to select Enable, and then press the √ (Set) button.

8 Enter a four-digit password using the numeric keypad, and then press the (Set) button.

9 Ensure that Enable is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it into memory and the JOB STATUS screen displays "Secure Receive" to let you know that there is a fax stored.

To print received documents:

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press √ button JuntilSTATUS is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

3 Press button until Secure Receive is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Enter the password, and then press the √ (Set) button.

The faxes stored in memory are printed.

To turn the secure receiving mode off:

1 Follow the same steps from 1 to 6 in "To turn the secure receiving mode on:" and select Secure Receive Set.

2 Press or button to select Disable, and then press the √ (Set) button.

To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

Using an Answering Machine

To the wall jack Printer Line Telephone Answering Device Phone

You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of your printer as shown above.

• Set your printer to the Ans Machine/Fax and set Auto Rec Ans/Fax to specify the time for the TAD.
• When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are received and then starts receiving the fax.
• If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into the Fax after the ring tone sounds for a predefined time.
• If you answer the call and hear fax tones, the printer will answer the fax call if you

Set OnHook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine), and then press the ▶ (Start) button and hang up the receiver.

OR

Press the two-digit remote receive code and hang up the receiver.

Using a Computer Modem

To the Internet Computer Printer Line Telephone Answering Device Phone

If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up internet connection, connect the computer modem directly to the back of your printer with the TAD as shown above.

- Set your printer to the Ans Machine/Fax and set Auto Rec Ans/Fax to specify the time for the TAD.

- Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.

- Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax.

- Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the computer modem.

Printing a Report

The following reports may be useful when using fax:

NOTE: For more information on other reports, see "Reports."

• S p e e d D i a l
- Address Book
- Server Address
- Fax Activity
• F a x P e n d i n g
- Print Meter

Speed Dial

This list shows all the numbers currently stored in the memory of your printer as speed dial numbers.

You can print this Speed Dial list from the operator panel. (For details, see "Printing a Speed Dial List.")

Address Book

This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the printer's memory as Address Book information.

Server Address

This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the printer's memory as Server Address information.

Fax Activity

This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.

Fax Pending

This list shows the status of pending faxes. You may print this list to confirm your changes after changing any settings.

Print Meter

This report shows the total number of pages printed. The report will be titled Dell ColorTrack Report.

Procedures:

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Ensure that Report/List is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

4 Press button until the report or list you want to print is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

The selected report or list is printed.

• Speed Dial: Speed Dial list
• Address Book: Address Book list
• Server Address: Server Address list
• Fax Activity: Fax activity information
• Fax Pending: Pending faxes
• Print Meter: Print volume report

Changing Setting Options

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press button System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
3 Press button until Defaults Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press button FantiDefaults is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
5 Press button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
6 Press for button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the √ (Set) button. To return to the top screen of the ☐ (Menu) menu, press the AC (All Clear) button.

Know Your Printer

21

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

The Tool Box allows you to view, specify, and diagnose the system settings.

The Tool Box consists of the Printer Settings Report, Printer Maintenance, and Diagnosis tabs.

NOTE: A Password dialog box appears the first time you try to change settings on Tool Box when Panel Lock is set on the printer. In this case, input the password that you have already specified, and click OK to apply the settings.

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Printer Settings Report

The Printer Settings Report tab includes the Printer Information, Menu Settings, Reports, TCP/IP Settings, Defaults Settings, and Fax Settings pages.

Printer Information

Purpose:

To display the system information of the printer.

Values:

Dell Service Tag Number Displays the service tag number of your printer.
Express Service Code Displays the express service code number.
Printer Serial Number	Displays the serial number of your printer.
Printer Type	Displays the type of printing for the printer.Color Laser is displayed normally.
Asset Tag Number Displays the asset tag number of your printer.

Memory Capacity Displays the memory capacity.

Processor Speed Displays the processing speed.
Firmware Version Displays the version of the controller.
Network Firmware Version Displays the NIC version.
MCU Firmware Version Displays the version of the Machine Control Unit (MCU) firmware.
Printing Speed (Color) Displays the speed for color printing.
Printing Speed (Monochrome)	Displays the speed for monochrome printing.

Menu Settings

Purpose:

To display the menu settings of the printer.

Values:

System Settings	Power Saver Timer Sleep	Displays the amount of transition time to the Sleep mode after the printer finishes a job.
	Power Saver Timer Deep Sleep	Displays the amount of transition time between the Sleep mode and the Deep Sleep mode.
	Power Saver Wake Up Displays whether to wake up from the Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is Off.
	Auto Reset Displays the amount of time before the printer automatically resets the settings on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made.
	Control Panel Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
	Invalid Key Tone	Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Machine Ready Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes ready. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Copy Completed Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Job Completed Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than copying is complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Fault Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends abnormally. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Out of Paper Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Low Toner Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Auto Clear Alert Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Base Tone Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel is returned to the default setting by scrolling the loop menu. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.
Fault Time-out Displays the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally.
Job Time-out Displays the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.
Panel Language Displays the language that is used on the operator panel screen.
Auto Log Print Displays whether to automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.
Print ID Displays where to print a user ID on the output paper.
Print Text Displays whether the printer outputs PDL (Page Description Language) data (which is not supported by the printer) as text when the printer receives it.
Banner Sheet Insert Position*3	Displays where to insert the banner sheet.
Banner Sheet Specify Tray*3	Displays the banner sheet tray.
RAM Disk*1	Displays whether to allocate RAM for the disk file system for the Secure Print and Proof Print features.
Substitute Tray Displays an indication to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.
mm/inch Displays the measurement unit used on the operator panel.
Default Print Paper Size	Displays the default print paper size.
ColorTrack Error Report	Displays whether to print the error report on the ColorTrack
Letterhead Duplex Mode*3	Displays whether to print both sides of a sheet of letterhead paper.
Low Toner Alert Msg Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

	Email From Field Displays whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E-mail.
	Server Address Book Displays whether to specify the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.
	Server Phone Book Displays whether to specify the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.
Date & Time Date Format Displays the selected date format.
	Time Format	Displays the selected time format; 24H or 12H.
	Time Zone Displays the selected time zone.
	Set Date Displays the date setting.
	Set Time Displays the time setting.
Paper Density Plain Displays the plain paper density settings.
	Label Displays the label paper density settings.
Auto Registration Adjustment	Auto Registration Adjustment	Displays whether to automatically adjust color registration.
Adjust Altitude	Adjust Altitude	Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
Non-Dell Toner	Non-Dell Toner	Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Tray Settings Tray 1 Paper Type Displays the paper type setting of the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Paper Size Displays the paper size setting of the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Custom Size - Y Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Custom Size - X	Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Display Popup Displays a popup menu that prompts to set the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 2 Paper Type^*2	Displays the paper type setting of the optional 250-sheet feeder.
Tray 2 Paper Size^*2	Displays the paper size setting of the optional 250-sheet feeder.
Tray 2 Display Popup^*2	Displays a popup menu that prompts to set the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the optional 250-sheet feeder.

*1 This item is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed.
*2 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.
*3 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Reports

Purpose:

To print the settings and history information of the printer.

The reports are printed in the paper size specified in system settings. The default is A4.

Values:

System Settings	Click this button to print a detailed list of the system settings.
Panel Settings	Click this button to print a detailed list of the panel settings.

PCL Fonts List Click this button to print a list of the PCL (Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) Fonts.

PCL Macro List Click this button to print a list of the PCL Macro.
PDF Fonts List Click this button to print a list of the PDF fonts.
Job History Click this button to print the Completed Jobs history of the printer.
Error History Click this button to print the error history of the printer.
Print Meter	Click this button to print the report for the total number of pages printed.
Color Test Page Click this button to print a color test page.
Stored Documents*1	Click this button to print a list of the Stored Documents.
Protocol Monitor	Click this button to print the Protocol Monitor report.
*1 You can print the list only when RAM disk is enabled.

TCP/IP Settings

Purpose:

To display the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).

Values:

IP Address Mode	Displays the method for acquiring the IP address.
IP Address Displays the IP address of the printer.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
Gateway Address	Displays the gateway address.

Defaults Settings

Purpose:

To display the default settings for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print from USB services of the printer.

Values:

Copy Defaults	Color	Displays whether to make copies in color or in black and white.
	Select Tray	Displays the input tray.

SSF Paper Size Displays the paper size loaded in the single sheet feeder.
SSF Paper Type Displays the paper type loaded in the single sheet feeder.
Collated Displays whether to collate the copy.
Reduce/Enlarge Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
Document Size Displays the default paper size.
Original Type Displays the type of the original document.
Lighter/Darker Displays the default copy density level.
Sharpness Displays the default sharpness level.
Color Saturation	Displays the default color saturation level.
Auto Exposure	Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Auto Expo.Level	Displays the background suppression level.
Color Balance (Yellow Low Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of low density yellow.
Color Balance (Yellow Middle Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of medium density yellow.
Color Balance (Yellow High Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of high density yellow.
Color Balance (Magenta Low Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of low density magenta.
Color Balance (Magenta Middle Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of medium density magenta.
Color Balance (Magenta High Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of high density magenta.

	Color Balance (Cyan Low Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of low density cyan.
	Color Balance (Cyan Middle Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of medium density cyan.
	Color Balance (Cyan High Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of high density cyan.
	Color Balance (Black Low Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of low density black.
	Color Balance (Black Middle Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of medium density black.
	Color Balance (Black High Dens.)	Displays the color balance level of high density black.
	2Sided*1	Displays whether to copy on both sides of a sheet of paper.
	Multiple-Up Displays whether the Multiple-Up feature is enabled.
	Margin Top/Bottom	Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.
	Margin Left/Right	Displays the value of the left and right margins.
	Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.
Scan Defaults	Scan To Network	Displays whether to save scanned documents on a network server or on a computer.
	File Format	Displays the file format in which scanned documents are to be saved.
	Color Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white.
	Color Button Set (Black & White Button)	Displays whether to scan in black and white or in grayscale when Black & White is selected for a color mode.
Color Button Set (Color Button)	Displays whether to scan in color or in color (Photo) when Color is selected for a color mode
Resolution Displays the default scan resolution.
Document Size	Displays the paper size of the original document.
Lighter/Darker	Displays the default scan density level.
Sharpness	Displays the default sharpness level.
Contrast	Displays the default contrast level.
Auto Exposure	Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Auto Expo.Level	Displays the background suppression level.
MarginTop/Bottom	Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.
MarginLeft/Right	Displays the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle	Displays the value of the middle margin.
TIFF FileFormat	Displays the TIFF file format; TIFF V6 or TTN2.
ImageCompression	Displays the image compression level.
Max Email Size	Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.

Fax Defaults Resolution Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.

Lighter/Darker Displays the density level to be used for fax transmission.

Delayed Start Displays the fax transmission start time.

Print from USB Defaults	Color Displays the default color mode.
	Select Tray Displays the default tray.
	SSF Paper Size Displays the default paper size when the single sheet feeder is used.
	SSF Paper Type Displays the default paper type when the single sheet feeder is used.
	2Sided*1	Displays whether to copy on both sides of a sheet of paper.
	Layout	Displays the default paper layout when Multiple - Up is selected.

*1 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Fax Settings

Purpose:

To display the fax settings of the printer.

Values:

Receive Mode Displays the fax receiving mode.
Auto Rec Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.
Auto Rec Fax/Tel Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Auto Rec Ans/Fax Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.
Line Monitor Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
Ring Tone Volume	Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
Line Type	Displays the line type; PSTN or PBX.
Tone/Pulse	Displays whether to use tone or pulse dialing.
Resend Delay Displays the interval between transmission attempts.
Redial Attempts Displays the number of redial attempts.
Redial Delay Displays the redial interval.
Junk Fax Setup	Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted stations.
Remote Receive	Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
Remote Rcv Tone	Displays the tone to start Remote Receive.
Fax Header Displays whether to print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.
Fax Header Name Displays the name of the sender that will be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Number	Displays the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page	Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting.
Duplex Print*1	Displays whether to print the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Sent Fax Fwd Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Fax Fwd Number Displays the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.
Prefix Dial Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Num	Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size	Displays whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper.
ECM	Displays whether the Error Correction Mode (ECM) is enabled.
Modem Speed	Displays the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
Fax Activity	Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Fax Transmit	Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.
Fax Broadcast	Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.
Fax Protocol	Displays whether to automatically print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.
Country Displays the country where the printer is used.
*1 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Printer Maintenance

The Printer Maintenance tab includes the System Settings, Date & Time, Paper Density, Color Registration Adjustment, Adjust Altitude, Reset Defaults, Non-Dell Toner, Initialize Print Meter, Tray Settings, TCP/IP Settings, Network Settings, Copy Defaults, Scan Defaults, Fax Defaults, Print from USB Defaults, and Fax Settings pages.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

System Settings

Purpose:

To configure the power management of the printer, auto clear time, alarm tones, time-out time, mm/inch setting, job log auto print, position of the Print ID, setting of the dump print, setting of the additional memory, setting of the substitute sheet, and operator panel language settings.

Values:

Power Saver Timer	Sleep*1	1–30 minutes Sets the amount of transition time to the
		3 minutes*	Sleep mode after the printer finishes a job.
	Deep Sleep*1	5–60 minutes Sets the amount of transition time
		10 minutes*	between the Sleep mode and the Deep Sleep mode.
Power Saver Wake Up		Off*	Sets whether to wake up from the Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is Off.
		On
Auto Reset 45 seconds		*	Sets the amount of time before the printer automatically resets the settings on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made.
		1 minute
		2 minutes
		3 minutes
		4 minutes

Audio Tone Control Panel	Off* Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.
	Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume
	Normal	when the operator panel input is correct.
	Loud
Invalid Key	Off*	Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.
	Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume
	Normal	when the operator panel input is incorrect.
	Loud
Machine Ready	Off Does not emit a tone when the printer becomes ready.
	Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume
	Normal*	when the printer becomes ready.
	Loud
Copy Completed	Off Does not emit a tone when copying is complete.
	Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume
	Normal*	when copying is complete.
	Loud
Job Completed	Off Does not emit a tone when any other job except copying is complete.
	Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume
	Normal*	when any other job except copying is complete.
	Loud
Fault Tone	Off Does not emit a tone when a job ends abnormally.
	Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume
	Normal*	when a job ends abnormally.
	Loud
Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.
	Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume
	Normal*	when a problem occurs.
	Loud
Out of Paper	Off Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
	Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume
	Normal*	when the printer runs out of paper.
	Loud
Low Toner Alert	Off Does not emit a tone when the toner is low.
	Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume
	Normal*	when the toner is low.
	Loud
Auto Clear Alert	Off*	Does not emit a tone before the printer performs auto clear.
	Soft Emits a tone at the specified volume 5
	Normal	seconds before the printer performs auto clear.
	Loud
Base Tone Off *		Does not emit a tone when the operator panel display is returned to the default setting.
	Soft Emits a tone when the operator panel display is returned to the default setting.
	Normal
	Loud
Fault Time-out 0 Sets the amount of time the printer
3–300 seconds		waits before canceling a job when the job stops abnormally.
60 seconds*

Job Time-out 0 Sets the amount of time the printer
	5-300 seconds		waits for additional data from the computer before it cancels the job.
	30 seconds*
Auto Log Print Off	*		Does not automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.
	On Automatically prints a job history report after every 20 jobs.
Print ID Off	*		Does not print the user ID.
	Top Left Prints the user ID on the specified location.
	Top Right
	Bottom Left
	Bottom Right
Print Text Off Does not print the received PDL data as text data.
Banner Sheet*3	Insert Position	Off*	Does not insert the banner sheet.
		Front Sets where to insert the banner sheet.
		Back
		Front & Back
	Specify Tray	Tray1*	Sets the tray for the banner sheet.
		Tray2*2
RAM Disk*4	Disable Does not allocate RAM for the disk file system. Secure Print and Proof Print jobs will abort and be recorded to the job log.
	50-500MBytes		Allocates RAM for the disk file system automatically. (in 50MBytes increments)
	300MBytes*

Substitute Tray Off No tray size substitute accepted.
	Larger Size Substitutes paper of next largest size.When there is no larger paper size, the printer substitutes paper of nearest size.
	Nearest Size*	Substitutes paper of nearest size.
mm/inch Millimeters(mm) *		Selects millimeter or inch as the default measurement unit.
Default Print Paper Size	A4*	Sets the default print paper size.
	Inches(")
Default Print Paper Size	Letter
ColorTrack Error Report	Off*	Does not automatically print error-related information if printing with ColorTrack results in an error.
	On Automatically prints error-related information if printing with ColorTrack results in an error.
Letterhead Duplex Mode*3	Disable*	Does not prints on both sides of a sheet of letterhead paper.
	Enable Prints on both sides of a sheet of letterhead paper.
Low Toner Alert Msg	On*	Shows the alert message when the toner is low.
	Off Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.
Email From Field	Enable*	Displays whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E-mail.
	Disable
Server Address Book	On Enables the server address book.
	Off*	Disables the server address book.
Server Phone Book	On Enables the server phone book.
	Off*	Disables the server phone book.
Panel Language English *		Sets the language to be used on the operator panel.
	French
	Italian
	German
	Spanish
	Danish
	Dutch
	Norwegian
	Swedish

Apply New Settings

After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to apply the changes.

*1 Enter 3 to put the printer in the power saver timer mode 3 minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Enter 3 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a value between 1 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver timer mode when it receives data from the computer. You can also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
*2 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.
*3 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.
*4 This item is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed.

Date & Time

Purpose:

To specify the date and time.

Values:

Date Format Sets the date format.

Time Format

Sets the time format in 24H or 12H.

Time Zone Sets the time zone.

Set Date Sets the date.
Set Time	Sets the time. You can select AM or PM when Time Format is set to 12H.
Apply New Settings	After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings	Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

Paper Density

Purpose:

To specify the paper density settings.

Values:

Plain Light Sets plain paper density.
Normal*
Label Light Sets label paper density.
Normal*
Apply New Settings	After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings	Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

Color Registration Adjustment

Purpose:

To set Color Registration Adjustment (individual yellow, magenta, cyan correction) settings. When Auto Registration Adjustment is set to On, the printer prints the color registration chart and adjusts the color registration by using the chart. Color registration adjustments need to be made during the initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to a different location.

Values:

Auto Registration Adjustment	Auto Registration Adjustment		Off Does not perform color registration automatically.
			On*	Performs color registration automatically.
Manual Registration Adjustments *1	Auto Correct			Click Start to perform color registration automatically.
	Print Color Regi Chart			Click Start to print a color registration chart.
	Registration Adjustments	PY(Process Yellow)	-9 to +9	Sets lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) and process (paper feed direction) color adjustment values that are found in the color registration chart individually for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
		PM(Process Magenta)	-9 to +9
		PC(Process Cyan)	-9 to +9
		LY(Left Yellow)	-9 to +9
		LM(Left Magenta)	-9 to +9
		LC(Left Cyan)	-9 to +9
		RY(Right Yellow)	-9 to +9
		RM(Right Magenta)	-9 to +9
		RC(Right Cyan)	-9 to +9

Apply New Settings After you complete change the

settings, click this button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the

printer and apply the changes.

*1 This item is available only when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off.

Adjust Altitude

Purpose:

To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

The method for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.

Values:

Adjust Altitude 0 meter *		Sets the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
	1000 meters
	2000 meters
	3000 meters
Apply New Settings		After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings		Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

Reset Defaults

Purpose:

To initialize wired network data stored in non-volatile memory (NVM). After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wired network settings are reset to their default values.

Values:

Reset Defaults	System Section	Initializes the system parameters.
	User Fax Section	Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book.
	User Scan Section	Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.

Non-Dell Toner

NOTICE: Using a non-Dell toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.

Purpose:

To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Values:

Non-Dell Toner	Off*	Disables the use of another manufacturer's toner cartridge.
	On	Enables the use of another manufacturer's toner cartridge.
Apply New Settings		After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings		Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

Initialize Print Meter

Purpose:

To initialize the Print Meter. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to 0.

Values:

Initialize Print Meter

Click Start to initialize the PrintMeter.

Tray Settings

Purpose:

To specify the paper types and sizes for the standard 250-sheet tray and the optional 250-sheet feeder respectively.

Values:

Tray 1 Paper Type	Plain *	Sets the type of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
	Plain Thick
	Covers
	Covers Thick
	Label
	Envelope
	Recycled
	Letterhead
	Preprinted
	Prepunched
	Color
	Plain - Side 2
	Plain Thick - Side 2
	Recycled - Side 2
	Color - Side 2
Tray 1 Paper Size A4 *		Sets the size of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Custom Size - Y	127–355 mm(5.0-14.0 inch)	Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
	297 mm* (11.7 inch)
Tray 1 Custom Size - X	77–215 mm(3.0–8.5 inch)	Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
	210 mm* (8.3 inch)
Tray 1 Display Popup	On* Displays a popup message that prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 2 Paper Type*1	Plain*	Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 250-sheet feeder.
	Plain Thick
	Recycled
	Letterhead
	Preprinted
	Prepunched
	Color
	Plain - Side 2
	Plain Thick - Side 2
	Recycled - Side 2
	Color - Side 2
Tray 2 Paper Size*1	A4*	Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional 250-sheet feeder.
	A5
	B5
	Letter
	Folio
	Legal
	Executive
Tray 2 Display Popup*1	On*	Displays a popup message that prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the optional 250-sheet feeder.

Apply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

*1 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.

TCP/IP Settings

Purpose:

To configure TCP/IP settings.

Values:

IP Address Mode	AutoIP^*	Automatically sets the IP address.
		A random value in the range of 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255 that is not currently in use on the network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.
	BOOTP Sets the IP address using BOOTP.
	RARP Sets the IP address using RARP.
	DHCP Sets the IP address using DHCP.
	Panel Manually sets the IP address.
IP Address Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.

Subnet Mask Manually sets the subnet mask.

It is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255. 255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.

Gateway Address Manually sets the gateway address.
	It is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
Apply New Settings	After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings	Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

Network Settings

NOTE: Network Settings is not available when the printer is connected using a USB cable.

Purpose:

To configure the setup of the printer using your web browser.

Values:

Print Server Settings*1	Display	Click to display the Print Server Setup page on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Display of EWS	Off	Does not display the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
	On*	Displays the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Apply New Settings		After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings		Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.
*1 This item is available only when Display of EWS is se to On.

Copy Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own copy settings.

Values:

Color Black & White Prints in black and white mode.
	Color*	Prints in color mode.
Select Tray Tray 1	* The paper is fed from the standard 250-sheet tray.
	Tray 2*1	The paper is fed from the optional 250-sheet feeder.
	SSF The paper is fed from the single sheet feeder.
SSF Paper Size A4	*	Sets the document size loaded in the single sheet feeder.
	A5
	B5
	Letter
	Folio
	Legal
	Executive
	Envelope #10
	Monarch
	DL
	C5
SSF Paper Type Plain *		Sets the document type loaded in the single sheet feeder.
	Plain Thick
	Covers
	Covers Thick
	Coated
	Coated Thick
	Envelope
	Recycled
	Letterhead
	Preprinted
	Prepunched
	Color
	Plain - Side 2
	Plain Thick - Side 2
	Recycled - Side 2
	Color - Side 2
Collated Off Does not sort copy job.
	On Sorts the copy job.
	Auto*	Automatically sorts the copy job.
Reduce/Enlarge mm series	Custom Sets the default enlargement / reduction ratio to the custom size.
	50% Sets the default reduction ratio.
	A4→A5 (70%)
	B5→A5 (81%)
	100% Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied image.
	A5→B5 (122%)	Sets the default enlargement ratio.
	A5→A4 (141%)
	200%
inch series Custom Sets the default reduction ratio.
	50%
	Ledger→Letter (64%)
	Legal→Letter (78%)
	100% Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied image.
	Statement→Letter (129%)	Sets the default enlargement ratio.
	Statement→Legal (154%)
	200%
Custom Reduce/Enlarge	25–400% Reduces or enlarges the image to the custom size when you set Reduce/Enlarge to Custom.
	100%*
Document Size Auto *		Detects the document size automatically.
		A4 Sets the document size.
		A5
		B5
		Letter
		Folio
		Legal
		Executive
Original Type	Text	Improves the image quality of documents with text.
	Text & Photo*	Improves the image quality of documents with both text and photos /gray tones.
	Photo Improves the image quality of documents with photos.
Lighter/Darker Lighter 3 Makes the copy lighter than the original.
Lighter 2	Works well with dark print.
Lighter 1
Normal*	Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker 1 Makes the copy darker than the original.
Darker 2	Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker 3
Sharpness Sharper Makes the copy sharper than the original.
Normal*	Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Softer Makes the copy softer than the original.
Color Saturation High Increases the color saturation to brighten the color of the copy.
Normal*	The color saturation is the same as the original.
Low Decreases the color saturation to lighten the color of the copy.
Auto Exposure On *	Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Off Does not suppress the background.
Auto Expo. Level Normal *	Sets the background suppression level to Normal.
Higher(1) Sets the background suppression level to Higher(1).
Higher(2) Sets the background suppression level to Higher(2).

Color Balance	Yellow Low Dens.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of low density
		0*	yellow.
	Yellow Middle Dens.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of medium
		0*	density yellow.
	Yellow High Dens.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of high density
		0*	yellow.
	Magenta Low Dens.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of low density
		0*	magenta
	Magenta Middle Dens.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of medium
		0*	density magenta.
	Magenta High Dens.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of high density
		0*	magenta.
	Cyan Low Dens.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of low density
		0*	cyan.
	Cyan Middle Den.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of medium
		0*	density cyan.
	Cyan High Dens.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of high density
		0*	cyan.
	Black Low Dens.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of low density
		0*	black.
	Black Middle Dens.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of medium
		0*	density black.
	Black High Dens.	-3 to 3 Sets the color balance level of high density
		0*	black.

2Sided*2	1->1Sided* Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.
	Long Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.
	Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.
Multiple-Up Off	* Does not perform multiple-up printing.
	Auto Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
	ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.
	Manual Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.
Margin Top/Bottom	0–50 mm(0.0–2.0 inch)4 mm*(0.2 inch)	Sets the value of the top and bottom margins.
Margin Left/Right	0–50 mm(0.0–2.0 inch)4 mm*(0.2 inch)	Sets the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle	0–50 mm(0.0–2.0 inch)0 mm*(0.0 inch)	Sets the value of the middle margin.
Apply New Settings		After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.
*1 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.*2 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Scan Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own scan settings.

Values:

Scan To Network Server (FTP) Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.
		Computer (Network)*	Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.
File Format PDF		* Saves the scanned image in PDF.
		Multi Page TIFF	Saves the scanned image in Multi Page TIFF.
		TIFF Saves the scanned image in TIFF.
		JPEG Saves the scanned image in JPEG.
Color Black &		White	Scans in black and white mode.
		Color* Scans in color mode.
Color Button Set	Black & White Button	Black & White*	Scans in black and white.
		GrayScale Scans in grayscale.
	Color Button	Color* Scans in color.
		Color (Photo) Scans in color (Photo). This is suitable for photographic images.
Resolution 200 x 200 dpi		* Scans an image at 200 dpi.
		300 x 300 dpi Scans an image at 300 dpi.
		400 x 400 dpi Scans an image at 400 dpi.
		600 x 600 dpi Scans an image at 600 dpi.
Document size		A4	Sets the document size.
		A5
		B5
		Letter*
		Folio
		Legal
		Executive

Lighter/Darker Lighter 3 Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.
Lighter 2
Lighter 1
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker 1 Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker 2
Darker 3
Sharpness Sharper Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.
Normal* Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.
Softer Makes the scanned image softer than the original.
Contrast High Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker than the original.
Medium* Does not adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original.
Low Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors lighter than the original.
Auto Exposure On * Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Off Does not suppress the background.
Auto Expo. Level Normal* Sets the background suppression level to Normal.
Higher(1)		Sets the background suppression level to Higher(1).
Higher(2)		Sets the background suppression level to Higher(2).
Margin Top/Bottom 0–50 mm (0.0–2.0 inch)		Sets the value of the top and bottom margins.
2 mm* (0.1 inch)
Margin Left/Right 0–50 mm(0.0–2.0 inch)		Sets the value of the left and right margins.
2 mm* (0.1 inch)
Margin Middle 0–50 mm(0.0–2.0 inch)		Sets the value of the middle margin.
0 mm* (0.0 inch)
TIFF File Format TIFF V6 *		Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6.
Image Compression	High	Sets the image compression level to High.
	Medium*	Sets the image compression level to Medium.
	Low	Sets the image compression level to Low.
Max Email Size 50–16384 Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The default is 2048 K bytes.
Apply New Settings		After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings		Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.

Fax Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own fax settings.

Values:

Resolution Standard	* Improves the output quality of the original. For documents with normal sized characters.
	Fine Improves the output quality of the original. For documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
	Super Fine	Improves the output quality of the original. For documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution.
	Photo Improves the output quality of the original. For documents containing photographic images.
Lighter/Darker	Lighter 3 Makes the documents lighter than the original.
	Lighter 2	Works well with dark print.
	Lighter 1
	Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
	Darker 1 Makes the documents darker than the original.
	Darker 2	Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
	Darker 3
Delayed Start	00:00–23:59 *1	Sets the fax transmission start time in 24-hour format when sending a fax at a specified time.
	21:00*
	01:00–12: AM Sets the fax transmission start time in 12-hour format when sending a fax at a specified time.
	59*2 PM
	9:00 PM*
Apply New Settings		After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings		Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.
*1 This item is available only when Time Format is set to 24H in the Date & Time page.*2 This item is available only when Time Format is set to 12H in the Date & Time page.

Print from USB Defaults

Purpose:

To create your own settings for Print from USB Defaults.

Values:

Color Black & White Prints in black and white mode.
	Color*Prints in color mode.
Select Tray Tray 1	*The paper is fed from the standard 250-sheet tray.
	Tray 2*1The paper is fed from the optional 250-sheet feeder.
	SSF The paper is fed from the single sheet feeder.
SSF Paper Size A4	*Sets the document size loaded in the single sheet feeder.
	A5
	B5
	Letter
	Folio
	Legal
SSF Paper Type Plain * Sets the document type loaded in the single sheet feeder.
	Plain Thick
	Covers
	Covers Thick
	Coated
	Coated Thick
	Envelope
	Recycled
	Letterhead
	Preprinted
	Prepunched
	Color
	Plain - Side 2
	Plain Thick - Side 2
	Recycled - Side 2
	Color - Side 2
2Sided^*2	1->1Sided* Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.
	Long Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.
	Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.
Layout 1Up	* Prints one page on one side of a sheet of paper.
	2Up Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
	4Up Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
Apply New Settings After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.
*1 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.*2 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Fax Settings

Purpose:

To specify the fax settings.

Values:

Receive Mode	Telephone	Sets the default fax receiving mode to Telephone.
	Fax* Sets the default fax receiving mode to Fax.
	Telephone/Fax	Sets the default fax receiving mode to Telephone/Fax.
	Ans Machine/Fax	Sets the default fax receiving mode to Ans Machine/Fax.
	DRPD	Sets the default fax receiving mode to DRPD.
Auto Rec Fax	0–255 Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
	0*	receive mode after receiving an incoming call in 0-255 seconds.
Auto Rec Fax/Tel	0–255 Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
	6*	receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call in 0-255 seconds.
Auto Rec Ans/Fax	0–255 Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax
	21*	mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call in 0-255 seconds.
Line Monitor	Off Turns off the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
	Low Sets the volume of the line monitor.
	Medium*
	High
Ring Tone Volume	Off Turns the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
	Low Sets the volume of the ring tone.
	Medium
	High*
Line Type PSTN	*	Sets the default line type to PSTN.
	PBX	Sets the default line type to PBX.
Tone/Pulse Tone * Sets the dialing type to Tone.
	Pulse (10PPS)	Sets the dialing type to Pulse(10PPS).
	Pulse (20PPS)	Sets the dialing type to Pulse(20PPS).
Resend Delay 3–255 Sets the interval between transmission attempts within 8^* the range of 3 to 255 seconds.
Redial Attempts	0-13 Sets the number of redial attempts to make when the 3^* destination fax number is busy, within the range of 0 to 13.
Redial Delay 1–15 Sets the interval between redial attempts within the 1^* range of 1 to 15 minutes.
Junk Fax Setup	On Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.
	Off^* Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.
Remote Receive	On	Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.
	Off^* Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.
Remote Rcv Tone	00–99 Sets the tone to start Remote Receive. 00^*
Fax Header On * Prints the information of the sender on the header of faxes.
			Off	Does not print the information of the sender on the header of faxes.
Fax Header Name		Sets the sender's name to be printed on the header on faxes.
Fax Number		Sets the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page	On Attaches a cover page to faxes.
	Off^* Does not attach a cover page to faxes.
DRPD Pattern	Pattern 1–7	Provides a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
	Pattern 4^*
Duplex Print*1	On Prints the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper.
	Off* Does not print the received fax on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Sent Fax Fwd Off* Does not forward any of the incoming faxes to a specified destination.
	Forward	Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified destination.
	Print and Forward	Prints the incoming fax and forwards it to a specified destination.
Fax Fwd Number		Sets the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Prefix Dial On Sets a prefix dial number.
	Off* Does not set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial Num Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started.
Discard Size Off * Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.
	On Discards any excess at the bottom of the page.
	Auto Reduction	Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the appropriate sized paper.
ECM On	* Enables the ECM (Error Correction Mode). To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.
	Off Disables the ECM.
Modem Speed	2.4 Kbps Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
	4.8 Kbps
	9.6 Kbps
	14.4 Kbps
	33.6 Kbps*
Fax Activity Auto Print * Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
	No Auto Print Does not print a fax activity report automatically.
Fax Transmit Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error*	Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable	Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.
Fax Broadcast	Print Always* Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
	Print On Error	Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
	Print Disable	Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.
Fax Protocol Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.
Country Selects the country where the printer is used.
Apply New Settings	After you change the settings, click this button to apply the changes.
Restart printer to apply new settings	Click this button to restart the printer and apply the changes.
*1 This item is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Diagnosis

The Diagnosis tab includes the Chart Print, Machine Check, Paper Wrinkle Check Mode, Environment Sensor Info, Clean Developer, and Refresh Mode pages.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Chart Print

Purpose:

To print various charts that can be used for diagnosis of the printer. The chart is printed to A4 or letter size paper.

Values:

Pitch Configuration Chart	Prints full halftone pages for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. Also prints pages to check the pitch. A total of five pages are output.
Ghost Configuration Chart	Prints a chart to check for ghost printing. One page is printed.
4 Colors Configuration Chart	Bands of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black are printed with varying density. One page is printed.
MQ Chart	Prints charts to check for the binding in A4 or Letter.
Alignment Chart	Prints a chart to check for proper alignment of the print image on the paper. One page is printed.
Drum Refresh Configuration Chart	Prints a chart to check the light fatigue of the drum cartridge.

Machine Check

Purpose:

To check the operation of the printer components.

Values:

Machine Check	Main Motor Operation Check*	Click Start to operate the main motor inside the printer. Confirm the motor sound.
	Fuser Motor Operation Check	Click Start to operate the fuser motor. Confirm the motor sound.
	Feed Roll Operation Check*1	Click Start to operate the feed roll. Confirm the motor sound.
	REGI CLUTCH Operation Check	Click Start to operate the REGI CLUTCH. Confirm that you can hear the clutch clicking.
	Dispense Motor Check (Yellow)	Click Start to operate the dispense motor for each toner cartridge. Confirm the motor sound.
	Dispense Motor Check (Magenta)
	Dispense Motor Check (Cyan)
	Dispense Motor Check (Black)
Play of Sound Plays back through speakers of your computer a recording of the normal sound for the currently selected Machine Check item.
Start Click this button to check the operation of the items selected with Machine Check and output the results to Result.
Result Displays the results of the checked items.
*1 When performing the feed roll operation check, remove the paper tray from the printer.

Paper Wrinkle Check Mode

Purpose:

To determine whether or not paper is wrinkled in the fuser.

This function stops printing before the paper enters the fuser. After you remove the paper inside the printer, check the following:

• If the paper is wrinkled, the wrinkle occurred in the part other than fuser.
• If the paper is not wrinkled, the wrinkle occurred in the fuser.

Values:

Paper Size A4 * Sets the size of paper to be used by the
A5	Paper Wrinkle Check Mode.
B5
Letter
Folio
Legal
Executive
Envelope #10
Monarch
DL
C5

Plain Thick	Paper Wrinkle Check Mode.
Covers
Covers Thick
Label
Recycled
Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Color

Rear side Off	* Does not use the print side 2 of the paper.
	On Uses the print side 2 of the paper.
Color Mode Color	* Prints in color mode.
	Black & White Prints in monochrome mode.
Start	Click this button to print in the specified paper size, type, and color mode.

Environment Sensor Info

Purpose:

To print the internal environment sensor information of the printer to Result.

Values:

Get Environment Sensor Info

Click this button to confirm the internal environment sensor information of the printer such as temperature and humidity.

Clean Developer

Purpose:

To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.

Values:

Clean Developer

Click Start to stir the toner.

Refresh Mode

Purpose:

To use up a toner cartridge or PHD unit when you need to replace it before the end of its life, or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.

NOTE: Using the Refresh Mode consumes extra toner.

Values:

Toner Refresh Mode	Yellow Click Yellow to clean the yellow cartridge.
	Magenta Click Magenta to clean the magenta cartridge.
	Cyan	Click Cyan to clean the cyan cartridge.
	Black Click Black to clean the black cartridge.
Drum Refresh Mode	Drum	Click Drum to clean the drum.

Resetting Defaults

After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu parameters, except the parameters for the network, are reset to their default values.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Ensure that the Printer Maintenance tab is open.
3 Select Reset Defaults from the list at the left side of the page.

The Reset Defaults page appears.

4 Click System Section button.

The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.

Understanding the Printer Menus

When your printer is connected to a network and available to a number of users, the access to the Admin Menu can be limited. This prevents other users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change a user default that has been set by the administrator.

However, you can use your printer driver to override user defaults and select settings for individual print jobs.

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Report / List

Use the Report/List menu to print various types of reports and lists.

System Settings

Purpose:

To print a list of the current user default values, the installed options, the amount of installed print memory, and the status of printer supplies.

Panel Settings

Purpose:

To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus.

PCL Fonts List

Purpose:

To print a sample of the available PCL fonts.

See also:

"Understanding Fonts", "Printing Font Sample List"

PCL Macro List

Purpose:

To print the information on the downloaded PCL macro.

PDF Fonts List

Purpose:

To print a sample of the available PDF fonts.

Job History

Purpose:

To print a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list contains the last 20 jobs.

Error History

Purpose:

To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.

Print Meter

Purpose:

To print the reports for the total number of pages printed.

Color Test Page

Purpose:

To print a page for testing colors.

Protocol Monitor

Purpose:

To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.

Speed Dial

Purpose:

To print the list of all members stored as speed dial numbers.

Address Book

Purpose:

To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.

Server Address

Purpose:

To print the list of all members stored as Server Address information.

Fax Activity

Purpose:

To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.

Fax Pending

Purpose:

To print the list of status of pending faxes.

Stored Documents

NOTE: Stored Documents feature is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed on the printer and RAM Disk under System Settings is enabled.

Purpose:

To print a list of all files stored for Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print in the RAM disk.

Admin Menu

Use the Admin Menu menu to configure a variety of printer features.

Phone Book

Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings.

Speed Dial

Purpose:

To store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.

Group Dial

Purpose:

To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial code. Up to six group dial codes can be registered.

Print Language

Purpose:

To specify the settings for PCL or PDF.

PCL

Use the PCL menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation printer language.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Paper Tray

Purpose:

To specify the default paper tray.

Values:

Auto*

Tray 1

Tray 2 ^*1

SSF

*1 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.

Paper Size

Purpose:

To specify the default paper size.

Values:

mm series

A4 ^*1

A5

B5

Letter

Folio

Legal

Executive

Envelope #10

Monarch Env.

DL Env.

C5 Env.

Custom Size

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.

inch series

Letter ^*1

Folio

Legal

A4

A5

B5

Executive

Envelope #10

Monarch Env.

DL Env.

C5 Env.

Custom Size

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.

NOTE: Selecting a custom size for the paper size prompts you to enter a custom length and width.

Orientation

Purpose:

To specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.

Values:

Portrait^*	Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper.
Landscape	Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper.

2 Sided

NOTE: 2 Sided print feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Purpose:

To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Values:

2 Sided Print Off * Does not print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
	On Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Binding Edge Flip Long Edge *	Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.
	Flip Short Edge Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.

Font

Purpose:

To specify the default font from the fonts registered in the printer.

Values:

CG Times LetterGothic CourierPS
CG Times It LetterGothic It CourierPS Ob
CG Times Bd LetterGothic Bd CourierPS Bd
CG Times BdIt Albertus Md CourierPS BdOb
Univers Md Albertus XBd SymbolPS
Univers MdIt Clarendon Cd Palatino Roman
Univers Bd Coronet	Palatino It
Univers BdIt	Marigold	Palatino Bd
Univers MdCd	Arial	Palatino BdIt
Univers MdCdIt	Arial It	ITCBookman Lt
Univers BdCd	Arial Bd	ITCBookman LtIt
Univers BdCdIt	Arial BdIt	ITCBookmanDm
AntiqueOlv	Times New	ITCBookmanDm It
AntiqueOlv It	Times New It	HelveticaNr
AntiqueOlv Bd	Times New Bd	HelveticaNr Ob
CG Omega Times New BdIt	HelveticaNr Bd
CG Omega It Symbol	HelveticaNrBdOb
CG Omega Bd Wingdings	N C Schbk Roman
CG Omega BdIt	Line Printer	N C Schbk It
GaramondAntiqua	Times Roman	N C Schbk Bd
Garamond Krsv	Times It	N C Schbk BdIt
Garamond Hlb Times Bd	ITC A G Go Bk
GaramondKrsvHlb	Times BdIt	ITC A G Go BkOb
Courier*	Helvetica	ITC A G Go Dm
Courier It Helvetica Ob ITC A G Go DmOb

Courier Bd

Helvetica Bd ZapfC MdIt

Courier BdIt Helvetica BdOb ZapfDingbats

Symbol Set

Purpose:

To specify a symbol set for a specified font.

Values:

ROMAN-8*	ISO-17 MC TEXT
SYMBOL ISO-21 MS PUB
WIN 3.0 ISO-4 PC-1004
WINBALT ISO-6 PC-775
WINGDINGS ISO-60 PC-8
WIN L1 ISO-69 PC-850
WIN L2 ISO L1 PC-852
WIN L5 ISO L2 PC-8 DN
DESKTOP ISO L5 PC-8 TK
DNGBTSMS	ISO L6 PI FONT
ISO-11	LEGAL PS MATH
ISO-15 MATH-8	PS TEXT

Font Size

Purpose:

To specify the font size for scalable typographic fonts.

Values:

12.00*	Sets the values in increments of 0.25.
4.00 – 50.00

Font size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.

NOTE: The Font Size menu is only displayed for typographic fonts.

See also:

"Pitch and Point Size"

Font Pitch

Purpose:

To specify the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.

Values:

10.00*	Sets the value in increments of 0.01.
6.00–24.00

Font pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters in a horizontal inch of type. For nonscalable mono spaced fonts, the pitch is displayed, but cannot be changed.

NOTE: The Font Pitch menu is only displayed for fixed or mono spaced fonts.

See also:

"Pitch and Point Size"

Form Line

Purpose:

To set the number of lines in a page.

Values:

mm series

64 ^*1 Sets the value in increments of 1.

5-128

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.

inch series

60 ^*1 Sets the value in increments of 1.

5-128

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.

The printer sets the amount of space between each line (vertical line spacing) based on the Form Line and Orientation menu items. Select the correct Form Line and Orientation before changing Form Line.

See also:

"Orientation"

Quantity

Purpose:

To set the default print quantity. (Set the number of copies required for a specific job from the printer driver. Values selected from the printer driver always override values selected from the operator panel.)

Values:

1* Sets the value in increments of 1.

1-999

Image Enhance

Purpose:

To specify whether to enable the Image Enhance feature, which makes the boundary line between black and white smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual appearance.

Values:

Off Disables the Image Enhance feature.

On ^* Enables the Image Enhance feature.

Hex Dump

Purpose:

To help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.

Values:

Disable ^* Disables the Hex Dump feature.

Enable Enables the Hex Dump feature.

Draft Mode

Purpose:

To save toner by printing in the draft mode. The print quality is reduced when printing in the draft mode.

Values:

Disable ^* Does not print in the draft mode.

Enable Prints in the draft mode.

LineTermination

Purpose:

To add the line termination commands.

Values:

Off ^* The line termination command is not added.

$$ \mathrm{CR} = \mathrm{CR}, \mathrm{LF} = \mathrm{LF}, \mathrm{FF} = \mathrm{FF} $$

Add-LF The LF command is added.

$$ \mathrm{CR} = \mathrm{CR} - \mathrm{LF}, \mathrm{LF} = \mathrm{LF}, \mathrm{FF} = \mathrm{FF} $$

Add-CR The CR command is added.

$$ \mathrm{CR} = \mathrm{CR}, \mathrm{LF} = \mathrm{CR} - \mathrm{LF}, \mathrm{FF} = \mathrm{CR} - \mathrm{FF} $$

CR-XX The CR and LF commands are added.

$$ \mathrm{CR} = \mathrm{CR} - \mathrm{LF}, \mathrm{LF} = \mathrm{CR} - \mathrm{LF}, \mathrm{FF} = \mathrm{CR} - \mathrm{FF} $$

Default Color

Purpose:

To specify the color mode to Color or Black. This setting is used for a print job that does not specify a print mode.

Values:

Black ^* Prints in the black and white mode.

Color Prints in the color mode.

PDF

Use the PDF menu to change printer settings that only affect the PDF jobs.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Quantity

Purpose:

To specify the number of copies to print.

Values:

1^*

Sets the value in increments of 1.

1-999

2 Sided Print

NOTE: 2 Sided Print feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Purpose:

To specify whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Value:

1 Sided*

Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.

Long Edge Flip Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.

Short Edge Flip Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.

Print Mode

Purpose:

To specify the print mode.

Value:

Normal*

For documents with normal sized characters.

High Quality For documents with small characters or thin lines, or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.

High Speed Prints with the higher speed than the Normal mode, but the quality is less.

PDF Password

Purpose:

To specify the password to print the secure PDF.

Value:

Enter PDF Password Enter the password to print the secure PDF.

Collated

Purpose:

To specify whether to sort the job.

Value:

Off ^* Does not sort the job.

On Sorts the job.

Output Size

Purpose:

To specify the output paper size for PDF.

Value:

A4^*1

Letter ^*1

Auto

^*1 The default paper size is displayed.

Layout

Purpose:

To specify the output layout.

Value:

Auto %*

100% (No Zoom)

Booklet

2 Pages Up

4 Pages Up

Output Color

Purpose:

To specify the output color.

Value:

Color (Auto)*

Black & White

Network

Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the wired or wireless network.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Ethernet

Purpose:

To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.

Values:

Auto*	Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.
10BASE- T Half Uses 10BASE-T Half-duplex.
10BASE- T Full Uses 10BASE-T Full-duplex.
100BASE- TX Half Uses 100BASE-TX Half-duplex.
100BASE- TX Full Uses 100BASE-TX Full-duplex.
1000BASE- T Full Uses 1000BASE-T Full-duplex.

Wireless Status

NOTE: Wireless Status feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.

Purpose:

To confirm the wireless communication status.

Values:

Connection Good

Acceptable

Low

No Reception

SSID Displays the name that identifies the wireless network.

Encryption Type Displays the encryption type.

Wireless Setup

NOTE: Wireless Setup is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.

Purpose:

To configure the wireless network interface.

Values:

Manual Setup	Enter Network (SSID) Specifies a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
	Infrastructure	Select when you configure the wireless setting through the access point such as a wireless router.
		No Security Specifies No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying a security method from WEP, WPA-PSK-TKIP, and WPA-PSK-AES.
		WEP(64Bit) Specifies the WEP 64bit key to use through the wireless network. Up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
		Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from WEP Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and WEP Key 4.
		WEP(128Bit) Specifies the WEP 128bit key to use through the wireless network. Up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
		Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from WEP Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and WEP Key 4.
		WPA-PSK-TKIP Select to configure the wireless setting with the security method of WPA-PSK-TKIP.
		Pass Phrase Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 only when WPA-PSK-TKIP is selected for Encryption.
		WPA2-PSK-AES Select to configure the wireless setting with the security method of WPA2-PSK-AES.
		Pass Phrase Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 only when WPA-PSK-AES is selected for Encryption.
	Ad-hoc	Select to configure the wireless setting without the access point such as a wireless router.
		No Security Select to configure the wireless setting without specifying the security method from WEP.
		WEP(64Bit) Specifies the WEP 64bit key to use through the wireless network. Up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
		Transmit Key	Specifies the transmit key from WEP Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and WEP Key 4.
		WEP(128Bit) Specifies the WEP 128bit key to use through the wireless network. Up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
	WPS Push	PBC Start Cancel *	Disables the security method of WPS-PBC.
	Button Control
		Start Configures the wireless setting with the security method of WPS-PBC.
	PIN Code	Start Configuration *	Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned automatically by the printer.
		Print PIN Code	Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when entering PIN assigned to the printer into your computer.

Reset Wireless

NOTE: Reset Wireless feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.

Purpose:

To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wireless network settings are reset to their default values.

Values:

Cancel ^* Does not reset the wireless setting.

Start Resets the wireless setting.

TCP/IP

Purpose:

To configure TCP/IP settings.

Values:

IP Mode Dual Stack *

Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.

IPv4 Mode Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.

IPv6 Mode Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.

IPv4 Get IP Address Auto IP * Sets the IP address automatically. A random value in the range of 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255 that is not currently in use on the network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.
	BOOTP Sets the IP address using BOOTP.
	RARP Sets the IP address using RARP.
	DHCP Sets the IP address using DHCP.
	Panel Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the operator panel.
IP Address When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
Subnet Mask When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255. 255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
Gateway Address When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
IPsec Disable *	Disables IPsec.

Protocol

Purpose:

To enable or disable each protocol. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.

Values:

LPD Disable Disables the LPD port.
	Enable* Enables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.
Port9100 Disable Disables the Port9100 port.
	Enable* Enables the Port9100 port.
IPP Disable Disables IPP port.
	Enable* Enables IPP port.
SMB TCP/IP Disable Disables SMB TCP/IP port.
	Enable* Enables SMB TCP/IP port.
SMB NetBEUI Disable Disables SMB Net BEUI port.
	Enable* Enables SMB Net BEUI port.
WSD Disable Disables WSD port.
	Enable* Enables WSD port.
Network TWAIN Disable Disables Network TWAIN.
	Enable* Enables Network TWAIN.
SNMP UDP Disable Disables the SNMP UDP port.
	Enable* Enables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) UDP port.
E-Mail Alert Disable Disables the E-Mail Alert feature.
	Enable* Enables the E-Mail Alert feature.
EWS	Disable Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.
	Enable* Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.
Bonjour(mDNS)	Disable Disables Bonjour (mDNS).
	Enable* Enables Bonjour (mDNS).
Telnet	Disable Disables Telnet.
	Enable* Enables Telnet.
Update Addr Book	Disable Disables Update Address Book.
	Enable* Enables Update Address Book.
LLTD	Disable Disables LLTD.
	Enable* Enables LLTD.

HTTP-SSL/TLS Disable Disables HTTP-SSL/TLS.

Enable ^* Enables HTTP-SSL/TLS.

IP Filter

NOTE: IP Filter feature is available only for LPD or Port9100.

Purpose:

To block data received from certain IP addresses through the wired or wireless network. You can set up to five IP addresses. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.

Values:

No. n / Address (n is 1–5.)	Sets the IP address for Filter n.
No. n / Mask (n is 1–5.)	Sets the address mask for Filter n.
No. n / Mode (n is 1–5.) Off*	Disables the IP Filter feature for Filter n.
	Accept Accepts an access from the specified IP address.
	Reject Rejects an access from the specified IP address.

IEEE 802.1x

NOTE: IEEE 802.1x feature is available only when the printer is connected using LAN cable and it is available only when the IEEE 802.1 authentication is enabled.

Purpose:

To disable IEEE 802.1x authentication. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.

Values:

Disable Disables IEEE 802.1x.

Reset LAN

Purpose:

To initialize wired network data stored in non-volatile memory (NVM). After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wired network settings are reset to their default values.

Values:

Yes	Initializes the wired network data stored in NVM.
No*	Does not initialize the wired network data stored in NVM.

Fax Settings

Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Receive Mode

Purpose:

To select the default fax receiving mode.

Values:

Telephone	Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external phone and then pressing the remote receive code, or by setting OnHook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine) and then pressing ▷.
Fax*	Automatically receives faxes.
Telephone/Fax	When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Rec Tel/Fax, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
Ans Machine/Fax	The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not supported.
DRPD	Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.

Auto Rec Fax

Purpose:

To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.

Values:

0*	Sets the value in increments of 1 second.
0-255

Auto Rec Tel/Fax

Purpose:

To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.

Values:

6*	Sets the interval in increments of 1 second.
0-255

Auto Rec Ans/Fax

Purpose:

To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.

Values:

21*	Sets the interval in increments of 1 second.
0-255

Line Monitor

Purpose:

To set the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.

Values:

Off Turns off the volume of the line monitor.

Low Sets the volume of the line monitor to Low.

Medium ^* Sets the volume of the line monitor to Medium.

High Sets the volume of the line monitor to High.

Ring Tone Volume

Purpose:

To set the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.

Values:

Off Turns off the volume of the ring tone.

Low Sets the volume of the ring tone to Low.

Medium Sets the volume of the ring tone to Medium.

High ^* Sets the volume of the ring tone to High.

Line Type

Purpose:

To select the default line type.

Values:

PSTN ^* Uses PSTN.

PBX Uses PBX.

Tone/Pulse

Purpose:

To select the dialing type.

Values:

Tone*	Uses tone dialing.
Pulse (10PPS)	Sets "DP (10PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 10 Pulse Per Second) as the dial type.
Pulse (20PPS)	Sets "DP (20PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 20 Pulse Per Second) as the dial type.

Resend Delay

Purpose:

To specify the interval between re-send attempts.

Values:

8*	Sets the interval in increments of 1 second.
3-255

Redial Attempts

Purpose:

To specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy within the range of 0 to 13. If you enter 0, the printer will not redial.

Values:

3*	Sets the number of redial attempts in increments of 1.
0-13

Redial Delay

Purpose:

To specify the interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15 minutes.

Values:

1^*	Sets the interval in increments of 1 minute.
1-15

Junk Fax Setup

Purpose:

To reject unwanted faxes by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.

Values:

Off ^* Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

On Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

Remote Receive

Purpose:

To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone.

Values:

Off*	Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.
On	Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.

Remote Rcv Tone

Purpose:

To specify the tone in two digits to start Remote Receive.

Fax Header

Purpose:

To print the information of the sender on the header of the faxes.

Values:

Off Does not print the sender's information on the header of faxes.

On ^* Prints the sender's information on the header of faxes.

NOTE: If United States is selected for the setting of Country, this option does not appear on the menu. The setting is fixed to On and cannot be changed. For information on the country setting, see "Setting Your Country."

Fax Header Name

Purpose:

To set the sender name to be printed on the header on faxes.

Fax Number

Purpose:

To set the fax number of the printer, which will be printed on the header of a fax message.

NOTE: Ensure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup.

Fax Cover Page

Purpose:

To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

Values:

Off ^* Does not attach a cover page to faxes.

On Attaches a cover page to faxes.

DRPD Pattern

Purpose:

To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.

Values:

Pattern1-7

DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD Patterns are specified by your telephone company. The patterns provided with your printer are shown below:

Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service. For example, Pattern 7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400 ms, stops for 800 ms, rings for 400 ms and stops for 1400 ms. This pattern is repeated over and over again. This printer only responds to Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.

Duplex Print

NOTE: Duplex Print feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

To set the duplex printing for fax.

Values:

Off* Does not perform duplex printing.

On Performs duplex printing.

Sent Fax Fwd

Purpose:

To set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Values:

Off*	Does not forward incoming faxes.
Forward Forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination. Prints incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
Print and Forward Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified destination.

Fax Fwd Number

Purpose:

To enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.

Prefix Dial

Purpose:

To select whether to set a prefix dial number.

Values:

Off*	Does not set a prefix dial number.
On Sets a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Num

Purpose:

To set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).

Discard Size

Purpose:

To set the printer to discard images or any text at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit the output paper.

Values:

Off*	Prints excess images or text at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.
On Discards any excess images or text.
Auto Reduction	Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the appropriate paper size.

ECM

Purpose:

To set whether to enable or disable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.

Values:

Off Disables the ECM.
On*	Enables the ECM.

Modem Speed

Purpose:

To adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.

Values:

2.4 Kbps

4.8 Kbps

9.6 Kbps

14.4 Kbps

33.6 Kbps*

Country

Purpose:

To select the country where the printer is used.

Values:

Algeria Hungary Puerto Rico
Australia Iceland Romania
Austria Ireland Russia
Belgium Italy Saudi Arabia
Bulgaria Jamaica Slovakia
Canada Jordan Slovenia
Colombia Latvia South Africa
Costa Rica Liechtenstein Spain
Cyprus Lithuania	Sweden
Czech Republic	Luxembourg	Switzerland
Denmark	Malta	Tunisia
Dominican Republic	Mexico	Turkey
Egypt	Netherlands	U.A.E.
Estonia New Zealand	United Kingdom
Finland Nicaragua	United States
France	Norway	Unknown*
Germany	Panama
Greece	Poland
Guatemala	Portugal

Fax Activity

Purpose:

To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.

Values:

Auto Print*	Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
No Auto Print	Does not automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.

Fax Transmit

Purpose:

To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.

Values:

Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error*	Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable	Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.

Fax Broadcast

Purpose:

To set whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.

Values:

Print Always*	Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error	Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable	Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.

Fax Protocol

Purpose:

To set whether to print the protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the cause of a communication problem.

Values:

Print Always	Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error	Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable*	Does not print the protocol monitor report.

System Settings

Use System Settings to configure the power saving mode, warning tones, time-out duration, device display language, and job log auto print settings.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Power Saver Timer

Purpose:

To specify the time for transition to power saver mode.

Values:

Sleep 3min	*	Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes a job.
	1–30 min.
Deep Sleep	10min *	Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it has entered Sleep mode.
	5–60 min.

Enter 3 to put the printer in power saver mode 3 minutes after it finishes a job. This uses much less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Enter 3 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.

Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a value between 1 and 30 minutes for power save mode if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.

The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives data from the computer or remote fax machine. You can also change the status of the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.

Power Saver Wake Up

Purpose:

To specify whether to wake up from the Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is set to Off.

Values:

OffHook Wake Up Off *	Does not wake up from the Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is set to Off.
On Wakes up from the Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when OnHook is set to Off.

Auto Reset

Purpose:

To automatically reset the settings for COPY, SCAN, or FAX to the default settings and return to the standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the specified time.

Values:

To specify the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally. The print job is cancelled if the time-out time is exceeded.

Values:

Off Disables the fault time-out.
On*	60sec*	Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally.
	3-300 sec.

Job Time-out

Purpose:

To specify the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print job is cancelled if the time-out time is exceeded.

Values:

Off Disables the job time-out.
On*	30sec*	Sets the time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.
	5–300 sec.

Date & Time

Purpose:

To specify the date and time formats.

Values:

Set Date & Time	Time Zone	Sets the time zone.
	Set Date Sets the date depending on the Date Format settings.
	Set Time Sets the time.
Date Format Sets the date format.
Time Format 12H Sets the time in 12-hour format.
	24H*	Sets the time in 24-hour format.

Audio Tone

Purpose:

To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message appears.

Values:

Control Panel Off	* Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.
	Soft	Emits a tone when the operator panel input is correct.
	Normal
	Loud
Invalid Key Off	*	Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.
	Soft	Emits a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.
	Normal
	Loud
Machine Ready	Off Does not emit a tone when the printer is ready to process a job.
	Soft	Emits a tone when the printer is ready to process a job.
	Normal*
	Loud
Copy Completed	Off	Does not emit a tone when a copy job is complete.
	Soft Emits a tone when a copy job is complete.
	Normal*
	Loud
Job Completed	Off	Does not emit a tone when a job other than a copy job is complete.
	Soft Emits a tone when a job other than a copy job is complete.
	Normal*	complete.
	Loud
Fault Tone Off	Does not emit a tone when a job ends abnormally.
	Soft Emits a tone when a job ends abnormally.
	Normal*
	Loud
Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.
	Soft Emits a tone when a problem occurs.
	Normal*
	Loud
Out of Paper Off Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
	Soft Emits a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
	Normal*
	Loud
Low Toner Alert Off Does not emit a tone when a toner is low.
	Soft Emits a tone when a toner is low.
	Normal*
	Loud
Auto Clear Alert Off * Does not emit a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.
	Soft Emits a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.
	Normal
	Loud
Base Tone Off * Does not emit a tone when the operator panel display is returned to the default setting by scrolling the loop menu.
	Soft Emits a tone when the operator panel display is returned to the default setting by scrolling the loop menu.
	Normal
	Loud
All Tones	Soft Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once.
	Normal*
	Loud
	Off Disables all the alert tones.

mm / inch

Purpose:

To specify the default measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.

Values:

Millimeters (mm) ^* Selects millimeter as the default measurement unit.

Inches (") Selects inch as the default measurement unit.

NOTE: The default for mm/inch varies depending on other settings, such as Country and Document Size.

Default Print Paper Size

Purpose:

To specify the default paper size.

Values:

mm series

A4*1

Letter

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.

inch series

A4

Letter ^*1

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.

Auto Log Print

Purpose:

To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.

Values:

Off*	Does not automatically print a job history report.
On	Automatically prints a job history report.

Print logs can also be printed using the Admin Reports menu.

Print ID

Purpose:

To specify a location where the user ID is printed.

Values:

Off*	Does not print the user ID.
Top Left Prints the user ID on the top left of the page.
Top Right Prints the user ID on the top right of the page.
Bottom Left Prints the user ID on the bottom left of the page.
Bottom Right Prints the user ID on the bottom right of the page.

NOTE: When printing on DL size paper, a part of the user ID may not be printed correctly.

Print Text

Purpose:

To specify whether the printer outputs PDL data, which is not supported by the printer, as text when the printer receives it. Text data is printed on A4 or Letter size paper.

Values:

Off Does not print the received data.
On*	Prints the received data as text data.

Banner Sheet

NOTE: Banner Sheet feature is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed to Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Purpose:

To specify the position of banner sheet, and also specify the tray in which the banner sheet is loaded.

Values:

Insert Position Off *	Does not print the banner sheet.
Front Inserted before the first page of every copy.
Back Inserted after the last page of every copy.
Front & Back Inserted before the first page of every copy and after the last page of every copy.
Specify Tray Tray 1 *	The banner sheet is loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 2 The banner sheet is loaded in the optional 250-sheet feeder.

RAM Disk

NOTE: RAM Disk feature is available only when the optional 512 MB memory module is installed on the printer.

Purpose:

To allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for the Secure Print, Mailbox Print, and Proof Print features. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.

Values:

Disable Does not allocate memory to the RAM disk file system. Secure Print and Proof Print jobs will abort and be recorded to the job log.
Enable*	300MB*	Sets the allocation of memory to the RAM disk file system in increments of 50 MB.
	50-500MB

NOTE: Restart your printer when you change the settings for the RAM Disk menu.

Substitute Tray

Purpose:

Specifies whether to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.

Values:

Off No tray size substitute accepted.
Larger Size	Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no larger paper size, the printer substitutes paper of nearest size.
Nearest Size*	Substitutes paper of nearest size.

Set Available Time

Purpose:

Sets the available time for the Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax services.

Values:

Off* Does not set the time when printing is available.
On Sets the time when printing is available.
	Start Time Sets the start time of the available time.
	End Time Sets the end time of the available time.
	Recurrence Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.

NOTE: Set Available Time can be configured when Print, Copy, Scan, or Fax is set to On.

Secure Job Expiration

NOTE: Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to Enable.

Purpose:

To specify the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.

Values:

Expiration Mode Off *	Does not set the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
On Sets the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.

Expiration Time Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.

Recurrence Daily Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAN disk daily.
	Weekly* Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk weekly.
	Monthly Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print monthly.
Weekly Settings Monday Sets the day of the week to delete the files stored as Secure Print.
	Tuesday
	Wednesday
	Thursday
	Friday
	Saturday
	Sunday*
Monthly Settings 1 Day *	Sets the day of the month to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
	2-28 Day

ColorTrack Mode

Purpose:

To specify who has access to color printing.

Values:

Off*	Does not limit access to color printing.
On Limits access to color printing.

No Account User Print

Purpose:

To specify whether to permit the printing of data without authentication information.

Values:

Off*	Does not permit non-account user to print the data.
On *1	Permits non-account user to print the data.
*1	Set No Account User Password using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Color Track Error Rep

Purpose:

To specify whether to automatically print error-related information if printing with ColorTrack results in an error.

Values:

Off*	Does not print the error report when printing with Color Track results in an error.
On	Prints the error report when printing with Color Track results in an error.

Letterhead Duplex Mode

NOTE: Letterhead Duplex Mode feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Purpose:

To specify whether to print on both sides when using letterhead.

Values:

Disable ^* Does not print on both sides of letterhead.

Enable Prints on both sides of letterhead.

Low Toner Alert Msg

Purpose:

To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.

Values:

Off Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.

On ^* Shows the alert message when the toner is low.

Email From Field

Purpose:

To specify whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E-mail.

Values:

Disable Disables editing of the transmission source.

Enable* Enables editing of the transmission source.

Server Address Book

Purpose:

To specify whether to search the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.

Values:

Off* Does not search the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.

On Searches the e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.

NOTE: You can search the e-mail addresses only from the Address Book that is local when Server Address Book is set to Off.

Server Phone Book

Purpose:

To specify whether to search the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server.

Values:

Off* Does not search the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server.

On Searches the phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server.

NOTE: You can search the phone numbers only from the local Phone Book when Server Phone Book is set to Off.

Power on Wizard

Purpose:

To perform initial setup for the printer.

Values:

Yes Performs the initial setup for the printer.

No ^* Does not perform the initial setup for the printer.

Maintenance

Use the Maintenance menu to initialize the NV (non-volatile) memory, configure the plain paper quality adjustment settings, and configure the security settings.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

F/W Version

Purpose:

To confirm the current F/W version.

Service Tag

Purpose:

To confirm the service tag.

Express Code

Purpose:

To confirm the express service code.

Paper Density

Purpose:

To specify paper density settings.

Values:

Plain Light

Normal*

Label Light

Normal*

Adjust BTR

NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.

Purpose:

To specify the transfer roller voltage adjustment for each paper type.

Values:

Plain 0	*	Sets the transfer roller voltage in increments of 1. The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
	-6 to +6
Plain Thick 0	*
	-6 to +6
Covers 0	*
	-6 to +6
Covers Thick 0	*
	-6 to +6
Label 0	*
	-6 to +6
Coated 0	*
	-6 to +6
Coated Thick 0	*
	-6 to +6
Envelope 0	*
	-6 to +6
Recycled 0	*
	-6 to +6

Adjust Fuser

NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.

Purpose:

To adjust the fuser temperature setting for each paper type.

Values:

Plain 0	*	Sets the fuser temperature in increments of 1. The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types.When the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
	-6 to +6
Plain Thick 0	*
	-6 to +6
Covers 0	*
	-6 to +6
Covers Thick 0	*
	-6 to +6
Label 0	*
	-6 to +6
Coated 0	*
	-6 to +6
Coated Thick 0	*
	-6 to +6
Envelope 0	*
	-6 to +6
Recycled 0	*
	-6 to +6

Auto Reg Adjust

Purpose:

To specify whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.

Values:

Off Does not automatically perform color registration adjustment.
On*	Automatically performs color registration adjustment.

Color Reg Adjust

Purpose:

To manually perform color registration adjustment.

Manual Color Registration Adjustments are required when the printer is initially installed and after the printer is moved.

NOTE: The Color Reg Adjust feature can be configured when Auto Reg Adjust is set to Off.

Values:

Auto Correct	Yes	Automatically performs color registration correction.
	No*	Does not perform color registration correction.
Color Reg Chart	YesPrints a color registration chart. The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow, magenta, and cyan lines. On the chart, find the values on the right side that are next to the line that is perfectly straight for each of the three colors. If the value for this line is 0, color registration adjustment is not required. If the value for this line is any value other than 0, specify the adjustment values under Lateral Adjustment and Process Adjustment.
	No*	Does not print a color registration chart.
Enter Number	LY	-9 to +9	Sets lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) and process (paper feed direction) color adjustment values individually for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan. Enter a number in order of lateral adjustment (left), lateral adjustment (right), and process adjustment. Press the √(Set) button to save all the settings.
	LM
	LC
	RY -9 to +9
	RM
	RC
	PY -9 to +9
	PM
	PC

NOTE: Ensure that you remove the paper from the single sheet feeder before performing Auto Correct.

Clean Developer

Purpose:

To stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.

Values:

YesStirs the toner in a new toner cartridge.

No^* Does not stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.

Toner Refresh

Purpose:

To clean the toner in each toner cartridge.

Values:

Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black Yes Cleans the toner in the selected toner cartridge.

No^* Does not clean the toner in each toner cartridge.

Drum Refresh

Purpose:

To clean the surface of the PHD unit.

Values:

YesCleans the surface of the PHD unit.

No ^* Does not clean the surface of the PHD unit.

Reset Defaults

Purpose:

To initialize the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu parameters are reset to their default values.

Values:

User Fax Section	Yes	Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book.
	No*	Does not initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book.
User Scan Section	Yes	Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.
	No*	Does not initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.

System Section Yes Initializes the system parameters.

No ^* Does not initialize the system parameters.

Init Print Meter

Purpose:

To initialize the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter count is reset to zero.

Clear Storage

NOTE: Clear Storage feature is available only when the additional 512 MB memory module is installed.

Purpose:

To clear all files stored as Secure Print, Mailbox Print, Proof Print, and Stored Print in the RAM disk.

Values:

All Clear	Deletes all files stored as Secure Print, Mailbox Print, and Proof Print in the RAM disk.
Secure Document	Deletes all files stored as Secure Print and Mailbox Print in the RAM disk.
Stored Document	Deletes all files stored as Stored Print in the RAM disk.

Non-DELL Toner

Purpose:

To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

NOTICE: Using a non-Dell toner cartridge may severely damage your printer. The warranty does not cover damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.

Values:

Off*	Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
On	Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Adjust Altitude

Purpose:

To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.

NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner, etc.

Values:

0m*	Sets the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
1000m
2000m
3000m

Secure Settings

Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the menus. This prevents items from being changed accidentally.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

See also:

"Panel Lock"

Panel Lock

Purpose:

To set a limited access to Admin Menu with a password, and to set or change the password.

Values:

Panel Lock Set Disable	*	Disables password protection for Admin Menu.
	Enable	Enables password protection for Admin Menu.
Change Password*1	0000–9999	Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Menu.

*1 This item is available only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.

Function Enabled

NOTE: Function Enabled feature is available only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.

Purpose:

To specify whether to enable or disable each of the printer services, or to require a password to use the services.

Values:

Copy On	*	Enables the Copy service.
	On (Password)	Enables the Copy service, but requires a password to use the service.
	On (Color Password)	Enables the Copy service with a color mode, but requires a password.
	Off Disables the Copy service.
Fax On	*	Enables the Fax service.
	On (Password)	Enables the Fax services, but requires a password to send faxes (does not require a password to receive incoming faxes).
	Off	Disables the Fax service (the printer will not send or receive faxes).
Scan On	*	Enables the Scan service.
	On (Password)	Enables the Scan service, but requires a password to use the service.
	Off Disables the Scan service.
Print from USB On	*	Enables the Print from USB service.
	On (Password)	Enables the Print from USB service, but requires a password.
	On (Color Password)	Enables the Print from USB service with a color mode, but requires a password.
	Off Disables the Print from USB service.
Change Password*1		Changes the password that is set under the Function Enabled menu.

*1 This item is available only when On (Password) or On (Color Password) is enabled.

Secure Receive

NOTE: Secure Receive feature is available only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.

Purpose:

To specify whether to require a password to receive faxes, and to set or change the password.

Values:

Secure Receive Set Disable * Does not require a password to receive faxes.
	Enable Requires a password to receive faxes.
Change Password*1 0000–9999 Sets or changes the password required to receive faxes.
*1 This item is available only when Secure Receive Set is set to Enable.

Login Error

NOTE: Login Error feature is available only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.

Purpose:

To specify the number of error entry attempts allowed when you log in as an administrator in the Admin Menu and Report/List menu.

Values:

Off*	Does not allow an administrator to log in after one error entry attempt.
On 5 Sets the number of error entry attempts allowed when an administrator 1-10 logs in.

USB Settings

Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.

USB Port

Purpose:

To specify whether to enable the USB port. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.

Values:

Disable Disables the USB interface.

Enable ^* Enables the USB interface.

Defaults Settings

Use Defaults Settings to modify the COPY, SCAN, or FAX menu defaults.

Copy Defaults

Purpose:

To modify the COPY menu defaults.

Copy Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the COPY menu.

Color

Purpose:

To select color or black and white copying.

Values:

Black & White Prints in black and white mode.

Color ^* Prints in color mode.

Auto Expo. Level

Purpose:

To specify the default background suppression level.

Values:

Normal*	Sets the background suppression level to Normal.
Higher (1)	Sets the background suppression level to Higher (1).
Higher (2)	Sets the background suppression level to Higher (2).

Color Balance

Purpose:

To specify the default color balance level within the range of -3 to +3.

Values:

Yellow Low Dens. 0	*	Sets the color balance level of low density yellow.
	-3 to +3
Yellow Med. Dens. 0	*	Sets the color balance level of medium density yellow.
	-3 to +3
Yellow High Dens. 0	*	Sets the color balance level of high density yellow.
	-3 to +3
Magen. Low Dens. 0	*	Sets the color balance level of low density magenta.
	-3 to +3
Magen Med. Dens. 0	*	Sets the color balance level of medium density magenta.
	-3 to +3
Magen High Dens. 0	*	Sets the color balance level of high density magenta.
	-3 to +3
Cyan Low Dens. 0	*	Sets the color balance level of low density cyan.
	-3 to +3
Cyan Med. Dens. 0	*	Sets the color balance level of medium density cyan.
	-3 to +3
Cyan High Dens. 0	*	Sets the color balance level of high density cyan.
	-3 to +3
Black Low Dens.	0*	Sets the color balance level of low density black.
	-3 to +3
Black Med. Dens.	0*	Sets the color balance level of medium density black.
	-3 to +3
Black High Dens. 0	*	Sets the color balance level of high density black.
	-3 to +3

Scan Defaults

To modify the SCAN menu defaults.

Scan Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the SCAN menu.

Color

Purpose:

To specify whether to print in color or black and white.

Values:

Color Black & White *	Prints in black and white.
Color Prints in color.

Color Button Set

Purpose:

To specify the default background suppression level.

Values:

B&W Button Black & White *	Sets whether to scan in black and white when Black & White is selected for a color mode.
GrayScale	Sets whether to scan in gray scale when Black & White is selected for a color mode.
Color Button Color *	Sets whether to scan in color when Color is selected for a color mode.
Color (Photo) Sets whether to scan in color (Photo) when Color is selected for a color mode. This is suitable for photographic images.

Auto Expo. Level

Purpose:

To specify the default background suppression level.

Values:

Normal*	Sets the background suppression level to Normal.
Higher (1)	Sets the background suppression level to Higher (1).
Higher (2)	Sets the background suppression level to Higher (2).

TIFF File Format

Purpose:

To specify the default TIFF file format.

Values:

TIFF V6* Sets the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6.

TTN2 Sets the default Tiff file format to TTN2.

Image Compression

Purpose:

To specify the image compression level.

Values:

High Sets the image compression level to High.

Medium* Sets the image compression level to Medium.

Low Sets the image compression level to Low.

Max Email Size

Purpose:

To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.

Values:

2048 KB*	Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, in increments of 1.
50-16384

Fax Defaults

Purpose:

To modify the Fax menu defaults. See "Fax Menu" for more details.

Print from USB Defaults

To modify the defaults for the Print from USB Defaults menu.

Print from USB Defaults allows you to configure the following items in addition to the items under the Print from USB menu.

Color

Purpose:

To specify whether to print in black and white or in color.

Values:

Black & White Prints in black and white.

Color*

Prints in color.

Tray Settings

Use the Tray Settings menu to define the print media loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray and the optional 250-sheet feeder.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Tray 1

Purpose:

To specify the paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.

Values:

Paper Size	A4*1
mm series	A5
	B5
	Letter
	Folio
	Legal
	Executive
	Envelope #10
	Monarch Env.
	Monarch Env. L
	DL Env.
	DL Env. L
	C5 Env.
	Custom Size
inch series Letter	*1
	Folio
	Legal
	A4
	A5
	B5
	Executive
	Envelope #10
	Monarch Env.
	Monarch Env. L
	DL Env.
	DL Env. L
	C5 Env.
	Custom Size
Paper Type Plain *
	Plain Thick
	Covers
	Covers Thick
	Label
	Envelope
	Recycled
	Letterhead
	Preprinted
	Prepunched
	Color
	Plain S2
	Plain Thick S2
	Recycled S2
	Color S2

Display Popup Off Does not display a popup

	message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
On*	Displays a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.

^*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.

NOTE: For more information on supported paper sizes, see "Supported Paper Sizes."

Tray 2

NOTE: Tray 2 feature is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.

Purpose:

To specify the paper loaded in the optional 250-sheet feeder.

Values:

Paper Size	A4*1
mm series	A5
	B5
	Letter
	Folio
	Legal
	Executive
inch series Letter	*1
	Folio
	Legal
	A4
	A5
	B5
	Executive
Paper Type Plain	*
	Plain Thick
	Recycled
	Letterhead
	Preprinted
	Prepunched
	Color
	Plain S2
	Plain Thick S2
	Recycled S2
	Color S2
Display Popup Off Does not display a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the standard 250-sheet feeder.
On*	Displays a popup message that prompts to set Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the standard 250-sheet feeder.

^*1 Denotes country-specific factory default value.

Panel Language

Purpose:

To determine the language of the text on the operator panel screen.

Values:

English*

Français

Italiano

Deutsch

Español

Dansk

Nederlands

Norsk

Svenska

Print Menu

Use the Print Menu to print a job using the Secure Print, Private Mail Box, Public Mail Box, and Proof Print features.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Secure Print

NOTE: Secure Print feature is available only when RAM disk is set to Enable.

Purpose:

To print confidential jobs. The printer can hold the job in memory until you arrive at the printer and type the password on the operator panel.

Values:

Select User ID Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.
All Documents*1	Print and Delete	Deletes all documents from print memory after printing them.
	Delete Deletes all documents from print memory.
document n*2	Print and Delete	Deletes the specified document from print memory after printing it.
	Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.
*1 This item is available only when the multiple print jobs are stored.*2 The document name is displayed. The save date and time are displayed if the document name is not specified.

Private Mail Box

NOTE: Private Mail Box feature is available only when RAM disk is set to Enable.

Purpose:

To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Private Mail Box.

Values:

Select User ID Enter the password you specified on the printer driver.
All Documents*1	Print and Delete	Deletes all documents from print memory after printing them.
	Print Prints all documents and saves them in memory.
	Delete Deletes all documents from print memory.
document n*2	Print and Delete	Deletes the specified document from print memory after printing it.
	Print Prints the specified document and saves it in memory.
	Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.

^*1 This item is available only when the multiple print jobs are stored.
*2 The document name is displayed. The save date and time are displayed if the document name is not specified.

Public Mail Box

NOTE: Public Mail Box feature is available only when RAM disk is set to Enable.

Purpose:

To specify whether and how to print the job stored in the Public Mail Box.

Values:

Select User ID All Documents*1	Print and Delete	Deletes all documents from print memory after printing them.
	Print Prints all documents and saves them in memory.
	Delete Deletes all documents from print memory.
document n*2	Print and Delete	Deletes the specified document from print memory after printing it.
	Print Prints the specified document and saves it in memory.
	Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.
*1 This item is available only when the multiple print jobs are stored.*2 The document name is displayed. The save date and time are displayed if the document name is not specified.

Proof Print

NOTE: Proof Print feature is available only when RAM disk is set to Enable.

Purpose:

To print only one copy and check the print result before printing all of the copies. This prevents a large number of misprinted copies from being printed at one time.

Values:

Select User ID All Documents*1	Print and Delete	Deletes all documents from print memory after printing them.
	Print Prints all documents and save them in memory.
	Delete Deletes all documents from print memory.
document n*2	Print and Delete	Deletes the specified document from print memory after printing it.
	Print Prints the specified document and save it in memory.
	Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.
*1 This item is available only when the multiple print jobs are stored.*2 The document name is displayed. The save date and time are displayed if the document name is not specified.

Secure Receive

NOTE: Before enabling Secure Receive, ensure that Panel Lock Set is enabled.

Purpose:

To specify whether to require a password to receive faxes, and to set or change the password.

Values:

Password Enters the password to access the confidential job.

Copy Menu

Use the COPY menus to configure a variety of copy features.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Select Tray

Purpose:

To specify the input tray.

Values:

Tray1*	The paper is fed from the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray2*1	The paper is fed from the optional 250-sheet feeder.
SSF The paper is fed from the single sheet feeder.
*1 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.

SSF Paper Size

NOTE: SSF Paper Size feature is available only when print media is inserted in the single sheet feeder.

Purpose:

To specify the default paper size of the single sheet feeder.

Values:

mm series

A4*1

A5

B5

Letter

Folio

Legal

Executive

Envelope #10

Monarch Env.

DL Env.

C5 Env.

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.

inch series

Letter ^*1

Folio

Legal

A4

A5

B5

Executive

Envelope #10

Monarch Env.

DL Env.

C5 Env.

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.

SSF Paper Type

NOTE: SSF Paper Type feature is available only when print media is inserted in the single sheet feeder.

Purpose:

To specify the default paper type of the single sheet feeder.

Values:

Plain*

Plain Thick

Covers

Covers Thick

Coated

Coated Thick

Envelope

Recycled

Letterhead

Preprinted

Prepunched

Color

Plain S2

Plain Thick S2

Recycled S2

Color S2

Collated

Purpose:

To sort the copy job. For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete set of three page documents is printed one by one.

Values:

Off Does not sort a copy job.
On Sorts a copy job.
Auto^*	Automatically sorts a copy job only when you use the ADF.

Reduce/Enlarge

Purpose:

To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image.

Values:

mm series

Custom 100%

50%

A4→A5 (70%)

B5→A5 (81%)

100%*

A5→B5 (122%)

A5→A4 (141%)

200%

inch series

Custom 100%

50%

Ldgr→Ltr (64%)

Lgl→Ltr (78%)

100%*

Stmt→Ltr (129%)

Stmt→Lgl (154%)

200%

NOTE: You can set the value in a percentage for Custom.

Document Size

Purpose:

To specify the default document size.

Values:

mm series

Auto ^*1

A4

A5

B5

Letter

Folio

Legal

Executive

inch series

Auto ^*1

Letter

Folio

Legal

A4

A5

B5

Executive

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.

NOTE: When Auto is selected, the printer assumes that the document size is the size of the print media loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray or single sheet feeder.

Original Type

Purpose:

To improve the image quality by selecting the type of the original document.

Values:

Text Used for documents with text.

Text & Photo ^* Used for documents with both text and photos.

Photo Used for documents with photos.

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:

To make the copy lighter or darker than the original.

Values:

Lighter3 Works well with dark print.

Lighter2

Lighter1

Normal ^* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1 Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Darker3

Sharpness

Purpose:

To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.

Values:

Sharper Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Normal* Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.

Softer Makes the copy softer than the original.

Color Saturation

Purpose:

To adjust the amount of colors to make the colors darker or lighter than the original.

Values:

High Increases the color saturation to brighten the color of the copy.

Normal ^* The color saturation is the same as the original.

Low Decreases the color saturation to lighten the color of the copy.

Auto Exposure

Purpose:

To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.

Values:

Off Does not suppress the background.

On ^* Suppresses the background to enhance text.

2Sided

Purpose:

To specify whether to make duplex copy and select the binding position.

Values:

1 -> 1Sided*	Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.
Long Edge Binding	Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.
Short Edge Binding	Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.

Multiple-Up

Purpose:

To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.

Values:

Off*	Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto	Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
ID Copy	Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.
Manual	Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.

Margin Top/Bottom

Purpose:

To specify the top and bottom margins of the copy.

Values:

0.2 inch* (4 mm*) Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

0.0–2.0 inch (0–50 mm)

Margin Left/Right

Purpose:

To specify the left and right margins of the copy.

Values:

0.2 inch ^ (4 mm ^ ) Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

0.0–2.0 inch

(0–50 mm)

Margin Middle

Purpose:

To specify the middle margin of the copy.

Values:

0.0 inch ^ (0 mm ^ ) Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

0.0–2.0 inch (0–50 mm)

Scan Menu

Use the SCAN menus to configure a variety of scanner features.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Scan to USB Memory

Save to

Purpose:

To save the scanned image to a USB memory attached to the printer.

Values:

Save to Saves the scanned image to root or folders in a USB memory.

Scan to E-Mail

Email to

Purpose:

To specify the recipient of the e-mail to attach the scanned image.

Values:

Recipient Keypad Enters an e-mail address using a keypad.
Address Book Searches an e-mail address from the Address Book.
Email Group Searches an e-mail address from the Email Group in the Address Book.
Search Local Address Book	Searches an e-mail address from the Local Address Book.
Search Server Address Book	Searches an e-mail address from the Server Address Book.

From Setting

Purpose:

To specify the sender of the e-mail.

Values:

Keypad Enters an e-mail address using a keypad.

Local Address Book Searches an e-mail address from the Local Address Book.

Server Address Book Searches an e-mail address from the Server Address Book.

Scan to Network

Scan to

Purpose:

To store the scanned image on a network server or a computer.

Values:

Network (Computer)	Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.
Network (Server)	Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.
Search Address Book	Searches for a server address and specifies it as the transfer destination.

Scan to Application

Purpose:

To save scanned data on a computer.

The Scan to Application feature allows you to import scanned data from the printer to a computer connected via a USB cable. The computer must have ScanButton Manager installed to receive the data.

File Format

Purpose:

To specify the file format to save the scanned image.

Values:

PDF*

MultiPageTIFF

TIFF

JPEG

Color Mode

Purpose:

To select color or black and white scanning.

Values:

Black & White Scans in black and white mode. Works well with texts.
GrayScale	Scans in grayscale mode. Works well with texts and photos.
Color*	Scans in color mode. Works well with texts and photos.
Color (Photo)	Scans in color mode. Works well with photos.

Resolution

Purpose:

To specify the resolution of the scanned image.

Values:

200 x 200 dpi ^*

300 x 300 dpi

400 x 400 dpi

600 x 600 dpi

Document Size

Purpose:

To specify the default paper size.

Values:

mm series

A4*

A5

B5

Letter

Folio

Legal

Executive

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.

inch series

Letter*

Folio

Legal

A4

A5

B5

Executive

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:

To adjust the density to make the scanned image lighter or darker than the original.

Values:

Lighter3 Works well with dark print.

Lighter2

Lighter1

Normal ^* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1 Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Darker3

Sharpness

Purpose:

To adjust the sharpness to make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.

Values:

Sharper Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.

Normal* Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.

Softer Makes the scanned image softer than the original.

Contrast

Purpose:

To adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original.

Values:

High Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker than the original.

Medium*	Does not adjust the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors darker or lighter than the original.
Low Adjusts the amount of colors to make the contrast of colors lighter than the original.

Auto Exposure

Purpose:

To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.

Values:

Off Does not suppress the background.

On ^* Suppresses the background to enhance text.

Margin Top/Bottom

Purpose:

To specify the top and bottom margins of the scanned image.

Values:

0.1 inch ^ (2 mm ^ ) Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

0.0–2.0 inch (0–50 mm)

Margin Left/Right

Purpose:

To specify the left and right margins of the scanned image.

Values:

0.1 inch* (2 mm*) Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

0.0–2.0 inch (0–50 mm)

Margin Middle

Purpose:

To specify the middle margin of the scanned image.

Values:

0.0 inch ^ (0 mm ^ ) Sets the value in increments of 0.1 inch (1 mm).

0.0–2.0 inch (0–50 mm)

Fax Menu

Use the FAX menus to configure a variety of fax features.

NOTE: The FAX service cannot be used unless you set up a country code under Country. If Country is not set up, a message Set Fax Country appears on the display.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Fax to

Purpose:

To specify the recipient.

Values:

Recipient Keypad *	Enters the fax number using a keypad.
Speed Dial Enters the speed dial number stored.
Phone Book Searches the fax number from the Phone Book.
Group Dial Searches the fax number from the Group Dial in the Phone Book.
Search Local Phone Book	Searches the fax number from the local Phone Book.
Search Server Phone Book	Searches the fax number from the Server Phone Book.

Resolution

Purpose:

To specify the scan resolution to improve the output quality.

Values:

Standard* Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine	Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine	Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The Super Fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine mode. See the notes below.
Photo	Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:

To adjust the density to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.

Values:

Lighter3 Works well with dark print.
Lighter2
Lighter1
Normal*	Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1	Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Darker3

OnHook

Purpose:

To send or receive faxes manually.

Values:

Off*	Does not send or receive faxes manually.
On	Sends or receives faxes manually.

Delayed Start

Purpose:

To send a fax at a later time.

Values:

Off ^* Does not send a fax at a later time.

On Sends a fax at a later time.

NOTE: A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in the Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Polling Receive

Purpose:

To receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.

Values:

Off* Does not receive faxes using Polling Receive.

On Receives faxes using Polling Receive.

Fax Cover Page

Purpose:

To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

Values:

Off ^* Does not attach a cover page to faxes.

On Attaches a cover page to faxes.

Print from USB Menu

NOTE: Print from USB Menu feature is available only when a USB memory is inserted in the USB port.

Document

Purpose:

To specify the document stored in the root, file, or folder in a USB memory.

Select Tray

Purpose:

Values:

Tray 1 ^*

Tray 2 ^*1

SSF

*1 This item is available only when the optional 250-sheet feeder is installed.

SSF Paper Size

Purpose:

Values:

mm series

A4*1

A5

B5

Letter

Folio

Legal

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.

inch series

Letter ^*1

Folio

Legal

A4

A5

B5

*1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.

SSF Paper Type

Purpose:

Values:

Plain*

Plain Thick

Covers

Covers Thick

Coated

Coated Thick

Envelope

Recycled

Letterhead

Preprinted

Prepunched

Color

Plain S2

Plain Thick S2

Recycled S2

Color S2

2Sided

NOTE: 2Sided feature is available only for Dell 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Purpose:

To print on both sides of a sheet of paper.

Values:

1 -> 1Sided*

Prints on one side of a sheet of paper.

Long Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by long edge.

Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper to be bound by short edge.

Layout

Purpose:

To specify the output layout.

Values:

1Up ^* Prints one page on one side of a sheet of paper.

2Up Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.

4Up Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.

PDF Password

Purpose:

To enter the password when you print the secure PDF job.

Values:

Enter PDF Password Enter the password to print the secure PDF job.

Panel Lock

This feature prevents unauthorized personnel from changing the settings made by the administrator. For regular printing, items can be selected from the menu and printer settings remain unchanged. For regular printing, items can be configured using the printer driver.

NOTE: Disabling the operator panel menus does not prevent access to the Stored Print and Tray Settings menus.

Enabling the Panel Lock

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
5 Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
6 Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
7 Press button until Enable is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
8 Enter the new password, and then press the √ (Set) button.

NOTICE: Be sure to remember the password. The procedure described below allows you to reset the password, but the settings for Address Book and Phone Book are cleared.

- Turn off the printer. Then, while holding the printer. Perform steps 8 and 9.

Menu (Menu) button, turn on the

9 Re-enter the password to confirm the password that you entered, and then press the √ (Set) button.

The password has been changed.

NOTE: If you change the password while Panel Lock is Enable, perform steps 1 to 5 above. Press button until Change Password is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button. Perform steps 8 and 9 above to change the password. This will change the password.

Disabling the Panel Lock

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

5 Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

6 Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

7 Ensure that Disable is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

8 Enter the current password, and then press the √ (Set) button.

The setting has been changed.

Resetting Defaults

After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all the menu parameters, except the parameters for the network, are reset to their default values.

When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

5 Press button until Reset Defaults is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

6 Press button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the (Set) button.

7 Press button until YES is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button. The printer is restarted automatically.

Understanding Your Printer Software

Use the Drivers and Utilities CD that shipped with your printer to install a combination of software programs, depending on your operating system.

Printer Status Window

The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an error occurs, for example, when a paper jam occurs or toner is running low.

By default, the Printer Status window launches only when an error occurs. When an error occurs, the error message appears on the Printer Status window. You can set the Printer Status window to always launch when printing in Printing Status Window Properties.

You can also check toner level, quantity of paper remaining or the configuration of options for the local printer.

Status Monitor Console

Use the Status Monitor Console to manage multiple instances of the Status Window for a particular printer.

Select a printer from the list view (or Printer Selection) by clicking its name to open a Status Window for a particular printer.

Dell Supplies Management System

You can launch the Dell Supplies Management System dialog box from the All Programs menu or the desktop icon.

You can order consumables by phone or from the web.

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Additional Color Laser Software→ Dell Supplies Management System.

The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.

2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.

3 If you are ordering from the web:

a When you cannot get information from the printer automatically by two-way communication, a window prompting you to type the Service Tag appears. Type the Service Tag of your Dell printer in the field provided.
Your Service Tag is located inside the toner access cover of your printer.
b Select a URL from the Select Reorder URL list.
c Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.

4 If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone section.

User Setup Disk Creating Tool

The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program located in the MakeDisk folder of the Utilities folder on the Drivers and Utilities CD and the printer drivers located on the Drivers and Utilities CD are used to create driver installation packages that contain custom driver settings. A driver installation package can contain a group of saved printer driver settings and other data for things such as:

• Print orientation and Multiple Up (document settings)
  • Water marks
• Font references

If you want to install the printer driver with the same settings on multiple computers running the same operating system, create a setup disk in a floppy disk or in a server on the network. Using the setup disk that you have created will reduce the amount of work required when installing the printer driver.

• Install the Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer driver in the computer on which the setup disk is to be created.
• The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk was created or computers running the same operating system. Create a separate setup disk for each of the operating systems.

Software Update

The firmware and/or driver updates can be downloaded from the Dell Support web site located at support.dell.com.

Printer Settings Utility

You can open the Status Window, Tool Box, Updater, Troubleshooting, Address Book Editor, ScanButton Manager, and Dell ScanCenter using the Quick Launch Utility window.

NOTE: Quick Launch Utility is only supported on Windows.

To use the Quick Launch Utility, select to install the Quick Launch Utility when you install the Dell software.

For information about installing the software, see "Setting Up for Shared Printing."

To open the Quick Launch Utility window:

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Additional Color Laser Software→ Quick Launch Utility.

Quick Launch Utility DELL Support Tools AIO Utility Status Window Tool Box Updater Troubleshooting Settings... Quick Launch Utility DELL Support Tools AIO Utility Address Book Editor ScanButton Manager Dell ScanCenter Settings...

The Quick Launch Utility window provides seven buttons: Status Window, Tool Box, Updater, Troubleshooting, Address Book Editor, ScanButton Manager, and Dell ScanCenter.

To exit the Quick Launch Utility window:

1 Click the X button at the top-right of the window.

For details, click the Help button of each application.

Status Window

The Status Window button opens the Printer Status window. For more information about using Status Window, refer to "Printer Status Window."

Tool Box

The Tool Box button opens the Tool Box. For more information about using Tool Box, refer to "Understanding the Tool Box Menus."

Updater

The Updater button updates the Dell software and printer firmware.

Troubleshooting

The Troubleshooting button opens the Troubleshooting Guide, which allows you to solve problems by yourself.

Address Book Editor

The Address Book Editor button opens the Address Book Editor, which allows you to register the contact information such as phone number and e-mail address. For more information about using Address Book Editor, refer to "Using Address Book Editor."

ScanButton Manager

The ScanButton Manager button opens the ScanButton Manager, which allows you to specify how the ScanButton Manager behaves for scan events that the device generates (USB connection only). For more information about using ScanButton Manager, refer to "Scanning From the Operator Panel."

Dell ScanCenter

The Dell ScanCenter button opens the Dell ScanCenter, which is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send them directly to PaperPort or other programs on your computer without running the PaperPort program first. For more information about using Dell ScanCenter, refer to "Dell ScanCenter" or PaperPort's Help menu.

Address Books

There are several address books available for Scan and Fax services. Address books help you organize contact information, such as e-mail addresses, fax numbers and server information, and quickly choose the recipient or locate the address. The address book data can be obtained from the printer or a remote LDAP server.

NOTE: Phone Book is described as one of Address Books in this section.

NOTE: For information on how to setup the LDAP server, see "LDAP Server" and "LDAP User Mapping." For information on the LDAP Address Books, see "Server Address Book" and "Server Phone Book."

Types of Address Books

• E-mail Address Book (for Scan to E-mail)
E-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned document via e-mail
- Email Group (for Scan to E-mail)
Groups of e-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned document via e-mail
- LDAP Server Address Book (for Scan to E-mail)
E-mail addresses registered in the address book data through the LDAP server for sending the scanned document via e-mail
• Network Address Book (for Scan to Network)
Computer and FTP server information registered for sending the scanned document to a computer or ftp server
- Phone Book (for Fax)
Fax numbers registered for sending documents from your printer
- Group Dial (for Fax)
Groups of fax numbers registered for sending documents from your printer
- LDAP Server Phone Book (for Fax)
Fax numbers registered in the phone book data through the LDAP server for sending documents from your printer
• PC Fax Address Book (for Direct Fax)

Fax numbers registered for sending documents from your computer

• PC Fax Address Book for group (for Direct Fax)

Groups of fax numbers registered for sending documents from your computer

Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books

There are following three ways to add or edit entries to the address books:

• Operator panel of the printer
• Address Book Editor
• Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

Services Features Types of Address Books		Entry Registration
		Operator Panel on the Printer	Address Book Editor	Dell Printer Configurati on Web Tool
Scan E-mail Address Book - ●		●
		Email Group - ●	●
		Server Address Book (LDAP server)	-	-
Network Address Book - ●		●
Fax Fax Phone Book ●		●
		Group Dial	●	●
		Server Phone Book (LDAP server)	-	-
Direct Fax	PC Fax Address Book	- ●	-
	PC Fax Address Book - group	- ●	-

Using Operator Panel of the Printer

You can directly enter the fax numbers on the operator panel.

NOTE: For information on how to add a new entry, see "Setting Speed Dial."

Using Address Book Editor

You can use Address Book Editor installed on your computer to add or edit entries. Address Book Editor is synchronized with the address books of your printer and updated simultaneously as you save changes to the entries in Address Book Editor.

NOTE: This tool is supported on both Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh.

NOTE: When the printer and your computer is connected via USB, you must install the scanner driver.

With Address Book Editor, you can:

• Automatically retrieves data from the address books of your printer at startup
• Synchronizes with the printer
• Allows you to import the Address Book data from CSV file, WAB file, MAPI, and LDAP server
• Allows you to export the Address Book data into a CSV file

Address Book Panel

There are two address books you can manage in the Address Book Editor: Device Address Book for Fax, E-mail, and Server and PC Fax Address Book for Direct Fax.

For Microsoft Windows:

Address Book Editor File Edit View Tool Help Search Address Books Device Address Book Fax E-Mail Server PC Fax Address Book ID Name Register / Group Info. Updated On 001 Sample 000000 ID : 001 Name : Sample Phone Number : 000000 Note: 001 - 008 can be used as Speed Dial IDs. Entry Data 1, Group Data 0

For Apple Macintosh:

Address Book Editor Address Books Device Address Book Fax E-Mail Server PC Fax Address Book ID Name Register / Group Updated On Entry Data: 30, Group Data: 1

• Device Address Book

Fax

Links to the printer's Address Book for Fax feature. You can register up to 200 fax numbers and 6 groups with 200 fax numbers.

• E - M a i l

Links to the printer's Address Book for Scan to E-mail feature. You can register up to 100 e-mail addresses and 10 groups with 10 e-mail addresses.

- Server

Links to the printer's Address Book for Scan to Network feature. You can register up to 32 server information.

• PC Fax Address Book

You can manage the PC Fax Address Book for using Direct Fax feature on your computer. You can register up to 500 fax numbers and 500 groups with 500 fax numbers.

Editing an entry:

1 Select an Address Book that the entry you want to edit is stored.
2 Select an entry that you want to edit.
3 Click the Edit button, and enter new information.
4 Click the Save button to save changes.

NOTE: When the address book entries are updated, it synchronizes with the printer and updates the address books of your printer simultaneously.

Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

You can use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using a general web browser.

NOTE: For information on how to add a new entry, see "Address Book."

NOTE: When the address book entries are updated, it synchronizes with the printer and updates the address books of your printer simultaneously.

Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh

Status Monitor Widget is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer through the exchange of information between the Macintosh and the printer.

Status Monitor Widget Feature

• Monitoring Dell Printers

Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Macintosh

- Receiving Alerts

Alerts you to problems, such as paper jams or low toner

- Ordering Supplies

Allows you to access the web site to order supplies

Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget

Operating systems

• Mac OS X 10.4.11

- Mac OS X 10.5

- Mac OS X 10.6

Network protocols and interfaces

• LPR

- Socket 9100

- Bonjour

- USB 2.0 and 1.1 (When connecting with multiple printers of the same model via USB cables, only the printer recognized first can be monitored in the Status Monitor Widget.)

Installing the Status Monitor Widget

1 Double-click the Status Monitor Installer icon in the Finder window.

2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

When the Install Succeeded screen appears, the installation is complete.

NOTE: Entering the administrative login name and password are required during the installation process.

Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget

Opening the Status Monitor Widget

1 Click the Dashboard icon in the Dock to launch Dashboard.

Dashboard

2 Click the Plus (+) sign to display the Widget Bar.

Computer desktop with monitor, clock, and app icons (no readable text or symbols)

3 Click the icon of Status Monitor in the Widget Bar. The Printer Status window appears.

NOTE: If the message Select a printer is displayed, select your printer in Preferences. (For more information on Preferences, see "Preferences.")

graph TD
    A["Select a printer."] --> B["Status Monitor"]
    B --> C["Order Supplies"]
    D["Estimated Toner Level"] --> E["Bk"]
    D --> F["C"]
    D --> G["M"]
    D --> H["Y"]
    I["People"] --> J["Ski Report"]
    J --> K["Status Monitor"]
    K --> L["Stickies"]

Closing the Status Monitor Widget

1 Click the Close (x) button in the upper-left corner of the Printer Status window.

Printer Status Window

When the Status Monitor Widget is activated, the Printer Status window appears on Dashboard.

Ready to print. Status Monitor Order Supplies Estimated Toner Level: Bk C M Y

Printer Status Message Area

Displays a message of the current printer status.

NOTE: The Status Monitor Widget automatically obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be specified in Preferences. Also, the printer status is refreshed when Dashboard is launched or Preferences is closed.

NOTE: If the Status Monitor Widget receives no response from the printer, the message Cannot get printer information is displayed.

NOTE: When the printer is connected via USB cable, you cannot check the status of the printer during a print or scan job.

Printer Status Image Area

Displays the image of printer condition.

• Estimated Toner Level image

Displays the estimated toner level of each color if the printer is functioning properly.

NOTE: If the utility does not receive a response from the printer, the Unknown toner image is displayed.

- Printer error image

Displays an indication image when an error occurs.

An error has occurred and the printer requires your attention to correct a problem.

An error has occurred and the printer cannot be used.

An unknown error has occurred and the printer cannot be used.

Order Supplies button

Click this button to display the Order window.

To hide the Order window, click Order Supplies again.

Info (i) button

Click this button to open Preferences.

NOTE: The info (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the Printer Status window. The info (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.

Order Window

This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by telephone or from the web site.

To open the Order window:

1 Click the Order Supplies in the Printer Status window.

The Order window appears.

NOTE: The Order window appears when low toner is detected.

DELL Order Online: Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site. http://Accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx Order By Phone: To order Dell printer supplies by phone, call the following. 877-INK-2YOU - United States

Order Online

- Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink

Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink to access the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies.

- URL list

Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies.

Select a URL address to use when the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site hyperlink is clicked.

Order By Phone

- Phone number list

Displays a list of available phone numbers that you can call to order Dell printer supplies.

Preferences

To open Preferences:

1 Click the info (i) button in the Printer Status window.

Preferences appears.

NOTE: The info (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the Printer Status window. The info (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.

Printer: Dell 215Scdn Color MFP Status Update Interval: 10 sec. (0-600) SNMP Community Name: public Service Tag: Get Tag ver.0.2.4 done

Printer

Displays a list of available printer names in the pull down menu. The first printer displayed in this list is set as default.

Status Update Interval

You can specify the update interval of the printer status. By default, it is set to obtain the printer information every 10 seconds. It can be set from 0 second to 600 seconds.

SNMP Community Name

You can change the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) community name if using default community name (public). Up to 31 characters can be entered.

Service Tag button

Click this button to obtain the service tag.

NOTE: You cannot retrieve the service tag when the printer is connected via USB cable.

done button

Click this button to return to the Printer Status window.

Status Monitor Console for Linux

Status Monitor Console is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer through the exchange of information between the Linux and the printer.

Status Monitor Console Feature

• Monitoring Dell Printers

Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Linux.

- Receiving Alerts

Alerts you to problems, such as paper jams or low toner.

- Ordering Supplies

Allows you to access the web site to order supplies.

Before Installing the Status Monitor Console

NOTE: The Status Monitor Console requires the following modules installed.

- Python, PyGTK, Net-SNMP, cups-libs, and xog-open

Please confirm that these modules are installed before you install the Status Monitor Console.

NOTE: The Status Monitor Console is available when the printer is connected to a network (LPR or Socket 9100). USB connection is not supported.

Distributions

• R e ^ d Enterprise Itinux ^ WS 4

• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop

• S U ^® ISnuEEnterprise Desktop 10

• SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11

Printing system

• CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)

Installing the Status Monitor Console

1 Activate the terminal, and log in as a super user.
2 Type the following rpm command in the terminal window.

# rpm -ivh (Type the package file name)

Starting the Status Monitor Console

1 Click Dell Printers→ Status Monitor Console

The Printer Selection window appears.

For more information on Printer Selection window, see "Printer Selection Window."

2 Select your printer.

The Printer Status window appears.

For more information on Printer Status window, see "Printer Status Window."

- You can order supplies from the Dell Supplies Management System window. See "Dell Supplies Management System Window."

Printer Selection Window

PrinterSelection Printer Name Status Model Name URI del Ready Dell 2155cdn Color MFP pd/10000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Settings... Details... Refresh Close

Printers list

All the printers registered in the CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System) are displayed in a list.

- Status icons:

Ready

Unknown/Offline/Toner Low/Paper Low

Door Open/Paper Jam/No Toner/Out Of Paper

Settings button

Click this button to open the Settings window.

Details button

Click this button to open the Printer Status window. If a non-supported printer is selected, it opens the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For details on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."

Refresh button

Click this button to update the information of printers.

Close button

Click this button to close the Printer Selection window.

Printer Status Window

When the printer is specified in the Printer Selection window, the Printer Status window appears.

Printer Status for dell DELL Printer Status: Ready to print. Estimated Toner Level: ✓ Black ✓ Cyan ✓ Magenta ✓ Yellow Refresh Close

Printer Status for dell DELL Printer Status: The Toner Cartridge needs to be replaced now. Estimated Toner Level: ✓ Black ✓ Cyan ✓ Magenta ✓ Yellow Replace the toner cartridge. Order Online: Order Supplies Online... Refresh Close

Printer Status Message Area

Displays a message of the current printer status.

NOTE: The Status Monitor Console automatically obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be specified in the Settings window. Also, the printer status is refreshed when the Refresh is clicked.

NOTE: If the Status Monitor Console receives no response from the printer, the message Cannot get printer information is displayed.

Printer Status Image Area

- Current Toner Status icons

Displays icons of the current status of each toner.

The toner level is more than 30%.

The toner level is less than 29%.

The toner level is less than 9%.

The toner level is unknown.

• Estimated Toner Level images

Keeps you informed about the amount of toner that remains for each color.

Toner Alert

Displays an alert message when any remaining toner is low, empty, or unknown.

Order Online

• Order Supplies Online button

Click this button to access the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies. This button appears when the amount of toners becomes less than 30%.

Refresh button

Click this button to update the status of the printer.

Close button

Click this button to close the Printer Status window.

Dell Supplies Management System Window

This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by telephone or from the web site.

To open the Dell Supplies Management System window:

1 Click Order Supplies Online button in the Printer Status window.

OR

Click Dell Printers→ Dell Supplies Management System.

Dell Supplies Management System DELL Order Printer Supplies Dell printer supplies are available only through Dell. Select Printer Model: Dell 2155cdn Color MFP Order Online: Order Supplies Online... Select Reorder URL: http://Accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSag.aspx Order by Phone: To order Dell printer supplies by phone, call the following. 877-INK-2YOU - United States Close

Select Printer Model

Select your printer model name.

Order Online

• Order Supplies Online button

- When the Regular URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL: Click this button to open the Service Tag window.

- When the Premier URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL: Click this button to open the procurement and support web site.

- Select Reorder URL

Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies. Select a URL address to use when the Order Supplies Online button is clicked.

• Regular URL: http://Accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx
  • Premier URL: http://premier.dell.com

Order by Phone

• To order Dell printer supplies by phone, call the following

Select your country with phone number from the list, and call the displayed telephone number to order supplies.

Close button

Click this button to close the Dell Supplies Management System window.

Service Tag Window

Dell 2155cdn Color MFP For the best service, enter your Dell printer Service Tag. OK Cancel

1 Enter the Dell printer service tag.

NOTE: For information on the service tag, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag."

Settings Window

To open the Settings window:

1 Click the Settings button in the Printer Selection window. The Settings window appears.

Settings Update of status ✓ Printer Status is regularly updated Update Interval: 30 sec. (15-600) Port Number Settings Set TCP/IP port number. Available port number is 80 and 443 and 8000 to 9999. Port Number: 80 Protocol Settings - SNMP Enter the community name used for reference and display You can enter a maximum of 31 characters. The default is 'public'. Community Name (Read only): ***** Order URL Select Reorder URL: http://Accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx OK Cancel Apply

Update of status

• Printer Status is regularly updated check box

Select the check box to enable/disable the Printer Status to be updated by the specified interval.

- Update interval text box

Specify the update interval of the printer status.

Port Number Settings

- Port Number

Specify the port number in the Port Number text box to open the setting page of your printer in a web browser.

Protocol Settings - SNMP

- Community Name

Enter the Community name of SNMP in the Community Name text box.

Order URL

- Select Reorder URL

The selected URL address is set as default web site for the Select Reorder URL in the Dell Supplies Management System window.

Understanding Fonts

Typefaces and Fonts

A font is a set of characters and symbols created with a distinct design. The distinct design is called a typeface. The typefaces you select add personality to a document. Well-chosen typefaces make a document easier to read.

The printer has numerous resident fonts in PCL 5/PCL 6. See "Resident Fonts" for a listing of all resident fonts.

Weight and Style

Typefaces are often available in different weights and styles. These variations modify the original typeface so you can, for example, emphasize important words in text or highlight book titles. The different weights and styles are designed to complement the original typeface.

Weight refers to the thickness of the lines that form the characters. Thicker lines result in darker characters. Some words commonly used to describe the weight of a typeface are bold, medium, light, black, and heavy.

Style refers to other typeface modifications, such as tilt or character width. Italic and oblique are styles where the characters are tilted. Narrow, condensed, and extended are three common styles that modify the character widths.

Some fonts combine several weight and style modifications; for example, Helvetica BdOb. A group of several weight and style variations of a single typeface is called a typeface family. Most typeface families have four variations: regular, italic (oblique), bold, and bold italic (bold oblique). Some families have more variations, as the following illustration for the Helvetica typeface family shows:

Helvetica	ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890
Helvetica Oblique	ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890
Helvetica Bold	ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890
Helvetica Bold Oblique	ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890
Helvetica Narrow	ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890
Helvetica Narrow Oblique	ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890
Helvetica Narrow Bold	ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique	ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ1234567890

Pitch and Point Size

The size of a font is specified as either a pitch or point size, depending on whether the font is fixed space or proportional.

In fixed space fonts, each character has the same width. Pitch is used to specify the size of fixed space fonts. It is a measure of the number of characters that will print in one horizontal inch of type. For example, all 10-pitch fonts print 10 characters per inch (cpi) and all 12-pitch fonts print 12 cpi:

Courier	10 Pitch	1234567890
Courier-Bold	10 Pitch	1234567890
Courier	12 Pitch	123456789012
Courier-Bold	12 Pitch	123456789012

In proportional (or typographic) fonts, every character can have a different width. Since proportional fonts have characters with different widths, the font size is specified in point size, not pitch. Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. A point is defined as 1/72 inch. The characters in a font printed at 24 point will be twice as large as the characters in the same font printed at 12 point.

The following illustration shows samples of a font printed in different point sizes:

48 point 36 point

24 point

18 point

12 point

10 point

The point size of a font is defined as the distance from the top of the tallest character in the font to the bottom of the lowest character in the font. Due to the definition of point size, different fonts printed at the same point size may appear quite different in size. This is because there are other font parameters that affect how the font looks. However, the point size of a font is an excellent specification of the relative size of a font. The following examples illustrate two very different proportional fonts at 14 point:

ITC Avant Garde abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz ITC Zapf Chancery abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts

The printer uses both bitmapped and scalable fonts.

Bitmapped fonts are stored in print memory as predefined patterns of bits that represent a typeface at a specific size, style, and resolution. The following illustration shows an example of a character from a bitmapped font.

P

Bitmapped fonts are available in different type styles and point sizes as downloadable fonts.

Scalable fonts (also called outline fonts) are stored as computer programs that define the outlines of the characters in the font. Each time you print characters from a scalable font, the printer creates a bitmap of the characters at the point size you choose and saves it temporarily in print memory.

P P P P

These temporary bitmapped fonts are deleted when you turn off or reset the printer. Scalable fonts provide the flexibility of printing in many different point sizes.

Your printer uses different scalable font formats for downloading fonts to the printer. PCL 5/PCL 6 uses Intellifont and TrueType scalable fonts. There are thousands of different scalable fonts available in these different font formats from numerous font suppliers.

If you plan to use many downloadable bitmapped or scalable fonts or if you plan to use many different sizes of scalable fonts, you may need to purchase additional memory for your printer.

Resident Fonts

Your printer is equipped with resident fonts stored permanently in print memory. Different fonts are available in PCL 5/PCL 6. Some of the most popular typefaces, like Courier and TimesNew, are available for all printer languages.

The following table lists all the fonts resident in your printer. See "Printing Font Sample List" for instructions on how to print samples of the fonts. You can select the resident fonts from your software program or from the operator panel.

Resident bitmapped and scalable fonts
PCL 5/PCL 6
CG Times CG Omega BdIt Coronet
CG Times It
CG Times Bd Garamond Antiqua Marigold
CG Times BdIt Garamond Krsv
	Garamond Hlb Arial
Univers Md Garamond KrsvHlb Arial It
Univers MdIt Arial Bd
Univers Bd Courier Arial BdIt
Univers BdIt	Courier It
Univers MdCd	Courier Bd	TimesNew
Univers MdCdIt	Courier BdIt	TimesNew It
Univers BdCd		TimesNew Bd
Univers BdCdIt LetterGothic	TimesNew BdIt
	LetterGothic It
AntiqueOlv	LetterGothic Bd Symbol
AntiqueOlv It
AntiqueOlv Bd Albertus Md	Wingdings
	Albertus XBd
CG Omega
CG Omega It	Clarendon Cd
CG Omega Bd
Times Roman Palatino Roman	N C Schbk Roman
Times It Palatino It N C Schbk It
Times Bd Palatino Bd N C Schbk Bd
Times BdIt Palatino BdIt N C Schbk BdIt
Helvetica ITCBookman Lt ITC A G Go Bk
Helvetica Ob ITCBookman LtIt ITC A G Go BkOb
Helvetica Bd	ITCBookmanDm	ITC A G Go Dm
Helvetica BdOb ITCBookmanDm It	ITC A G Go	DmOb
CourierPS	HelveticaNr	ZapfC MdIt
CourierPS Ob	HelveticaNr Ob
CourierPS Bd HelveticaNr Bd	ZapfDingbats
CourierPS BdOb	HelveticaNr BdOb
SymbolPS

Symbol Sets

A symbol set is the collection of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation, and special characters available in the font you select. Symbol sets support the requirements for different languages or specific applications, such as math symbols used for scientific text.

In PCL 5/PCL 6, a symbol set also defines which character will print for each key on the keyboard (or more specifically, for each code point). Some applications require different characters at some code points. To support multiple applications and languages, your printer has 36 symbol sets for the resident PCL 5/PCL 6 fonts.

Symbol Sets for PCL 5/PCL 6

Not all font names support all of the symbol sets listed.

Roman 8 (Default) ISO 8859	-1 Latin 1 ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 ISO 8859	-10 Latin 6 PC-8
PC-8 DN PC-775 Baltic PC-850 Multilingual
PC-852 Latin 2 PC-1004 OS/2 PC Turkish
Windows 3.1 Latin 1 Windows 3.1 Latin 2 Windows 3.1 Latin 5
DeskTop PS Text MC Text
Microsoft Publishing Math 8	PS Math
Pi Font	Legal	ISO 4 United Kingdom
ISO 6 ASCII	ISO 11 Swedish:names	ISO 15 Italian
ISO 17 Spanish	ISO 21 German	ISO 60 Norwegian v1
ISO 69 French Windows 3.0	Latin 1 Windows Baltic
Symbol	Wingdings	ITC ZapfDingbats MS

Understanding Printer Messages

The printer operator panel displays error messages describing the current state of the printer and indicates possible printer problems you must resolve. This chapter provides a list of error codes and tells you how to clear error messages.

NOTICE: When an error message appears, the print data remaining on the printer and the information accumulated in the memory of the printer are not secure.

NOTE: An error code is listed in an error message.

NOTE: For error messages that are not listed in this chapter, refer to instructions in each error messages.

1 2 3 4 5 6 12 11 10 4 9 3 8 7

1		D	a	t	a	L		Ready / Eror LED2 ^1
		[n 4	button					[HWD4]
[W26T]	[C4TC]	(Set)	button			6	[C20H]	(Cancel) button
[S43H]		(Start)	button			8	[WHG7]	(Backspace) button
[24HX]	[193E]	(All Clear)	button			10	[NDK2]	(Back) button
[26AY]	LCD panel*2					12		(Menu) button

*1 The Error LED is on the right and blinks when an error occurs.

*2 Displays up to 4-line by 16-character messages when an error occurs.

Error-Code What you can do
004-310 Turn off the printer. Confirm that the optional 250-sheet feeder is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
004-311 Turn off the printer. Confirm that the duplexer is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
004-312 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
005-110 Remove the remaining documents from the ADF.
005-121
005-124
009-360 Turn off the printer. Confirm the yellow cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
009-361 Turn off the printer. Confirm the magenta cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
009-362 Turn off the printer. Confirm the cyan cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
009-363 Turn off the printer. Confirm the black cartridge is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
010-317 Turn off the printer and wait for 30 minutes. Open the front cover and make sure that the fuser is fully installed.
010-377 Turn off the printer. Confirm that the fuser is correctly installed, and turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
016-316 Turn off the printer. Remove the optional 512 MB memory module from the slot, and then reattach it firmly. Turn on the printer. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
016-317 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
016-318 Remove the unsupported additional memory module. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
016-386 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
016-387
016-388
016-391 Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
016-392
016-393
016-394
016-404 Contact your system administrator.
016-405
016-503 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if SMTP server and DNS server are set correctly.
016-504 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if user name and password for POP3 server and DNS server are set correctly.
016-505 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if user name and password used for POP3 server are set correctly.
016-506 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if SMTP server or POP server is set.
016-507 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if user name and password used for SMTP server are set correctly.
016-520 Contact your system administrator.
016-521
016-522
016-523
016-524
016-527
016-531 The account is not registered. Contact your system administrator.
016-532
016-533
016-545
016-535
016-536
016-541 Contact your system administrator.
016-542
016-543
016-700 The file size exceeds the maximum for the printer to process. Print the file from your computer.
016-720 The file format is not supported by the USB memory. Print the file from your computer.
016-750 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover.
016-753
016-755
016-756 Contact your system administrator.
016-757 The account is not registered. Contact your system administrator.
016-758	The function cannot be used. Contact your system administrator.
016-759	Printable page limit is exceeded. Contact your system administrator.
016-764 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact SMTP server administrator.
016-765
016-766
016-767 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.
016-768
016-786 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the network cable is connected properly. If there is no problem with the network cable, contact server administrator.
016-790
016-791 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover.
016-799 Press the √ (Set) button to clear the message and cancel the current print job. Confirm the configuration of the printer on the printer driver.
016-920 Press the √ (Set) button and try again.
016-921
016-922
016-930 The device is not supported. Remove it from the front USB port.
016-931 The USB hub is not supported. Remove it from the front USB port.
016-985 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Retry scanning by lowering the resolution setting or changing the file format of the scanned image.
016-986
024-910 Reload the specified paper on the standard 250-sheet tray.
024-911 Reload the specified paper on the optional 250-sheet feeder.
024-914 Reload the specified paper on the SSF.
024-946 Insert the standard 250-sheet tray.
024-947 Insert the optional 250-sheet feeder.
026-721 Check your USB memory:If the file size or the number of files exceeds the limit of your USB memory.If your USB memory is write-protected.
027-452 Change IP address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again.
027-446
031-521 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Confirm login-able computer with your system administrator.
031-522 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if login name (domain name and user name) and password are correct.
031-523 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the share name you specified.
031-524 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the number of users who use the server at the same time is not exceeding the upper limit.
031-525 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the specified user can read and write file at the storage location.
031-526 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check DNS connection, or check if forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.
031-527 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server address as IP address.
031-528 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the printer can communicate via network with the forwarding destination SMB server. For example, check the following:• Connection of a network cable• TCP/IP setting• Communication with Port 137 (UDP), 138 (UDP), and 139 (TCP).For communication beyond the subnet, contact your system administrator.
031-529 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if password is correct.
031-530 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if storage location is correct. Storage location you specified is DFS setting, and check if it is linked to other server. Specify directly linked server, share name, and storage location.
031-531 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check access right of the folder you specified.
031-532 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Change file name and forwarding destination folder, or move or delete file in forwarding destination folder.
031-533 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the following:• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.
031-534 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if other user is not operating file in storage location you specified.
031-535 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if storage location has free space.
031-536 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if server name is correct.
031-540 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if domain name is correct.
031-541 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if login name (user name) is correct.
031-542 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Wait for a while and try the same operation again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
031-543 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check login permitted time with your system administrator.
031-544 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the password valid period with your system administrator.
031-545 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check necessity of password change with your system administrator.
031-546 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings.
031-547 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings.
031-548 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Contact your system administrator for the destination server settings.
031-549 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. On server security settings, check access permission of null password user.
031-550 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check append access right to the file. Check if server supports SMB append command.
031-551
031-552 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Change the file name that already exists on FTP server.
031-574 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check DNS connection, or check if name of forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.
031-575 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server address as IP address.
031-576 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the printer communicates with forwarding destination FTP server. For example, check connection of network cable and if the IP address of the server is correct.
031-578 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if login name (user name) and password are correct.
031-579 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if storage location is correct.
031-580 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check server access right.
031-581 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Change file name and forwarding destination folder, or move or delete file in forwarding destination folder.
031-582 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the file name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if storage location has free space.
031-584 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the folder name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if the folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.
031-585 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check server access rights.
031-587
031-588 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if storage location has free space.
031-590 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Change the file name that already exists on FTP server.
031-594 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the same operation again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
031-595
031-598 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check append access right to the file and if server supports FTP append command.
031-599 Press the	√ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check rename access right to the file. Check if server supports FTP rename command.

033-513 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:

• Print the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.
• Print the fax job stored using the Secure Receive feature.

NOTE: For more information on the Secure Receive feature, see g the Secure Receiving Mode."

033-762 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. The printer rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

NOTE: For more information, see "Junk Fax Setup."

033-788 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:

• Remove the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.
• Print the fax job stored using the Secure Receive feature.

NOTE: For more information on the Secure Receive feature, see g the Secure Receiving Mode."

034-515 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:

• Try the same operation.
• Check the printer or remote machine if the memory is full.

034-791 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the telephone line cord is connected properly. If the line connection is correct, check the following:

- If Tone/Pulse setting is correct.

NOTE: For more information on Tone/Pulse setting, see e/Pulse."

If Tone/Pulse setting is correct, check the following:

- If the remote machine can receive a fax.

035-701 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the following:

• Status of the remote machine
- Tone/Pulse setting

NOTE: For more information on Tone/Pulse setting, see e/Pulse."

035-702 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the same operation.

035-708 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Try the following:

• Try the same operation.
• Reduce the modem speed.

NOTE: For more information on modem speed, see "Modem."

035-717 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Reduce the modem speed.

NOTE: For more information on modem speed, see "Modem."

035-718 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the status of the remote machine.

035-720 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check the features of the remote machine.

035-781 Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover. Check if the remote machine is busy.

042-700 Wait for a while until the printer cools down.

071-100 Remove the standard 250-sheet tray and jammed paper. Open and close the front cover.

071-920 Set side 2 of the sheet to the standard 250-sheet tray.

071-921 Press the √ (Set) button.

072-100 Remove the optional 250-sheet feeder and jammed paper. Open and close the front cover.

072-921 Press the √ (Set) button.

072-920 Set side 2 of the sheet to the optional 250-sheet feeder.

072-101 Remove the standard 250-sheet tray or the optional 250-sheet feeder, and remove the jammed paper. Open and close the front cover.
072-908 Remove the standard 250-sheet tray or the optional 250-sheet feeder, and remove the jammed paper. Open and close the front cover.
075-920 Set side 2 of the sheet to the SSF.
072-921 Press the √ (Set) button.
075-101 Open the front cover and remove the jammed paper, and then open and close the front cover.
075-102 Pull the jammed paper out of the SSF. Open and close the front cover.
075-922 Remove the paper from the SSF.
075-923 Pull the paper out of the SSF. Reload the paper in the SSF.
077-300 Close the front cover.
077-301 Close the toner access cover.
091-912 Remove the ribbon from the PHD unit. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
091-972 Open the front cover, and make sure that the PHD unit is fully installed.
092-310 Clean the CTD sensor.
092-910
093-919 Remove and shake the yellow cartridge. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
093-920 Remove and shake the magenta cartridge. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
093-921 Remove and shake the cyan cartridge. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
093-922 Remove and shake the black cartridge. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.
093-930 Open the toner access cover. Remove the used yellow cartridge, and install a new cartridge.
093-931 Open the toner access cover. Remove the used magenta cartridge, and install a new cartridge.
093-932 Open the toner access cover. Remove the used cyan cartridge, and install a new cartridge.
093-933 Open the toner access cover. Remove the used black cartridge, and install a new cartridge.
093-934	Open the toner access cover. Remove the used yellow cartridge, and install a new cartridge.
093-935	Open the toner access cover. Remove the used magenta cartridge, and install a new cartridge.
093-936	Open the toner access cover. Remove the used cyan cartridge, and install a new cartridge.
093-937	Open the toner access cover. Remove the used black cartridge, and install a new cartridge.
093-960	Open the toner access cover. Remove the unsupported yellow cartridge, and install a supported cartridge.
093-961	Open the toner access cover. Remove the unsupported magenta cartridge, and install a supported cartridge.
093-962	Open the toner access cover. Remove the unsupported cyan cartridge, and install a supported cartridge.
093-963	Open the toner access cover. Remove the unsupported black cartridge, and install a supported cartridge.
093-965	Open the front cover. Remove the unsupported PHD unit, and install a supported unit.
093-970	Open the toner access cover, and make sure that the yellow cartridge is fully installed.
093-971	Open the toner access cover, and make sure that the magenta cartridge is fully installed.
093-972	Open the toner access cover, and make sure that the cyan cartridge is fully installed.
093-973	Open the toner access cover, and make sure that the black cartridge is fully installed.
116-752	Press the √ (Set) button, or wait for 30 seconds for the printer to recover.
117-361	Turn off the printer, and turn it on again. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated.

Printing With Web Services on Devices (WSD)

This section provides information for network printing with WSD, the new Microsoft ^® protocol for Microsoft Windows ^® Vista ^® , Windows Server ^® 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows 7.

Adding Roles of Printer Services

When you use Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2, you need to add the roles of print services to the Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 client.

For Windows Server 2008:

1 Click Start→ Administrative Tools→ Server Manager.
2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3 Check the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next.
4 Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
5 Click Install.

For Windows Server 2008 R2:

1 Click Start→ Administrative Tools→ Server Manager.
2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3 Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next.
4 Click Next.
5 Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
6 Click Install.

Printer Setup

You can install your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities CD that shipped with your printer, or using Microsoft Windows' Add Printer wizard.

Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard

1 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers (Start → Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).
2 Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
4 In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click Next.

NOTE: In the list of available printers, the WSD printer is displayed in the form of http://IP address/ws/.

NOTE: If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP address manually to create a WSD printer. To enter the printer's IP address manually, follow the instructions below.

For Windows Server 2008 R2, to create a WSD printer, you must be a member of Administrators group.

1. Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
2. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and click Next.
3. Select Web Services Device from Device type.
4. Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and click Next.

NOTE: Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7, perform one of the following:

• Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your computer.
• Add the printer driver to your computer.

5 If prompted, install the printer driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.
6 Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.

7 Print a test page to verify print installation.

a Click Start→ Control Panel→ Hardware and Sound→ Printers (Start→ Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).

b Right-click the printer you just created, and then click Properties (Printer properties for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).

For PCL driver:

On the Options tab, set each setting item, and then click Apply.

For PS driver:

On the Device Settings tab, set each setting item, and then click Apply.

c On the General tab, click Print Test Page. When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.

Specifications

Operating System Compatibility

Your Dell™ 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer is compatible with Microsoft® Windows® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Mac OS X 10.3.9, 10.4.11, 10.5, 10.6, Red Hat® Enterprise Linux® 4 WS/5 Client (x86), and SUSE® Linux Enterprise Desktop 10/11 (x86).

Power Supply

Rated Voltage 220 VAC - 240 VAC 110 VAC - 127 VAC

Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Current 5 A or less 9 A or less

Dimensions

Height: 413 mm (16.26 inches) Width: 436 mm (17.16 inches) Depth: 451 mm (17.75 inches)

Weight (not including cartridge and PHD unit): 15.0 kg (32.47 lb)

Memory

Base memory 256 MB
Maximum memory 768 MB (256 MB + 512 MB)
Connector 144 pin EP2-2100 DDR2 SDRAM
	32b-SO-DIMM
DIMM Size	512 MB
Speed	EP2-2100

Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and Interface

PDL/Emulations PCL 6, PCL5e, HBPL, XPS (Host Based)
Operating Systems	Microsoft Windows XP/XP x64/Server 2003/Server 2003x64/Server 2008/Server 2008 x64/Server 2008 R2 x64/Vista/Vistax64/7/7 XPS, Mac OS X (10.3.9/10.4.11/10.5/10.6), Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 WS/5 Client (x86), and SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10/11 (x86)
Interfaces Standard local: USB 2.0
	Standard network: 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet
	Optional network: IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n(Wireless)

MIB Compatibility

Management Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information about network devices (such as adapters, bridges, routers, or computers). This information helps network administrators manage the network (analyze performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dell 2155cn/2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer complies with standard industry MIB specifications, allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various printer and network management software systems.

Environment

Operation

Temperature 10	°C - 32 °C
Relative humidity 10 % - 85 % RH (no condensation)

Print Quality Guarantee

Temperature 15	°C - 28 °C
Relative humidity 20 % - 70 % RH (no condensation)

Storage

Temperature range -20	°C to 40 °C (0 °F to 104 °F)
Storage humidity range 5 % - 85 % RH (no condensation)

Altitude

Operating Up to 3,100 m (10,000 feet)

Storage 70.9275 Kpa

Cables

Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:

Connection type Connection specifications and symbols
1 USB USB 2.0
2 Wireless adapter socket	IEEE 802.11b/802.11g/802.11n
3 Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
4 Phone connector
5 Wall jack connector

Diagram of a computer tower with labeled components including internal socket, drive, and ventilation slots

Copier Specifications

Item Description
Copy Resolution Optical: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Copy Speed Color 23 cpm or more, Black & White 23 cpm or more(When using the document glass to make sequential copies of a document with pages scanned one by one.)Color 8 cpm or more, Black & White 16 cpm or more(When using the ADF to make sequential copies of multiple documents.)
Paper Size	A4, A5, B5, Executive, Letter, Folio, Legal, Monarch, DL, C5, Envelope #10
Zoom Rate Document glass: 25 % - 400 %, ADF: 25 % - 400 %
Multiple copies 1 - 99 pages
Copy mode (=Original Type)	Text, Text & Photo, Photo

Item Description

Scanning method Charge coupled device (CCD) module

Scanner Specifications

Item Description
Compatibility TWAIN,Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)
Scan Resolution Optical: 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpiEnhanced: 9,600 dpi x 9,600 dpi (Gray and Color only in TWAIN)
Color bit depth 24 bit (WIA, TWAIN)
Mono bit depth 1 bit for Line art. 8 bit for Gray scale
Effective scanning length Document glass: 297 mm. ADF: 355.6 mm
Effective scanning width 215.9 mm
Scan speed (Text mode)	Monochrome: 665 μs/line (600 dpi), 1330 μs/line (1200 dpi)Color: 1330 μs/line (600 dpi), 2660 μs/line (1200 dpi)

Facsimile Specifications

Item Description
Compatibility ITU-T Super G3, ITU-T G3 ECM, ITU-T G3
Applicable line	Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), behind Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PBX), or Leased line (3.4 KHz/2-wire)
Data coding MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Max modem speed	33.6 Kbps
Transmission speed	Approx. 3 seconds/page *Transmission time applies to memory transmission of text data scanned in Standard resolution with ECM using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.

Item Description

Scanning speed Document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4 (at standard fax resolution mode) ADF: approx. 5 seconds/Letter (at standard fax resolution mode), 7.5 seconds/Letter (at fine fax resolution mode)

Maximum document length Document glass: 297 mm ADF: 355.6 mm

Paper size Letter, A4 (depending on a country)

Resolution Standard: R8 x 3.85 l/mm, Fine: R8 x 7.71/mm, Super Fine: 400 dpi x 400 dpi, Photo: R8 x 7.71/mm

User Memory 4 MB (320 pages)

Halftone 256 levels

Maintaining Your Printer

Maintaining Your Printer

You need to complete certain tasks to maintain optimum print quality.

NOTE: The images used and procedures described in this manual are those of Dell™ 2155cdn Multifunction Color Printer.

Determining the Status of Supplies

If your printer is connected to the network, the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool can provide instant feedback on remaining toner levels. Type the printer's IP address in your web browser to view this information. To use the E-Mail Alert Setup feature that notifies you when the printer requires new supplies, type the desired e-mail address in the e-mail list box.

On the operator panel, you can also confirm the following:

- Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing (However, the printer can only display information about one item at a time).

- Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge.

Conserving Supplies

You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner cartridge and paper.

Supply Setting Function

Toner cartridge

Toner Saving Mode in the Advanced tab

This check box allows the users to select a print mode that uses less toner. The image quality will be lower when this feature is used.

Supply Setting Function

Print media

Multiple Up in the Layout tab

The printer prints two or more pages on one side of a sheet. Values for Multiple Up are 2 Up, 4 Up, 8 Up, 16 Up, or 32 Up. Combined with the duplex setting, Multiple Up allows you to print up to 64 pages on one sheet of paper. (32 images on the front and 32 on the back)

Ordering Supplies

You can order consumables from Dell on the Internet when using a networked printer. Type the IP address of your printer in your web browser, launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the Order Supplies at: to order toner for your printer.

You can also order toner cartridges by the following method.

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Additional Color Laser Software→ Dell Supplies Management System.

The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.

2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3 If ordering from the web:

a When you cannot get information from the printer automatically by two-way communication, a window that prompts you to type the Service Tag appears. Type your Dell printer Service Tag in the field provided.

Your Service Tag number is located inside the toner access cover of your printer.

b Select a URL from the Select Reorder URL list.
c Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.

4 If ordering by phone, call the number that appears under the Order by Phone heading.

Storing Print Media

To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are several things you can do:

• To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21^ (70 °F) and the relative humidity is 40 %.
• Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
• If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so the edges do not buckle or curl.
• Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

Storing Consumables

Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do not store consumables in:

• Temperatures greater than 40 °C (104 °F).
- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
- Direct sunlight.
- Dusty places.
• A car for a long period of time.
- An environment where corrosive gases are present.
• A humid environment.

Replacing the Toner Cartridges

CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.

Dell toner cartridges are available only through Dell. You can order cartridges online at http://www.dell.com/supplies or by phone. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell."

It is recommended to use Dell toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.

CAUTION: Never throw used toner cartridges into fire. The residual toner could explode resulting in burns and injuries.

CAUTION: Do not shake the used toner cartridge. This may cause toner spills.

Removing the Toner Cartridge

1 Open the toner access cover.

Illustration of a printer with a hand inserting a green arrow into the opening (no text or symbols present)

2 Push the latch(es) backwards to pop open the toner cartridge(s) that you want to replace.

Diagram showing printer internal structure with labeled parts (K, C, M, Y) and a magnified view of the internal components.

3 Pull the cartridge holder until it clicks, and then pull out the toner cartridge.

Illustration of a printer being inserted into a machine, showing internal components and a hand holding a blue tool (no text or symbols present)

CAUTION: Do not shake the toner cartridge as it may cause toner spills.

Installing a Toner Cartridge

1 Ensure that the color of the new toner cartridge matches that on the handle before replacing it. Shake the new toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly.

Illustration of a blue industrial machine with motion arrows and an open box, no text or symbols present.

2 Insert the toner cartridge into the associated cartridge holder, and then slide the latch of the toner cartridge.

Diagram illustrating printer operation steps with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating process flow

3 Close the toner access cover.

3D rendering of a printer with a blue door and green arrow indicating a process (no text or symbols)

Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit

CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.

NOTICE: Protect the drums of the Print Head Device (PHD) against bright light. If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes, print quality may deteriorate.

NOTICE: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the belt unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the belt unit may reduce print quality.

Removing the PHD Unit

1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2 Pull the standard 250-sheet tray out of the printer about 200 mm. Hold the standard 250-sheet tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

Illustration of a printer and its internal plastic housing, showing no text or symbols on the devices themselves.

3 Push the side button to open the front cover.

Illustration of a printer presser with green arrows indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

4 Open the belt unit.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing a hand inserting a component into the paper (no text or symbols visible)

5 Turn the four PHD lock levers 90-degrees counterclockwise.

90°

6 Hold the gray tabs, and then pull the PHD unit out of the printer.

Tab Tab

Installing a PHD Unit

1 Open the PHD packaging.

Illustration of two hands exchanging a rectangular object with a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

622 Maintaining Your Printer

2 Take out the PHD unit from the packaging.

Illustration of hands installing a blue mechanical component into a white plastic container with a green arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols)

3 Completely pull out the eight yellow ribbons from the PHD unit.

Illustration of hands assembling a mechanical component with yellow wires and a tool (no text or symbols)

4 Remove the rear protective cover from the PHD unit.

NOTE: Do not remove the front protective cover at this moment.

Rear protective cover Front protective cover

5 Insert the PHD unit until the line on the handle aligns with the white line on the printer.

Diagram illustrating printer operation with labeled parts and green arrows indicating process steps

6 Turn the four PHD lock levers 90-degrees clockwise to lock the PHD unit.

90°

7 Remove the front protective cover from the PHD unit.

NOTICE: Ensure that you do not hit the belt unit when removing the front protective cover.

Diagram illustrating printer press operation with numbered steps and a prohibition symbol indicating disassembly or disassembly.

8 Close the belt unit, and push at the top of the unit until it clicks.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing paper feeding into a machine with a green arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

9 Close the front cover.

Illustration of a blue industrial machine with a green arrow indicating a process or operation (no text or symbols present)

10 Insert the standard 250-sheet tray into the printer, and push until it stops.

3D illustration of a printer with a green arrow indicating print output (no text or symbols present)

Replacing the Retard Roller

Keeping the retard roller in the paper tray clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the retard roller at regular intervals.

CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.

CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.

Dell retard rollers are available only through Dell. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell."

It is recommended to use Dell retard rollers for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.

Removing the Retard Roller in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray

1 Pull the standard 250-sheet tray out of the printer about 200mm . Hold the standard 250-sheet tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

Illustration of a printer with a green arrow indicating a component or process, no text or symbols present.

NOTE: Ensure that you remove all the paper from the standard 250-sheet tray before removing the retard roller.

2 Holding the retard roller tabs with your fingers, pull the retard roller out of the groove in the axle.

Diagram illustrating the assembly of a battery component with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating process steps.

Installing a Retard Roller in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray

1 Align the new retard roller with the groove on the axle.

3D diagram of a mechanical component with a blue connector and green arrows indicating assembly or inspection (no text or symbols)

2 Insert the retard roller into the axle until it snaps. The protrusions fit completely into the slots and the roller hook reseats into the groove on the axle.

Diagram illustrating a hand pressing a component into a device, with green arrows indicating motion or force directions.

3 Load paper in the standard 250-sheet tray, and then insert the tray into the printer and push until it stops.

3D illustration of a printer with a blue plastic tray and green arrow indicating print output (no text or symbols)

Cleaning Inside the Printer

Cleaning the Feed Roller

Clean the feed roller inside the printer if print media does not feed correctly.

1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.

2 Pull the standard 250-sheet tray out of the printer about 200 mm. Hold the standard 250-sheet tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

Illustration of a printer with a blue plastic case and a green arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols present)

3 Push the side button to open the front cover.

Illustration of a printer being inserted into a machine, with green arrows indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

4 Open the belt unit.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing a hand inserting a component into the open case, with a green arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

5 Turn the four PHD lock levers 90-degrees counterclockwise.

90°

6 Hold the gray tabs, and then pull out the PHD unit.

Tab Tab

NOTE: Keep the PHD unit in a dark place. If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes, print quality may deteriorate.

7 Clean the feed roller inside the printer with a dry cloth.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure with hands operating it, showing paper feed and printer casing (no text or symbols)

8 Insert the PHD unit until it stops, and then turn the four PHD lock levers 90-degrees clockwise to lock the PHD unit.

90°

9 Close the belt unit, and push at the top of the unit until it clicks.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing paper feeding into a machine with a green arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

10 Close the front cover.

3D illustration of a blue industrial machine with a green arrow indicating a process or operation (no text or symbols present)

11 Insert the standard 250-sheet tray into the printer, and push until it stops.

3D illustration of a printer with a blue plastic tray and green arrow indicating print output (no text or symbols)

Cleaning the CTD Sensor

Clean the Color Toner Density (CTD) sensor only when an alert for the CTD sensor is shown on the Status Monitor or operator panel.

1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2 Pull the standard 250-sheet tray out of the printer about 200 mm. Hold the standard 250-sheet tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

3D illustration of a printer with a blue plastic tray and a green arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols)

3 Push the side button to open the front cover.

Illustration of a printer being inserted into a machine, with green arrows indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

4 Open the belt unit.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing a hand inserting a component into the paper (no text or symbols visible)

5 Clean the CTD sensor inside the printer with a clean dry cotton swab.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure with a magnified inset showing a hand inserting a small electronic device (no text or symbols present)

6 Close the belt unit, and push at the top of the unit until it clicks.

Diagram of a printer's internal structure showing a hand inserting a component into the main chamber with a green arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

7 Close the front cover.

Illustration of a blue industrial machine with a green arrow indicating a process or operation (no text or symbols present)

8 Insert the standard 250-sheet tray into the printer, and push until it stops.

3D rendering of a printer with a blue receipt device and green arrow indicating print direction (no text or symbols)

Cleaning the Scanner

Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the scanner at the start of each day and during the day, as needed.

1 Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2 Open the document cover.

Illustration of a printer with an open lid and green arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

3 Wipe the surface of the document glass and ADF glass until it is clean and dry.

Diagram of a printer with labeled parts, showing internal components and a magnified inset view of the printer's front panel.

1 White Sheet

NOTE: Handle with care.

2 Document Cover

3 Document Glass

4 A D F G l a s s

4 Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until it is clean and dry.

5 Close the document cover.

Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller

Keeping the ADF feed roller clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the ADF feed roller at regular intervals.

1 Open the ADF cover.

3D illustration of a computer motherboard with a blue cover and green arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols)

2 Wipe the ADF feed roller with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel until it is clean.

If the ADF feed roller gets soiled with ink stains, paper from the ADF may also be soiled. In this case, slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with a neutral detergent or water, and then remove the contamination from the ADF feed roller until it is clean and dry.

Illustration of a printer with an open lid and paper tray, showing internal components (no text or symbols)

Adjusting Color Registration

To adjust the color registration when you first install the printer or after moving it to a new location, follow the procedure below.

- Printing the Color Registration Chart

• Determining Values

- Entering Values

Printing the Color Registration Chart

When Using the Operator Panel

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.

2 Press button until System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

3 Press Button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

4 Press √ button Maintenance is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.

5 Press button until Color Reg Adjust is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

6 Press button until Color Reg Chart is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

7 Press button to highlight Yes, and then press the √ (Set) button. The color registration chart is printed.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer → Tool Box

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.

3 Select Color Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.

The Color Registration Adjustment page is displayed.

4 Click the Start button next to Print Color Regi Chart.

The color registration chart is printed.

Determining Values

On the color registration chart, there are two types of charts: Chart 1 (fast scan) and Chart 2 (slow scan).

The Chart 1 is used to adjust the color registration for the fast scan direction, which is vertical to paper feed direction. The Chart 2 is used to adjust the color registration for the slow scan direction, which is horizontal to paper feed direction.

The following sections explain how to determine the adjustment values for the fast scan and the slow scan using Chart 1 and Chart 2.

Fast Scan

On the Chart 1 of the color registration chart, find the straightest lines where the two black lines and the colored line are most closely aligned for each color (Y, M, and C). If you find the straightest line, make a note of the value (-9 to +9) indicated by the straightest line for each color.

When the value is 0 for each color, you do not need to adjust the color registration for the fast scan.

When the value is not 0, enter the value using the procedure in "Entering Values."

Slow Scan

On the Chart 2 of the color registration chart, find the medium line within the range of white area for each color pattern (Y, M, and C). If you find the medium line, make a note of the value (-9 – +9) indicated by the medium line for each color.

When the value is 0 for each color, you do not need to adjust the color registration for the slow scan.

When the value is not 0, enter the value using the procedure in "Entering Values."

Entering Values

When Using the Operator Panel

Using the operator panel, enter the values found in the color registration chart to make adjustments.

1 Press the ☐ (Menu) button.
2 Press √ button System Setup is highlighted, and then press the √ (Set) button.
3 Press button Admtln Menu is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
4 Press button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
5 Press button until Color Reg Adjust is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.
6 Press button Ennter Number is highlighted, and then press the √(Set) button.

7 Ensure that LY is highlighted and press for button to specify the values.

8 Press Button to move the highlight to the next value.

9 Press the √ (Set) button.

RY is highlighted.

10 Repeat steps 7 to 9 to enter the desired values, and then press the √ (Set) button.

NOTE: You can specify each value for process, left, and right colors (LY, LM, LC, RY, RM, RC, PY, PM, and PC) by repeating the steps 7 to 9.

11 Press to highlight Color Reg Chart, and then press the √ (Set) button.

12 Press button to highlight Yes, and then press the √ (Set) button. The color registration chart with the new values is printed.

If the straightest line is not at the value of 0, adjust the values again. Checking the charts before and after the adjustments will help you to determine the values to enter.

When Using the Tool Box

NOTE:

Using the Tool Box, enter the values that you found in the color registration chart to make adjustments.

1 Click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Printers→ Dell 2155 Multifunction Color Printer→ Tool Box.

NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of this printer listed in Printer Names, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.

2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.

3 Select Color Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.

The Color Registration Adjustment page is displayed.

4 Select the value with the straight line, and then click the Apply New Settings button.

5 Click the Start button next to Print Color Regi Chart.

The color registration chart is printed with the new values.

6 Adjust till all straight lines are at the value of 0. Show image of before and after adjustment will help.

After printing the color registration chart, do not turn off the printer until the printer motor has stopped running.

NOTE: If 0 is not next to the straightest lines, determine the values and adjust the printer again.

Removing Options

If the printer location needs to change or the printer and print media handling options need to be shipped to a new location, all print media handling options must be removed from the printer. For shipping, pack the printer and print media handling options securely to avoid damage.

Removing the Optional Memory Module

CAUTION: When you remove the optional memory module, be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before starting these tasks.

1 Ensure that the printer is turned off and unplug all the cables including the power cable from the back of the printer.

2 Turn the screw on the control board cover counterclockwise.

Illustration of a computer tower with a close-up view showing a hand inserting a component into a device (no text or symbols present)

3 Slide the control board cover towards the back of the printer.

Illustration of a computer tower with a close-up view showing a blue drive being inserted, no text or symbols present.

4 Open the control board cover completely.

3D diagram of a computer tower with an open drive and a blue drive component, showing internal components without any text or symbols.

5 Push the clips on both sides of the slot outward to raise the memory module up.

Illustration of a computer tower with an inset showing internal components and green arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

6 Hold the memory module and pull it straight out.

Illustration of a computer tower with an inset showing internal components (no text or symbols)

7 Close the control board cover, and then slide it towards the front of the printer.

Diagram illustrating the process of inserting a device into a folder, showing step-by-step assembly and cleaning steps.

8 Turn the screw clockwise.

Illustration of a printer with a cable being inserted into a rack, showing the process with a green arrow indicating the cable's direction (no text or symbols present)

9 Turn on the printer.

Removing the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder

CAUTION: When you remove the optional 250-sheet feeder, be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before starting these tasks.

1 Turn off the printer and unplug the power cable. Then, disconnect all cables from the back of the printer.

2 Pull the standard 250-sheet tray out of the printer about 200 mm. Hold the tray with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

Illustration of a printer with a blue receipt mechanism and a green arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

3 Remove the two screws joining the printer and the optional 250-sheet feeder by unscrewing them with a coin or similar object.

Illustration of a printer with a close-up view showing internal components (no text or symbols)

NOTE: The screw hole is located in 216 mm recess from the front of the printer.

4 Gently lift the printer off the tray module, and place it on a level surface.

CAUTION: Two people are required to lift the printer. The printer should be lifted holding the front and back. Never lift the printer from its sides.

Diagram of a printer with green arrows indicating internal components or parts (no text or symbols present)

5 Insert the standard 250-sheet tray into the printer, and push until it stops.

Illustration of a printer with a blue receipt device inserted, showing internal components and a green arrow indicating the motion (no text or symbols present)

NOTICE: Do not use excessive force on the tray. Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer.

6 Reconnect all cables including the power cable into the back of the printer and turn on the printer.

Removing the Optional Wireless Adapter

CAUTION: When you remove the optional wireless adapter, be sure to turn off the printer, unplug the power cable, and disconnect all cables from the back of the printer before starting these tasks.

1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.

2 Turn the screw on the control board cover counterclockwise.

NOTE: Loosen the screw. You do not need to remove the screw.

Illustration of a computer tower with a close-up view showing a hand inserting a component into a device (no text or symbols present)

3 Slide the control board cover towards the back of the printer.

Illustration of a computer monitor with an inset showing the close-up of its internal components (no text or symbols present)

4 Open the control board cover completely.

3D diagram of a computer tower with an open drive and a green arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols present)

5 Remove the wireless adapter from the printer by releasing the adapter's hook while pushing the wireless adapter towards the front of the printer.

Diagram showing a printer internal structure with a blue plastic component inserted, alongside a magnified view of its electrical outlet (no text or symbols present)

6 Close the control board cover, and then slide it towards the front of the printer.

Illustration of a computer tower with a blue cover being inserted, showing the process and hand inserting a device (no text or symbols present)

Illustration of a computer tower with a blue cover being inserted, showing a magnified view of the cover (no text or symbols present)

7 Turn the screw clockwise.

Illustration of a computer tower with a close-up view showing a hand inserting a component into a device (no text or symbols present)

8 Turn on the printer.

Clearing Jams

Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid paper jams. See "Print Media Guidelines" for more information.

NOTE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended to try a sample first.

Avoiding Jams

• Use only recommended print media. See " Print Media Guidelines" for more information.
• See "Loading Print Media in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder" and "Loading Print Media in the SSF" to load print media properly.
• Do not overload the print media sources. Ensure that the print media stack height does not exceed the maximum height indicated by the load-line labels in the tray.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.
• Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs with print media, try feeding one sheet at a time through the single sheet feeder.
• Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
• Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media source.
• Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you insert the print media when using the standard 250-sheet tray and the optional 250-sheet feeder. Also, the recommended print side should be face down when using the single sheet feeder.
• Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For more information, see "Storing Print Media."
• Do not remove the feeding tray during a print job.
• Push the tray in firmly after loading.
• Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached.

- Overtightening the guides may cause jams.

- Wipe the retard rollers in the tray or single sheet feeder with a cloth that is slightly dampened with water if jams caused by misfeeding paper occur frequently.

Identifying the Location of Paper Jams

CAUTION: Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may permanently damage the printer.

The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path.

Diagram of a printer with labeled parts including print, printer, and paper handling, showing internal components and assembly steps.

1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

2 Duplexer (2155cdn only)

3 F u s e r

4 Optional 250-Sheet Feeder

5 Single Sheet Feeder (SSF)

6 Standard 250-Sheet Tray

Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF

When a document jams while it passes through the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF), remove the jam according to the following procedure.

NOTE: To prevent document jams, use the document glass for thick, thin, or mixed documents.

NOTICE: Protect the drums of the Print Head Device (PHD) against bright light. If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes, print quality may deteriorate.

1 Remove the remaining documents from the ADF.

If the document is jammed in the paper feed area:

a Open the ADF cover.

3D mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and a green arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

b Lift the release lever 90 degrees and remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it to the right.

90°

If you find it difficult to pull the document:

c Remove the release roller assembly and remove the document by gently pulling it straight up.

Illustration of a hand holding a blue tool inside a mechanical device, with an inset showing the same tool being inserted (no text or symbols present)

d Insert the release roller assembly and press down the release lever.

Diagram of a mechanical assembly with two views showing internal components and a green arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

If the document is jammed in the paper exit area:

e Remove the jammed document from the document output tray.

Illustration of a printer with an open lid and internal components, showing no text or symbols.

f Close the ADF cover, and then load the documents back into the ADF.

Illustration of a printer with green arrows indicating file direction (no text or symbols present)

NOTE: Ensure that you adjust the document guides before printing a Legal-size document.

2 If you cannot see the jammed document or the jammed document do not move when you pulled, open the document cover.

3 Remove the document from the ADF feeder roller or the feed area by carefully pulling it to the right.

4 Close the document cover, and then load the documents back into the ADF.

Clearing Paper Jams From the SSF

NOTICE: Protect the drums of the Print Head Device (PHD) against bright light. If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes, print quality may deteriorate.

NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

1 Pull the jammed paper out of the single sheet feeder. If no jammed paper can be found or you are unable to remove the paper, go to the next step to remove the jammed paper from the inside of the printer.

Illustration of a printer with paper feed being inserted, showing paper sheet and printer top (no text or symbols)

2 Remove the standard 250-sheet tray from the printer, and then pull out the jammed paper remaining inside the printer. If no jammed paper can be found or you are unable to remove the paper, go to the next step to remove the jammed paper from the inside of the printer.

3D illustration of a printer and plastic tray with a green arrow indicating a process (no text or symbols)

Illustration of a printer with paper being inserted, showing internal components and a yellow lightning bolt (no text or symbols)

3 Push the side button to open the front cover.

Illustration of a hand pressing down on a printer's front panel with green arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

4 Open the belt unit until it stops and remove the jammed paper. Confirm that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the printer.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing a hand inserting a component into the paper (no text or symbols visible)

3D illustration of a printer's internal structure showing paper feeding into a machine with a yellow arrow indicating compression (no text or symbols present)

5 Close the belt unit, and push at the top of the unit until it clicks.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing paper feeding into a blue plastic component, with a green arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

6 Close the front cover.

Illustration of a blue industrial machine with a green arrow indicating a process or operation (no text or symbols present)

7 Insert the standard 250-sheet tray into the printer, and push until it stops.

3D illustration of a printer with a green arrow indicating print output (no text or symbols present)

NOTICE: Do not use excessive force on the tray. Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer.

Clearing Paper Jams From the Standard 250-Sheet Tray

NOTICE: Protect the drums of the Print Head Device (PHD) against bright light. If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes, print quality may deteriorate.

NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

1 Pull the standard 250-sheet tray out of the printer carefully. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front slightly, and remove it from the printer.

3D illustration of a printer with a blue plastic tray inserted into the base, showing internal components and no text or symbols.

2 Remove all the jammed and/or creased paper from the tray.

3D diagram of a mechanical device with internal components and a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

3 Pull the jammed paper out carefully to avoid tearing it. If you are still unable to remove the paper, go to the next step to remove the jammed paper from the inside of the printer.

Illustration of a printer with paper feed and a yellow lightning bolt indicating compression (no text or symbols)

4 Push the side button to open the front cover.

Illustration of a printer being inserted into a machine, with green arrows indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

5 Open the belt unit until it stops and remove the jammed paper. Confirm that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the printer.

Two-step illustration of a printer's internal processing, showing the open and closed views with a hand inserting a green arrow to a blue component (no text or symbols present)

6 Close the belt unit, and push at the top of the unit until it clicks.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing a blue internal component being inserted, with a green arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

7 Close the front cover.

Illustration of a blue industrial machine with a green arrow indicating a process or operation (no text or symbols present)

8 Insert the standard 250-sheet tray into the printer, and push until it stops.

3D illustration of a printer with a green arrow indicating print output (no text or symbols present)

NOTICE: Do not use excessive force on the tray. Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer.

Clearing Paper Jams From the Fuser

NOTICE: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the belt unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the belt unit may reduce print quality.

NOTICE: Protect the drums of the Print Head Device (PHD) against bright light. If the front cover remains open for more than three minutes, print quality may deteriorate.

NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

1 Turn off the printer and wait for 30 minutes.

2 Push the side button to open the front cover.

Illustration of a printer presser with green arrows indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

3 Open the belt unit.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing hands inserting a component into a machine (no text or symbols visible)

4 Lift the levers at both ends of the fuser, and remove the jammed paper. If you are still unable to remove the paper, go to the next step.

Illustration of a printer printing process with two circular insets showing the printer's internal structure and paper handling (no text or symbols present)

CAUTION: The fuser is hot. Do not touch it, doing so may cause burns. 5 Open the cover of the fuser and remove the jammed paper.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing paper being inserted into a machine, with a magnified inset highlighting the process (no text or symbols present)

6 Close the cover of the fuser and press down the levers at both ends of the fuser.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure with two green arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols present)

7 Confirm that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the printer, and then close the belt unit.

3D diagram of a printer internal structure with green arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

8 Close the front cover.

3D illustration of a printer with blue control panel and green arrow indicating process (no text or symbols)

Clearing Paper Jams From the Duplexer

NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

1 Push the side button to open the front cover.

Illustration of a printer presser with green arrows indicating press direction (no text or symbols)

2 Open the cover of the duplexer.
3 Remove the jammed paper from the duplexer.

3D diagram of a printer internal structure showing internal components and a green arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

4 Close the cover of the duplexer.
5 Close the front cover.

Illustration of a blue industrial machine with a green arrow indicating a process or operation (no text or symbols present)

Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder

NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.

1 Pull the optional 250-sheet feeder out of the printer carefully. Hold the feeder with both hands, and remove it from the printer.

NOTE: Paper in the optional 250-sheet feeder feeds to the printer from the front of the standard 250-sheet tray, therefore paper jammed in the standard 250-sheet tray can block the optional 250-sheet feeder in the printer, preventing you from opening it. Look for the jammed paper sequentially, starting with the optional 250-sheet feeder.

3D illustration of a printer with paper being inserted into a blue filing tray (no text or symbols visible)

2 Remove all jammed and/or creased paper from the feeder.

3D illustration of a computer floppy disk with a yellow arrow indicating compression or dislocation (no text or symbols)

3 Pull the jammed paper out carefully to avoid tearing it. If you are still unable to remove the paper, go to the next step to remove the jammed paper from the inside of the printer.

Illustration of a printer with paper feed and a yellow lightning bolt (no text or symbols)

4 Push the side button to open the front cover.

Illustration of a printer with a hand inserting a green arrow to the front panel (no text or symbols present)

5 Open the belt unit until it stops and remove the jammed paper. Confirm that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the printer.

Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing hand inserting a component into the paper (no text or symbols visible)

3D technical illustration of a printer internal structure with no visible text or symbols

6 Close the belt unit, and push at the top of the unit until it clicks.

3D illustration of a printer internal structure with hands inserting a component (no text or symbols visible)

7 Close the front cover.

3D rendering of a printer with blue control panel and green arrow indicating process (no text or symbols)

NOTE: If the paper jam message is not cleared after closing the front cover, pull out the standard 250-sheet tray and check if there is a jammed paper in the opening of the tray.

8 Insert the optional 250-sheet feeder into the printer, and push until it stops.

3D rendering of a printer with a blue plastic tray inserted, showing internal components and a green arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

NOTICE: Do not use excessive force on the tray. Doing so could damage the tray or the inside of the printer.

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Guide

Basic Printer Problems

Some printer problems can be easily resolved. If a problem occurs with your printer, check each of the following:

The power cable is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.

• The printer is turned on.
- The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.
- Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet are working.
- Optional memory is properly installed.

If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer. This often fixes the problem.

Display Problems

Problem Action
After the printer is turned on, the display on the operator panel is blank, keeps showing Please wait..., or the back light is not lit.	Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and turn on the printer.Self Test Message appears on the operator panel. When the test is completed, Ready is displayed.
Menu settings changed from the operator panel have no effect.	Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or the printer utilities are overriding the settings made on the operator panel.

Printing Problems

Problem Action
Job did not print or incorrect characters printed.	Ensure that the top menu appears on the operator panel before you send a job to print. Press the ☑Menu) button to return to the top menu.
	Ensure that the print media is loaded in the printer. Press the ☑ (Menu) button to return to the top menu.
	Verify that the printer is using the correct page description language (PDL).
	Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.
	Ensure that the correct USB or Ethernet cable is securely connected to the printer.
	Verify that the correct print media size is selected.
	If you are using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.
	Check the printer's interface from the Admin Menu. Determine the host interface you are using. Print a panel settings page to verify that the current interface settings are correct.
Print media misfeeds or multiple feeds occur in the standard 250-sheet tray or single sheet feeder.	Ensure that the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer. See "Supported Paper Types" for more information.
	Fan the print media before loading it in the standard 250-sheet tray.
	Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly.
	Ensure that the width and length guides of the print media sources are adjusted correctly.
	Ensure that the standard 250-sheet tray is securely inserted.
	Do not overload the tray.
	Do not force print media into the single sheet feeder when you load it; otherwise, it may skew or buckle.
	Ensure that the print media is not curled.
	Face the recommended print side up or down appropriately for the type of print media you are using. See "Loading Print Media in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder" for more information.
	Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding improves.
	Do not mix print media types.
	Do not mix reams of print media.
	Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the print media.
	Load print media only when the tray is empty.
	Wipe the retard rollers in the standard 250-sheet tray or single sheet feeder with a cloth moistened with water.
The envelope is creased after printed.	Make sure that the envelope is loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray or single sheet feeder as instructed in "Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder" or "Loading an Envelope in the SSF."
Page breaks in unexpected places.	Increase the value for Time-Out on the operator panel, the Tool Box, or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Print media does not stack neatly in the output bin.	Turn the print media stack over in the tray.
Cannot perform manual duplex printing.	Select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from the Duplex menu on the Paper/Output tab in the printer driver.
Cannot print from the standard 250-sheet tray because the print media in the tray is curled.	Load the print media into the single sheet feeder.

Print Quality Problems

NOTE: Some of the following procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web Tool, see "Understanding the Tool Box Menus" and "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."

• The output is too light
- Toner smears or print comes off
- Random spots/Blurred images
• The entire output is blank
• Streaks appear on the output
• Part or the entire output is black
- Pitched color dots
- Vertical blanks
- Ghosting
• Light-induced fatigue
- Fog
- Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)
- Jagged characters
- B a n d i n g

• Auger mark
• Wrinkled/Stained paper
• Damage on the leading edge of paper

The output is too light

ABC DEF

Action Yes No
1 The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the amount of toner left in each toner cartridge.a Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status Monitor.b Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 2.
2 If you are using non-Dell brand toner cartridges, disable the Non-Dell Toner option.a Launch the Tool Box, and click Non-Dell Toner on the Printer Maintenance tab.b Ensure that the On check box is not selected.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3.
3 Disable the Toner Saving Mode in the printer driver.a On the Advanced tab, ensure that the Toner Saving Mode check box is not selected.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4.

Action Yes No

4 The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to thick.

a On the Paper/Output tab, change the Paper Type setting.

Does this solve your problem?

5 Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer. Does this solve your problem?

6 Ensure that the eight yellow ribbons are correctly removed from the Print Head Device (PHD) unit. See "Removing the Print Head Device (PHD) Ribbons" and "Installing a PHD Unit." If not, remove the ribbons. Does this solve your problem?

7 Ensure that the developer motor functions properly.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Machine Check on the Diagnosis tab.
b Select Main Motor Operation Check from the drop-down list box and click the Start button.
c Click the Play of Sound button to check the motor sound.

Does the motor function properly?

The task is complete.

Go to action 5.

The task is complete.

Go to action 6.

The task is complete.

Go to action 7.

Go to action 8. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No

8 Ensure that the dispense motor for each toner cartridge functions properly.

Go to action 9. Contact Dell.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Machine Check on the Diagnosis tab.
b Select Dispense Motor Check (Yellow), Dispense Motor Check (Magenta), Dispense Motor Check (Cyan), or Dispense Motor Check (Black) from the drop-down list box, and click the Start button.
c Click the Play of Sound button to check the motor sound.
d Repeat steps b and c to perform Dispense Motor Check for the rest of the toner cartridges.

NOTE: You can perform Dispense Motor Check for CMYK in any order you desire.

Does the dispense motor function properly?

9 If printing many low density images, execute the Toner Refresh Mode.

The task is complete.

Go to action 10.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Refresh Mode on the Diagnosis tab.
b Click the Yellowbutton under Toner Refresh Mode.
c Repeat step b for Magenta, Cyan, and Black buttons.

CAUTION: Using the Refresh Mode consumes extra toner.

d After you complete the Tone r Refresh Mode, select Chart Print from the list on the Diagnosis tab.

e Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button.

The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

Action Yes No

10 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.

a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."
b After you replace the PHD unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button.

The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Toner smears or print comes off

ABC DEF

Action Yes No

1 The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to thick.

a On the Paper/Output tab, change the Paper Type setting.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

2 Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

Action Yes No

3 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.

a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."

b After you replace the PHD unit, test print your document again.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Random spots/Blurred images

ABC DEF

Action Yes No

1 Ensure that the toner cartridges are installed correctly. See "Installing a Toner Cartridge." Does this solve your problem?

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

2 Ensure that the PHD unit is installed correctly. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

Does this solve your problem?

Action Yes No

3 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.

a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."

b After you replace the PHD unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

c Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button. The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

The entire output is blank

Blank white page corner with a small corner detail (no text or symbols)

Action Yes No

1 The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the amount of toner left in each toner cartridge.

a Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status Monitor.

b Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.

Does this solve your problem?

2 If you are using non-Dell brand toner cartridges, disable the Non-Dell Toner option.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Non-Dell Toner on the Printer Maintenance tab.

b Ensure that the On check box is not selected.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

Action Yes No
3 Disable the Toner Saving Mode in the printer driver.a On the Advanced tab, ensure that the Toner Saving Mode check box is not selected.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4.
4 The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to thick.a On the Paper/Output tab, change the Paper Type setting.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 5.
5 Verify that the correct print media is being used.See "Supported Paper Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 6.
6 Ensure that eight yellow ribbons are correctly removed from the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit." If not, remove the ribbons.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 7.
7 Ensure that the developer motor functions properly.a Launch the Tool Box, and click Machine Check on the Diagnosis tab.b Select Main Motor Operation Check from the drop-down list box and click the Start button.c Click the Play of Sound button to check the motor sound.Does the motor function properly?	Go to action 8. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No

8 Ensure that the dispense motor for each toner cartridge functions properly.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Machine Check on the Diagnosis tab.
b Select Dispense Motor Check (Yellow), Dispense Motor Check (Magenta), Dispense Motor Check (Cyan), or Dispense Motor Check (Black) from the drop-down list box, and click the Start button.
c Click the Play of Sound button to check the motor sound.
d Repeat steps b and c to perform Dispense Motor Check for the rest of the toner cartridges.

NOTE: You can perform Dispense Motor Check for CMYK in any order you desire.

Does the dispense motor function properly?

9 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.

a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."

b After you replace the PHD unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button.

The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

Go to action 9. Contact Dell.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Streaks appear on the output

ABC DEF

Action Yes No

1 The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the amount of toner left in each toner cartridge. The task is complete. Go to action 2.

a Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status Monitor.
b Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.

Does this solve your problem?

2 If you are using non-Dell brand toner cartridges, disable the Non-Dell Toner option. The task is complete. Go to action 3.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Non-Dell Toner on the Printer Maintenance tab. b Ensure that the On check box is not selected.

Does this solve your problem?

3 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit. The task is Contact Dell.

a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."

b After you replace the PHD unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button.

The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

Part or the entire output is black

Two solid color blocks, one white and one black, with a corner paper corner (no text or symbols)

Action Yes No

1 Ensure Output Color is set to Color (Auto) in the printer driver.

The task is Go to action 2. complete.

a On the Graphics tab, ensure that the Output Color is set to Color (Auto).

Does this solve your problem?

2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.

a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."

The task is Contact Dell. complete.

b After you replace the PHD unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button.

The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

Pitched color dots

ABC DEF

Action Yes No

1 Locate the cause of the problem using the Pitch Configuration Chart.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

b Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button. The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.

c Compare the pitch of the color spots on your output with that on the Pitch Configuration Chart, and locate the cause of the problem.

Is the cause of the problem located?

Proceed to the action corresponding to the location of the problem: Contact Dell.

- PHD unit - 2

• Fuser - Contact Dell and replace the fuser.

• Main unit of the printer - Contact Dell.

2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.

a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."

b After you replace the PHD unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

c Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Vertical blanks

A、B、C D、E=

Action Yes No

1 Ensure the light path is not covered.

a Remove the PHD unit, and keep it in the dark place. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit."

b Check the light path, and then remove the shielding.

c Re-install the PHD unit. See "Installing a PHD Unit."

d Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

e Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button. The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.

a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."

b After you replace the PHD unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

c Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button. The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is Go to action 2. complete.

The task is complete. Contact Dell.

Ghosting

Action Yes No
1 Locate the cause of the problem using the Ghost Configuration Chart.	Proceed to the action corresponding to the type of ghosting.	Contact Dell.
a Launch the Tool Box, and clickChart Print on theDiagnosistab.
b Click theGhost Configuration Chart button.	Positive ghost - 2a
The Ghost Configuration Chart is printed.	Negative ghost - 2b
Is the type of the problem identified?
2a Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.
a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."
b After you replace the PHD unit, clickChart Print on theDiagnosistab.
c Click theGhost Configuration Chart button.
The Ghost Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
2b If you are using non-recommended print media, use the print media recommended for the printer.	Go to action 3.	Go to action 2a.
Does this solve your problem?

Action Yes No

3 Adjust the transfer bias.

a On the operator panel, press the ☐ (Menu) button and select System Setup→ Admin Menu→Maintenance→ Adjust BTR.

b Adjust the setting for the type of print media being used.

c Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

d Click the Ghost Configuration Chart button. The Ghost Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is Contact Dell. complete.

Light-induced fatigue

ABC DEF

Action Yes No

1 Check the light fatigue pattern using the Pitch Configuration Chart.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

b Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button. The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.

Does the pattern on the output match with that on the Pitch Configuration Chart?

Go to action 2. Contact Dell.

Action Yes No
2 Execute the PHD Refresh Mode.	The task is complete.	Go to action 3.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Refresh Mode on the Diagnosis tab.
b After you start the Drum Refresh Mode, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button.
The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?
3 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit." Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.

Fog

A B C D E F

Action Yes No
1 Execute the PHD Refresh Mode.	The task is complete.	Go to action 2.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Refresh Mode on the Diagnosis tab.
b After you start the Drum Refresh Mode, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button.
The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.
Does this solve your problem?

Action Yes No

2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.

a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."
b After you replace the PHD unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
c Click the 4 Colors Configuration Chart button.

The 4 Colors Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is Contact Dell. complete.

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)

A B C D E F

Action Yes No

1 If the printer is installed in a high altitude location, set the altitude of the location.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust Altitude on the Printer Maintenance tab.

b Select the value close to the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

Does this solve your problem?

2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."

Does this solve your problem?

The task is Go to action 2. complete.

The task is Contact Dell. complete.

Jagged characters

ABC DEF

Action Yes No
1	Set Screen to Fineness in the printer driver.a On the Advanced tab, set Screen under Items: to Fineness.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 2.
2	Set Print Mode to High Quality in the printer driver.a On the Graphics tab, select High Quality from Print Mode.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3.
3	Enable Bitmap Smoothing in the printer driver.a On the Advanced tab, set Bitmap Smoothing under Items: to On.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4.
4	Enable Bitmap Text Smoothing in the printer driver.a On the Advanced tab, set Bitmap Text Smoothing under Items: to On.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 5.
5	If using a downloaded font, ensure that the font is recommended for the printer, operating system, and the application being used.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.

Banding

ABC DEF

Action Yes No

1 Locate the cause of the problem using the Pitch Configuration Chart.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

b Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button. The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.

Is the cause of the problem located?

Proceed to the Action contact Dell. corresponding to the location of the problem:

- PHD unit - 2

- Fuser - Contact Dell and replace the fuser.

• Main unit of the printer - Contact Dell.

2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.

a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."

b After you replace the PHD unit, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

c Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button. The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is Contact Dell. complete.

Auger mark

ABC DEF

Action Yes No

1 Locate the cause of the problem using the Pitch Configuration Chart. Go to action 2. Contact Dell.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

b Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button. The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.

Does the output match with the pattern for auger mark?

2 E x e c u t e t h e Clean DeveIdpeta task is Go to action 3.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Clean Developer on the Diagnosis tab.

complete.

b Click the Start button.

c After you execute the Clean Developer, click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.

d Click the Pitch Configuration Chart button.

The Pitch Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

3 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit. The task is Complete. Contact Dell. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit"

Does this solve your problem?

Wrinkled/Stained paper

Simple line drawing of a three-tiered rectangular prism (no text or symbols)

Action Yes No
1 Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper Types." If not, use the print media recommended for the printer.Does this solve your problem?		The task is complete.	If printing on an envelope, go to action 2a.If printing on print media other than envelopes, go to action 2b.
2a Check the wrinkle. Is the wrinkle within 30 mm of the four edges of the envelope?		This type of wrinkle is considered normal. Your printer is not at fault.	If the envelope is 220 mm or longer (C5 or Envelope #10), go to action 3a.If the envelope is shorter than 220 mm (Monarch or DL), go to action 3a or 3b.

2b Execute the Paper Wrinkle Check Mode.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Paper Wrinkle Check Mode on the Diagnosis tab.

b Click the Start button.

Is the paper wrinkled?

Contact Dell. Contact Dell to replace fuser.

Action Yes No
3a Load the envelopes in the standard 250-sheet tray in the short edge feed orientation with the flap closed and print side up. For details, see "Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder." Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.
3b Load the envelopes in the standard 250-sheet tray in the long edge feed orientation with the flap open and print side up. For details, see "Monarch or DL." Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.

Damage on the leading edge of paper

ABC DEF

Action Yes No
1 When you use the SSF, reverse the paper and then try again.When you use any of the trays, change the paper and then try again.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	(SSF)Go to action 2.(trays)Contact Dell.
2 Change the paper with another one and then try again.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3.
3 Use any of other tray in place of the SSF.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.

Jam/Alignment Problems

NOTE: Some of the following procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web Tool, see "Understanding the Tool Box Menus" and "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."

• The top and side margins are incorrect
• Color registration is out of alignment
- Images are skewed
• Standard 250-Sheet Tray Misfeed Jam
- SSF Misfeed Jam
- Optional 250-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam
- Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM)
- Exit Jam (Exit Sensor Off JAM)
- Standard 250-Sheet Tray/Optional 250-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam
- SSF Multi-feed Jam

The top and side margins are incorrect

ABC DEF

Action Yes No

1 Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the application being used.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Color registration is out of alignment

ABC DEF

Action Yes No

1 Execute auto color registration adjustment.

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

a On the operator panel, press the ☑ Menu) button and select System Setup→ Admin Menu→Maintenance→Color Reg Adjustment→Auto Correct→ Yes.

OR

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Color Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab.

b Click the Start button under Auto Correct.

Does this solve your problem?

2 Do you have a spare PHD unit? Go to action 3a. Go to action 3b.

3a Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

a Replace the PHD unit. See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit" and "Installing a PHD Unit."

b Launch the Tool Box, and click Color Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab.

c Click the Start button under Print Color Regi Chart.

The Color Regi Configuration Chart is printed.

Does this solve your problem?

Action Yes No

3b Print the Color Regi Configuration Chart and manually correct the color registration.

a Launch the Tool Box, and click Color Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab.

b Click the Start button under Print Color Regi Chart.

The Color Regi Configuration Chart is printed.

c Identify the offset values from the chart and enter them in Color Registration Adjustment (Process) and Color Registration Adjustment (Left) See "Adjusting Color Registration" for details.

d Click the Apply New Settings button.

e Click the Start button under Print Color Regi Chart to print the Color Regi Configuration Chart again.

Does this solve your problem?

The task is Contact Dell. complete.

Images are skewed

ABC DEF

Action Yes No

1 Adjust the paper guides properly. Does this solve your problem?

The task is Contact Dell. complete.

Standard 250-Sheet Tray Misfeed Jam

Action Yes No
1 Ensure that the standard 250-sheet tray is properly inserted.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Proceed to the action corresponding to the type of the print media being used:Thick - 2aThin - 2bCoated - 2cEnvelope - 2dIf performing manual duplex printing, go to action 2e.If using paper other than the above or if not performing manual duplex printing, go to action 2f.
2a Use thick paper that is 216 g/m^2 or less.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3a.
2b Use thin paper that is 60 g/m^2 or more.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3a.
2c Load coated paper one sheet at a time.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3b.
2d Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the Standard 250-sheet tray as instructed in "Loading Envelopes in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder."Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3c.
2c Ensure that the print media is not curled.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3a.
2f Is the print media damp? Go to action 3d. Go to action 3a.
3a Fan the print media.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3b.
3b Wipe the retard roller in the standard 250-sheet tray with a cloth moistened with water.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4b.
3c If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use another envelope.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3a.
3d Turn over the print media.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4a.
4a Use print media that is not damp.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3a.
4b Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.
1 Ensure that the SSF is properly inserted.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Proceed to the action corresponding to the type of the print media being used:Thick - 2aThin - 2bCoated - 2cEnvelope - 2dIf performing manual duplex printing, go to action 2e.If using paper other than the above or if not performing manual duplex printing, go to action 2f.
2a Use thick paper that is 216 g/m^2 or less.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3a.
2b Use thin paper that is 60 g/m^2 or more.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3a.
2c Load coated paper one sheet at a time.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3b.
2d Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the SSF as instructed in "Loading an Envelope in the SSF."Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3c.
2e Ensure that the print media is not curled.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3a.

SSF Misfeed Jam

Action Yes No

2f Is the print media damp? Go to action 3d. Go to action 3a.
3a Fan the print media.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3b.
3b Wipe the retard roller in the SSF tray with a cloth moistened with water.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4b.
3c If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use another envelope.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3a.
3d Turn over the print media.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4a.
4a Use print media that is not damp.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 3a.
4b Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.

Optional 250-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam

Action Yes No
1 Ensure that the optional 250-sheet feeder is properly inserted.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 2.
2 Ensure the right hand cover is closed.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Proceed to the action corresponding to the type of the print media being used:Thick - 3aThin - 3bManual Dup - 3cOthers - 3d
3a Use thick paper that is 105 g/m^2 or less.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4a.
3b Use thin paper that is 60 g/m^2 or more.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4a.
3c Ensure that the print media is not curled.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4a.
3d Is the print media damp? Go to action 4c. Go to action 5.
4a Fan the print media.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4b.
4b Wipe the retard roller in the optional 250-sheet feeder with a cloth moistened with water.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.
4c Turn over the print media.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4a.
5 Use print media that is not damp.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4a.

Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM)

Action Yes No
1 Ensure that the PHD unit is installed correctly.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 2.
2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.See "Replacing the Print Head Device (PHD) Unit."Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.

Exit Jam (Exit Sensor Off JAM)

Action Yes No

1 Ensure the fuser is installed correctly.Does this solve your problem?

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Standard 250-Sheet Tray/Optional 250-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam

Action Yes No
1 Ensure that the tray is properly inserted.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	If using coated paper, go to action 2.If using other type of print media, go to action 3.
2 Load coated paper one sheet at a time.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4.
3 Use print media that is not damp.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 4.
4 Fan the print media.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 5.
5 Wipe the retard roller in the tray where the multi-feed occurred with a cloth moistened with water.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.

SSF Multi-feed Jam

1 Ensure the media type you are using.	-	-
If using coated paper, go to action 2.
If using other type of print media, go to action 3.
2 Load coated paper one sheet at a time.	The task is complete.	Go to action 4.
Does this solve your problem?
3 Use print media that is not damp.	The task is complete.	Go to action 4.
Does this solve your problem?
4 Fan the print media.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Go to action 5.
5 Wipe the retard roller in the tray where the multi-feed occurred with a cloth moistened with water.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.

Noise

Action Yes No
1 To specify the cause of the noise, perform the Auto Registration Adjustment.Does this solve your problem?	Go to action 2. Go to action 3.
2 Replace the PHD unit if you have a spare unit.Does this solve your problem?	The task is complete.	Contact Dell.
3 Replace the toner cartridge (K). See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."	The task is complete. (The toner cartridge (K) you are using has been damaged.Replace it with a new one.)	Go to action 4.
4 Replace the toner cartridge (Y). See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."	The task is complete. (The toner cartridge (Y) you are using has been damaged.Replace it with a new one.)	Go to action 5.
5 Replace the toner cartridge (M). See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."	The task is complete. (The toner cartridge (M) you are using has been damaged. Replace it with a new one.)	Go to action 6.
6 Replace the toner cartridge (C). See "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."	The task is complete. (The toner cartridge (C) you are using has been damaged. Replace it with a new one.)	Contact Dell.

Copy Problem

Problem Action
A document loaded in the ADF cannot be copied.	Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.
	Ensure that the release lever is properly positioned.

Fax Problems

Problem Action
The printer is not working, there is no display and the buttons are not working.	Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
	Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.
No dial tone sounds. Check that the phone line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone Line."
The numbers stored in the memory do not dial correctly.	Ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory correctly.
	Print a Phone Book list.
The document does not feed into the printer.	Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it in correctly. Check that the document is of the right size, not too thick or thin.
	Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.
Faxes are not received automatically.	The FAX mode should be selected.
	Ensure that there is paper in the paper tray.
	Check to see if the display shows Memory Full.
	If the time interval specified for the following features is too long, change the time interval shorter such as 30 seconds.
	• Auto Rec Fax
	• Auto Rec TEL/FAX
	• Auto Rec Ans/FAX
	Diagnose the FAX connection. See "Diagnosing the Fax Connection."
The printer does not send faxes.	Sending should show up on the display.
	Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
	Check the dialing type for Tone or Pulse.
	Ensure that the document is loaded in the ADF or on the document feeder glass.
	Diagnose the FAX connection. See "Diagnosing the Fax Connection."
The incoming fax has blank spaces or is received in poor quality.	Check your printer by making a copy.
	The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner cartridge, see "Replacing the Toner Cartridges."
	A noisy phone line can cause line errors. Set the fax modem speed to a slower speed.
	The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched.	The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document jam.
There are lines on the documents you send.	Check your scan glass for marks and clean it. See "Cleaning the Scanner."
The printer dials a number, but the connection with another fax machine fails.	The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and ask her/him to sort out the problem.
Documents are not stored in the memory.	There may not be enough memory to store the document. If the display shows a Memory Full message, delete any documents you no longer need from the memory and then restore the document, or wait for the job in progress (e.g., a fax transmission or reception) to complete.
Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages, with a small strip of text at the top.	You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. See "Print Media Guidelines."
The printer will not send or receive faxes.	Ensure that the country code is set correctly. Press the ☑ (Menu) button and select System Setup→Admin Menu→Fax Settings→Country.
	Check the dialing type for Tone or Pulse.
	Check that the cables are connected properly.
	If the telephone line cord is connected to the printer via any device such as an answering machine and a computer, remove the device and directly connect the telephone line cord to the printer.
An error often occurs during a fax transmission or reception.	Reduce the modem speed. the ☑ (Menu) button and select System Setup→Admin Menu→Fax Settings→Modem Speed.
The printer receive faxes, but it does not print.	Check the toner level.
	Ensure that there is paper in the paper tray.
	Ensure that Sent Fax Fwd is set to off.
	Ensure that Junk Fax Setup is set to off.
	Ensure that Secure Receive Set is set to disabled.
	Execute Reset Defaults.

Scanning Problems

Problem Action
The scanner does not work. Ensure that you place the document to be scanned facing down from the document feeder glass, or facing up in the ADF.
Document misfeeds or multiple feeds occur in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).	Check whether the ADF roller assembly is installed properly.
	Ensure the document's paper type meets the specifications for the printer. See "Supported Paper Types" for more information.
	Check whether the document is properly loaded in the ADF.
	Ensure that the document guides are adjusted properly.
	Ensure that the number of document sheets do not exceed the maximum capacity of the ADF.
	Ensure that the document is not curled.
	Fan the document well before loading it in the ADF.
Vertical stripes appear on the output when scanned using the ADF.	Clean the ADF glass.
A smear appears at the same location on the output when scanned using the document glass.	Clean the document glass.
Images are skewed. Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the ADF or on the document glass.
Diagonal lines appear jagged when scanned using the ADF.	If the document uses thick media, try scanning it from the document glass.
Message appears on your computer screen:	There may be a copying or printing job in progress. When the current job is complete, try the job again.
• "Device can’t be set to the H/W mode you want."	The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.
• "Port is being used by another program."	The cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
• "Port is Disabled."	The scanner driver is not installed or an operating environment is not set up properly.
• "Scanner is busy receiving or printing data. When the current job is completed, try again."	Ensure that the port is properly connected and the power is turned on. Then restart your computer.
• "Invalid handle."	Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.
• "Scanning has failed."

The printer does not properly transfer scan data to a specified destination via the Scan to E-mail or Scan to Network feature.

Check if the following settings have been set correctly on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Scan to Network

Check the following settings under Address Book→ Server Address:

• Server Address
• Share Name
• Server Path
• Login Name
• Login Password

Scan to E-mail

Check the following setting under Address Book→E-Mail Address:

- Address

Cannot scan using WIA on a Windows Server 2003 computer.	Enable WIA on the computer.To enable WIA:1 Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then click Services.2 Right-click Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), and then click Start .
Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 computer.	Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.To install Desktop Experience:1 Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then click Server Manager.2 Under Features Summary, click Add Features.3 Select the Desktop Experience check box, click Next, and then click Install.4 Restart the computer.

Problems With Installed Optional Accessories

If an option does not operate correctly following installation or stops working:

• Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer. If this does not fix the problem, unplug the printer, and check the connection between the option and the printer.
• Print the system settings report to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not listed, re-install it. See "Printing System Settings Report."
• Ensure the option is selected in the printer driver you are using.

The following table lists printer's option and corrective action for related problem. If the suggested corrective action does not correct the problem, call customer service.

Problem Action
250-sheet feeder	·Ensure the 250-sheet feeder is correctly installed on the printer. Re-install the feeder. See "Removing the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder" and "Installing the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder."·Ensure the print media is loaded correctly. See "Loading Print Media in the Standard 250-Sheet Tray and the Optional 250-Sheet Feeder" for more information.
Memory module	·Ensure the memory module is securely connected to the memory connector.
Wireless printer adapter	·Ensure the wireless printer adapter is securely inserted to the correct slot.

Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems

Problem Action
Unable to retrieve the Address Book data from the printer on the Address Book Editor.	Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.
	Ensure that the power of your printer is on.
	Ensure that the scanner driver is installed on your computer. (The Address Book Editor retrieves the Address Book data via the scanner driver when the printer is connected using a USB cable.)
The TWAIN driver cannot connect to the printer.	Check that the USB or Ethernet cable is connected properly.
	If using the network connection, check that IP address of the printer is set correctly. To check the IP address, see "Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver."
	Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on, reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on again.
	If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application, and then try scanning again.
The scanner driver has not been registered on your computer and cannot be accessed from ScanButton Manager.	Install the scanner driver. If the scanner driver is installed, uninstall it and then re-install it again. After the installation of the scanner driver is completed, re-install the ScanButton Manager.
Failed to scan your document on the printer via ScanButton Manager.	Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the USB cable.
	Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on, reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on again.
	If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application, and then try scanning again.
	Network connection cannot be used. Connect with the USB cable.
	Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel→Add or Remove Programs (Programs and Features in Windows Vista and Windows 7) on your computer and then re-install it again.
Failed to create an image file via ScanButton Manager.	Ensure there is sufficient space in your hard disk.
	Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel→Add or Remove Programs on your computer and then re-install it again.
Failed to initialize ScanButton Manager.	Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel→Add or Remove Programs on your computer and then re-install it again.
Failed to execute ScanButton Manager.	Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel→Add or Remove Programs on your computer and then re-install it again.
An unexpected error occurred on ScanButton Manager.	Uninstall ScanButton Manager from Control Panel→Add or Remove Programs on your computer and then re-install it again.

Other Problems

Problem Action
Condensation has occurred inside the printer.	This usually occurs within several hours after you heat the room in winter. This also occurs when the printer is operating in a location where relative humidity reaches 85% or more. Adjust the humidity or relocate the printer to an appropriate environment.
"CTD Sensor Error Error 009-340 Code:xx Restart Printer","Check CTD Unit 092-910 Clean CTD Sensor",or "Check CTD Unit 092-310" is displayed.	Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the CTD Sensor."
"No Documents" is displayed on the operator panel when you are selecting a file for Printing from USB Memory feature.	Confirm that there are files with the supported file formats (PDF, TIFF, or JPEG) in the USB memory.
	If the target file is in a deep hierarchy in the USB memory, move the file to the root directory on your computer.
	Shorten the target file name in the USB memory on your computer, and try printing again.
"Authentication error has occurred. The account is not registered. Please contact the system administrator. 016-757" is displayed on the Status Monitor.	Contact your system administrator.
"Function unavailable. It is a function that cannot be used. Please contact the system administrator. 016-758" is displayed on the Status Monitor.	Contact your system administrator.
"Printable page limit reached. Printable page limit reached, cannot print. Please contact the system administrator. 016-759" is displayed on the Status Monitor.	Contact your system administrator.
"Multifunction printer error. Check the PHD unit and the Toner Cartridge. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. 093-919" is displayed on the Status Monitor.	Replace the toner cartridge of the color displayed on the operator panel.
	Replace the PHD unit.
	Contact Customer Support.
"Multifunction printer error. Check the PHD unit and the Toner Cartridge. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. 093-920" is displayed on the Status Monitor.	Replace the toner cartridge of the color displayed on the operator panel.
	Replace the PHD unit.
	Contact Customer Support.
"Multifunction printer error. Check the PHD unit and the Toner Cartridge. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. 093-921" is displayed on the Status Monitor.	Replace the toner cartridge of the color displayed on the operator panel.
	Replace the PHD unit.
	Contact Customer Support.
"Multifunction printer error. Check the PHD unit and the Toner Cartridge. Contact customer support if this failure is repeated. 093-922" is displayed on the Status Monitor.	Replace the toner cartridge of the color displayed on the operator panel.
	Replace the PHD unit.
	Contact Customer Support.
"An internal temperature of the printer became a high temperature. 042-700" is displayed on the Status Monitor.	Please wait for a while until falling in temperature.

Contacting Service

When you call for printer service, be prepared to describe the problem you are experiencing or the error message that appears.

You need to know the model type and service tag of your printer. See the label located inside the side door of your printer.

Appendix

Appendix

Dell™ Technical Support Policy

Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system, software program and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is available at Dell Support. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase.

Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).

Online Services

You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites:

www.dell.com
www.dell.com/ap (Asian/Pacific countries only)
www.dell.com/jp (Japan only)
www.euro.dell.com (Europe only)
www.dell.com/la (Latin American and Caribbean countries)
www.dell.ca (Canada only) 

You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e-mail addresses:

- Dell Support websites
support.dell.com
support.jp.dell.com (Japan only)
support.euro.dell.com (Europe only) 

- Dell Support e-mail addresses [e-mail] [e-mail] [e-mail] (Latin America and Caribbean countries only) [e-mail] (Asian/Pacific countries only)

- Dell Marketing and Sales e-mail addresses [e-mail] (Asian/Pacific countries only) [e-mail] (Canada only)

- Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) ftp.dell.com

Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password.

Warranty and Return Policy

Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, see support.dell.com.

Recycling Information

It is recommended that customers dispose of their used computer hardware, monitors, printers, and other peripherals in an environmentally sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products, components, and/or materials.

For specific information on Dell's worldwide recycling programs, see www.dell.com/recyclingworldwide.

Contacting Dell

You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region on the WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the requested details to access help tools and information.

You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:

- World Wide Web

www.dell.com

www.dell.com/ap(Asian/Pacific countries only)

www.dell.com/jp (Japan only)

www.euro.dell.com (Europe only)

www.dell.com/la(Latin American and Caribbean countries)

www.dell.ca (Canada only)

- Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)

ftp.dell.com

Log in as user: anonymous, and use your email address as your password.

• Electronic Support Service

[e-mail]

[e-mail]

[e-mail] (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)

[e-mail] (Asian/Pacific countries only)

support.jp.dell.com (Japan only)

support.euro.dell.com (Europe only)

• Electronic Quote Service

[e-mail] (Asian/Pacific countries only)

[e-mail] (Canada only)

Index

Symbols

(All Clear) button, 286

(Back) button, 287

(Backspace) button, 286

(Cancel) button, 286

(Color Mode) button, 286

(Contacts) button, 286

(Copy) button, 285

(Fax) button, 285

(Menu) button, 287

(Redial / Pause) button, 286

(Scan) button, 287

(Set) button, 286

(Speed Dial) button, 286

(Start) button, 286

Numerics

1000BASE-T Full-Duplex, 223

100BASE-TX Full-Duplex, 223

100BASE-TX Half-Duplex, 223

10BASE-T Full-Duplex, 223

10BASE-T Half-Duplex, 223

2 Sided, 183, 186, 191, 203

2Sided, 429, 431, 453, 459

4 Colors Configuration Chart, 464

802.1x, 220, 243

A

A4, 270

A5, 270

About printer, 39

Access List, 244

Address Book, 164, 170, 194, 248

Address Book Editor, 560

Address Books, 561

ADF glass, 642

Ad-Hoc, 236

Adjust Altitude, 192, 214, 425, 442

Adjust BTR, 191, 210, 513

Adjust Fuser, 192, 210, 514

Adjusting color registration, 643

Adjusting the Language, 309

Admin Menu, 471

Administrator Account, 235

Alert Tone, 181, 196, 423, 436

Alignment Chart, 464

All Tones, 181, 196

Altitude, 607

Answer Machine/Fax, 205

Appendix, 739

Apply New Settings, 172

Asset Tag Number, 162, 178

Assigning IP address, 103

Audio Tone, 435

Authenticate Error Trap, 234

Auto, 431

Auto Clear Alert, 436

Auto Clear Alert Tone, 181, 196, 423

Auto Correct, 211, 441

Auto Expo. Level, 428, 430, 451, 455

Auto Exposure, 185, 190, 202, 208, 428, 430, 451, 455, 540, 547

Auto Exposure Level, 185, 190, 202, 208

Auto IP, 487

Auto Log Print, 181, 196, 424, 437, 506

Auto Rec Ans/Fax, 431, 460, 491

Auto Rec Fax, 431, 460, 490

Auto Rec Fax/Tel, 431, 460

Auto Rec Tel/Fax, 491

Auto Receive Answer/Fax, 188, 205

Auto Receive Fax, 188, 205

Auto Receive Tel/Fax, 188, 205

Auto Reg Adjust, 515

Auto Registration Adjustment, 192, 211, 425, 441

Auto Reset, 180, 195, 422, 434

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF), 40-41, 660

Avoiding jam, 291, 659

B

B&W / Color LED, 286

B5, 270

Banner Sheet, 437

Banner Sheet Insert Position, 182, 196, 424

Banner Sheet Specify Tray, 182, 196, 424

Base memory, 605

Base Tone, 181, 196, 423, 436

Basic Information, 222

Basic printer problem, 685

Belt unit, 41

Bitmapped font, 583

Black & White Button, 190, 208

Blue plug, 41, 95

Bonjour (mDNS), 219, 223

BOOTP, 487

C

C5, 270

Cable, 607

Canceling a print job, 292

Canceling print job From your computer, 293

Carbonless copy paper, 263

CCP, 263

Certificate Details, 241-242

Change printer settings, 306

Changing the settings of menu item, 172

Clean Developer, 212, 467

Clear Storage, 213

Clearing jam, 659

From ADF, 661

From duplexer, 676

From fuser, 672

From optional 250-sheet feeder, 677

From SSF, 664

From standard 250-sheet tray, 668

Clock Settings, 192

Coated, 191-192, 210-211, 514-515

Coated Thick, 191-192, 210-211, 514-515

Collated, 183, 185, 201, 428, 449

Color, 185, 190-191, 201, 208, 427, 429, 431, 448, 454, 458

Color Balance, 428-429, 452

Color Button, 190, 208

Color Button Set, 454

Color Button Set (Black & White Button), 429

Color Button Set (Color Button), 430

Color Mode, 466

Color Mode Limitation, 247

Color Reg Adjust, 515

Color Regi Chart, 212

Color Registration Adjustments, 211-212

Color registration chart, 643

Color Saturation, 185, 202, 428, 451, 540

Color Test Page, 194, 427, 470

ColorCount (Limit), 247

ColorTrack Error Report, 193, 246, 424, 438

ColorTrack Mode, 193, 246

Community Name, 232-233

Completed Jobs, 163, 179

Confidential jobs, 531

Configure 802.1x, 244

configuring wireless adapter, 69

Connecting local printer, 92

Connecting printer, 91

Connecting to the Network, 94

Connection specification, 91, 607

Connection type, 91, 607

Conserving supplies, 613

Contact Dell Support at, 165, 171

Contact Person, 169

Contacting service, 732

Contrast, 190, 208, 430, 455, 546

Control board, 41

Control board cover, 41

Control Panel, 435

Control Panel Tone, 195, 422

Copy Color Balance, 186, 202

Copy Completed, 435

Copy Completed Tone, 181, 423

Copy Defaults, 185, 427

Copy Printer Settings, 164, 170, 245

Copy Printer Settings Report, 245

Copy Settings, 186

Country, 189, 207, 433, 463, 499

Cover, 177

Covers, 191-192, 210-211, 514-515

Covers Thick, 191-192, 210-211, 514-515

Cumulative Color Page Count, 247

Cumulative Monochrome Page Count, 248

Custom Reduce/Enlarge, 202, 450

Custom Size - X, 182, 197

Custom Size - Y, 182, 197

D

Data LED, 285

Date & Time, 425

Date Format, 192, 425, 439

Default Color, 183, 198, 479

Default Print Paper Size, 181, 196, 424, 438

Default Setup, 249

Delayed Start, 187, 204, 430, 457, 549

Dell ColorTrack, 193, 246

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, 304 Page display format, 168

Dell ScanCenter, 560

Dell Service Tag Number, 178

Dell Supplies Management System, 557

Dell support website, 33

Dell technical support policy, 739

Details, 177

Determining Values, 644

DHCP, 487

Dimensions, 605

DIMM Size, 605

Direct connection setup, 115

Direct Fax, 396

Disabling Panel Lock, 554

Discard Size, 189, 207, 432, 462, 498

Dispense Motor Check, 465

Display of EWS, 447

Display problem, 685

DL, 270

DNS, 217, 225

Document cover, 641

Document glass, 641

Document Size, 185, 190, 202, 208, 322, 428, 430, 450, 454, 545

Draft Mode, 183, 198, 479

Driver, 31

Drivers and utilities CD, 31

DRPD, 205

DRPD Pattern, 189, 206, 432, 461, 495

Drum Refresh, 212

Drum Refresh Configuration Chart, 464

Drum Refresh Mode, 467

Duplex Print, 189, 206, 432, 462, 497

Duplexer, 40, 660

E

ECM, 189, 207, 432, 462, 498

Edit Print User Registration, 246

E-Mail Address, 249-250

E-Mail Alert, 165, 171, 223, 229, 488

E-Mail Alert Settings, 221, 231

E-Mail Alert Setup, 161

E-mail Alert Setup Page, 220

Email From Field, 425, 438

E-Mail Group, 249, 251

E-Mail Server Settings, 221, 229

Emulations, 606

Encryption, 237

End Time, 201

Entering Values, 646

Envelope, 191-192, 210-211, 267, 514-515

Envelope #10, 270

Environment, 606

environment settings of your web browser, 165

Error History, 194, 427, 470

Error-Code, 590

Ethernet, 215, 223, 607

Ethernet port, 41, 92, 94

Event Panel, 169

EWS, 488

EWS Settings, 222

Executive, 270

Expiration Mode, 201

Expiration Time, 201

Express Service Service Code, 178

F

fast scan, 644

Fault Time-Out, 180, 195, 423, 436

Fault Tone, 181, 196, 423, 435

Fax Activity, 189, 194, 207, 433, 462, 499

Fax Broadcast, 189, 207, 433, 463, 500

Fax Cover Page, 189, 206, 432, 461, 495, 550

Fax Defaults, 187, 203, 430, 553

Fax Forward Number, 189, 206

Fax Fwd Number, 432, 462, 497

FAX Group, 249, 257-258

Fax Header, 188, 206, 432, 461, 494

Fax Header Name, 188, 206, 432, 461, 494

Fax Menu, 548

Fax Number, 188, 206, 432, 461, 494

Fax Pending, 194

Fax Protocol, 189, 207, 433, 463

Fax Settings, 188, 204

FAX Speed Dial, 249, 258

Fax to, 548

Fax Transmit, 189, 207, 433, 463

Feed Roll Operation Check, 465

File Format, 190, 208, 429, 454, 544

Finding Information, 31

Firmware Version, 178

Flip on Long Edge, 296

Flip on Short Edge, 297

Folio, 270

Font, 182, 197, 581

PCL 5/PCL 6, 585

Pitch, 582

Point size, 582

Style, 581

Typefaces and fonts, 581

Weight, 581

Font Pitch, 183, 197, 477

Font Size, 183, 197, 476

Form Line, 183, 198, 477

Front cover, 40

FTP Client, 219, 235

Function Enabled, 199, 520

Function Enabled - Copy, 199

Function Enabled - Fax, 199

Function Enabled - Scan, 199

Fuser, 660

Fuser Motor Operation Check, 465

G

Gateway Address, 225, 427, 447, 487

Generate Self-Signed Certificate, 241

Generate Signed Certificate, 241

Get Environment Sensor Info, 467

Ghost Configuration Chart, 464

Group Dial, 472

H

Hex Dump, 183, 198, 478

Host I/F, 178-179

Host Name, 178-179, 231, 239

How to install option, 53

How to remove option, 649

How to replace retard roller, 627

How to set up, 33

How to use printer, 32

HTTP, 218, 227

HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication, 241

|

ID, 178-179

Identifying print media, 270

Identifying print paper, 270

Image Compression, 190, 208, 430, 456

Image Enhancement, 183, 198

Impression Number, 179

Infrastructure, 236

Init Print Meter, 518

Initialize NIC NVM and restart printer, 238

Initialize Print Meter, 443

Installing optional 250-sheet feeder, 59

Installing retard roller in tray, 629

Installing the optional accessories, 53

Installing toner cartridge, 50

Installing wireless adapter, 64

Interfaces, 606

Invalid Key, 435

Invalid Key Tone, 180, 195, 422

IP Address, 103, 162-163, 169, 216, 225, 234, 239, 243-244, 427, 446, 487

IP Address Mode, 427, 446

IP Filter, 220, 244

IP filter setup, 227

IPP, 218, 223, 226

IPsec, 242

IPSec Settings, 220, 243

IPv4, 234, 243

IPv6, 169, 217, 225, 234, 243

J

Job Completed, 435

Job Completed Tone, 181, 196, 423

Job History, 194, 427, 470

Job List, 163, 178

Job Name, 178-179

Job Status, 178

Job Submitted Time, 178-179

Job Time-Out, 180, 195, 424, 437

Job Type, 178-179

Junk Fax Setup, 188, 206, 432, 461, 493

L

Label, 191-192, 210-211, 268, 425, 440, 514-515

Landscape, 474

Layout, 183, 191, 431, 459, 553

LCD panel, 287

LDAP Server, 239-240

Left frame, 170

Legal, 270

Letter, 270

Letterhead Duplex Mode, 182, 197, 424, 438

Lighter/Darker, 185, 187, 190, 202, 204, 208, 428, 430, 451, 455, 457, 539, 546, 549

Line Monitor, 188, 205, 431, 460, 491

Line Termination, 183, 198, 479

Line Type, 188, 206, 431, 460, 492

Link Channel, 236

Link Quality, 236

LLTD, 219, 223

Loading an envelope in the SSF, 281

Loading letterhead, 278

Loading paper, 109

Loading print media, 273 SSF, 280

standard 250-sheet tray and optional 250-sheet feeder, 273

Location, 169, 177

Login Attempts, 200

Login Error, 200

Low Toner Alert, 436

Low Toner Alert Msg, 182, 197, 424, 438

Low Toner Alert Tone, 181, 196, 423

LPD, 217, 223, 226, 488

M

MAC Address, 236

Machine Check, 465

Machine Digital Certification, 241

Machine Ready, 435

Machine Ready Tone, 181, 195, 423

Main Motor Operation Check, 465

Maintenance, 613

Manual Registration Adjustments, 441

Margin Left/Right, 186, 190, 203, 208, 429-430, 453, 456, 541, 547

Margin Middle, 186, 190, 203, 208, 429-430, 453, 456, 542, 547

Margin Top/Bottom, 186, 190, 203, 208, 429-430, 453, 455, 541, 547

Max E-Mail Size, 190, 208

Max Email Size, 430, 456

Maximum memory, 605

Memory, 605

Memory Capacity, 178

Memory connector, 605

Memory module, 649

Memory speed, 605

Menu item, 173

Menu Settings, 179

MIB compatibility, 606

mm/inch, 181, 196, 424, 438

Modem Speed, 189, 207, 432, 462, 498

Monarch, 270

MonoCount (Limit), 247

Monthly Settings, 201

MQ Chart, 464

Multiple Up, 614

Multiple-Up, 186, 203, 429, 453, 541

N

NCR, 263

Network, 94

Network connection setup, 118

Network Firmware Version, 178

Network TWAIN, 218, 223, 227

Network Type, 236

New Password, 199

No Account User Print, 193, 246

No carbon required, 263

No. of Sheets, 179

Non-Dell Toner, 192, 425, 443, 518

Numeric keypad, 286

Ordering supplies, 44, 614

Orientation, 182, 197, 474

Original Type, 202, 428, 450, 539

OS, 606

OS compatibility, 605

Other problems, 730

Out of Paper, 436

Out of Paper Alert Tone, 423

Out of Paper Tone, 181, 196

Output Color, 183

Output Result, 179

Output Size, 183

Output Tray, 177

Owner, 178-179

0

OCR, 263

One Touch Dial button, 285

OnHook, 549

Online Help, 165, 171

Operation, 606

Operator panel, 41

Operator Panel Buttons, 285

Optical character recognition, 263

Optional 250-sheet feeder, 40, 660

Order Supplies at, 165, 171

P

Page display format, 168

Page orientation, 266, 279

Panel, 487

Panel Language, 182, 197, 424, 439, 530

Panel Lock Set, 184, 199, 519

Panel Settings, 194, 426, 469

Panel Settings page, 194, 287

Paper, 261

Characteristics, 261

Curl, 261

Fiber content, 262

Grain direction, 262

Moisture content, 262

Smoothness, 262

Weight,261

Paper Density, 191, 209, 425, 513

Paper jam location, 660

Paper Size, 182, 197, 466, 472

Paper Tray, 182

Paper Type, 271, 466

Paper Used, 246

Parts name, 39

Password, 227, 235, 238, 240, 244

PCL, 472

Font,475

PCL 5/PCL 6, 585

PCL Fonts List, 194, 426, 469

PCL Macro List, 194, 427, 469

PCL printer driver, 115, 118

PCL Settings, 182, 197

PDF Fonts List, 194, 427

PDL, 606

Peer-to-Peer, 136

Phone Book, 249, 471

Phone connector, 41, 92, 95, 607

Pitch Configuration Chart, 464

Plain, 191-192, 210, 425, 440, 514-515

Plain Thick, 191-192, 210, 514-515

Play of Sound, 465

Point and Print, 133

Polling Receive, 550

Port Settings, 222

Port Status, 223

Port9100, 217, 223, 226, 488

Portrait, 474

Power connector, 41

Power On Wizard, 213

Power Saver Time, 501

Power Saver Time - Deep Sleep, 180, 195

Power Saver Time - Sleep, 180, 195

Power Saver Timer, 434

Power Saver Timer Deep Sleep, 422

Power Saver Timer Sleep, 422

Power Saver Wake Up, 422, 434

Power Saver Wake Up - OffHook Wake Up, 180, 195

Power supply, 605

Power switch, 40

Prefix Dial, 189, 206, 432, 462, 497

Prefix Dial Num, 432, 462, 498

Prefix Dial Number, 189, 206

Premier, 193

Print cartridge level, 176

Print Color Regi Chart, 441

Print Drivers / Remote Client Account, 235

Print from USB, 199

Print from USB Defaults, 191, 431

Print ID, 182, 196, 424, 437, 507

Print media, 261, 614 Source, 266, 279

Print Meter, 194, 427

Print Mode, 183

Print quality guarantee, 606

Print Server Reports, 215

Print Server Settings, 164, 170, 215, 222, 447

Print Server Setup Page, 215

Print side, 266, 279

Print Text, 182, 196, 424, 437, 507

Print User Settings, 247

Print Volume, 164, 170, 245

Printer Bitmap, 169

Printer Driver, 147, 149

Printer Events, 177

Printer Information, 164, 171, 177

Printer Jobs, 163, 170, 178

Printer Maintenance, 209

Printer Page Count, 246

Printer paper, 261

Printer Revision Levels, 178

Printer Serial Number, 178

Printer Settings, 164, 179, 195

Printer settings utility, 559

Printer software, 557

Printer specification, 605

Printer Status, 163, 170, 176

Printer Status Window, 557

Printer Type, 177

Printing, 291

Printing on letterhead, 265

Printing problem, 686

Printing Speed, 177

Problems with Optional Accessories, 727

Processor Speed, 178

Product Information Guide, 32

Proof Print, 533

Protocol Monitor, 194, 427, 470

Q

Quantity, 183, 198, 478

Quick Launch Utility, 559

Quick Reference Guide, 32

R

RAM Disk, 182, 196, 424, 437, 508

RARP, 487

Ready / Error LED, 285

Rear side, 466

Receive Mode, 188, 205, 431, 460, 490

Recommended paper, 262

Recurrence, 201

Recycled, 192, 210, 514-515

Red Hat, 147

Red Hat Enterprise Linux, 147, 605

Redial Attempts, 188, 206, 432, 461, 493

Redial Delay, 188, 206, 432, 461, 493

Reduce/Enlarge, 185, 201, 428, 449, 537

Re-enter Password, 199

Refresh, 172

REGI CLUTCH Operation Check, 465

Registration Adjustments, 441

Regular, 193

Relative humidity, 606

Remote Rcv Tone, 432, 461, 494

Remote Receive, 188, 206, 432, 461, 494

Remote Receive Tone, 188, 206

Removing a optional memory module, 649

Removing optional 250-sheet feeder, 652

Removing options, 649

Removing paper jam, 659

From ADF, 661

From duplexer, 676

From fuser, 672

From optional 250-sheet feeder, 677

From single sheet feeder, 664

From tray, 668

Removing retard roller in tray, 628

Removing toner cartridge, 616

Removing wireless adapter, 654

Replacing the retard roller, 627

Reports, 194

Resend Delay, 188, 206, 432, 461, 493

Reset Defaults, 213, 442

Reset Print Server, 238

Resetting Defaults, 308

Resident font, 585

Resident scalable fonts, 585

Resolution, 187, 190, 204, 208, 430, 454, 457, 544, 548

Safety information, 32

Scalable font, 583

Scan Defaults, 190, 429

Scan to Application, 543

Scan to E-mail, 542

Scan To Network, 429

Scan to Network, 190, 208, 235, 454, 543

Scan to USB Memory, 542

ScanButton Manager, 560

Search PhoneBook, 548

Secure Print, 530

Secure Receive, 521

Secure Receive Set, 200

Secure Settings, 184, 198

Security, 238

Security Settings, 237

Select Reorder URL, 193

Select Tray, 185, 191, 201, 427, 431, 448, 458, 534, 551

Selecting letterhead, 264

Selecting paper, 263

Selecting preprinted form, 264

Selecting pre-punched paper, 264

Sending print job, 292

Sent Fax Forward, 189, 206

Sent Fax Fwd, 432, 462

Server Address, 194, 249, 253

Server Address Book, 425, 438

Server Phone Book, 425, 438

Service code, 33

Service tag, 33

Set Available Time, 200

Set Date, 192, 425, 440

Set Password, 165, 171, 238

Set Time, 192, 425, 440

Shared printing, 131

Sharpness, 185, 190, 202, 208, 428, 430, 451, 455, 540, 546

Side button, 40

Single Sheet Feeder, 661

Single Sheet Feeder (SSF), 40

slow scan, 644-645

SMB, 219, 223

SMB Client, 220, 235

SNMP, 219, 223

SNMP Configuration, 232

SNMP UDP, 488

Software update, 558

Speed Dial, 194

SSF Paper Size, 185, 191, 201, 317, 428, 431, 448, 458, 535

SSF Paper Type, 185, 191, 201, 318, 428, 431, 449, 459, 536

SSID, 236

SSL/TLS, 220, 241

Standard 250-sheet tray, 40, 661

Start, 465-466

Start Time, 200

Status Monitor Console, 557

Status Monitor Console for Linux, 571

Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh, 565

Status of printer supplies, 613

Status Window, 560

Storage, 607

Storage humidity range, 607

Stored Documents, 194, 427, 471

Storing consumables, 615

Storing print media, 269, 291, 614

Straightest lines, 644

Subnet Mask, 427, 446, 487

Substitute Tray, 182, 196, 424, 438, 508-509

Supported print paper, 270

SUSE, 605

SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 150

SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11, 154

Symbol Set, 182, 197, 476, 586 For PCL 5/PCL 6, 586

System Settings, 180, 194-195, 222, 422, 426, 469

System Settings page, 194

System settings report, 56, 61, 67

T

TCP/IP, 224

TCP/IP Settings, 216, 224

Telephone, 205

Telephone/Fax, 205

Telnet, 219, 223, 227

Temperature, 606

TIFF File Format, 190, 208, 430, 456

Time Format, 192, 425, 439

Time Zone, 192, 425, 440

Time-Out, 226-227, 240, 503

Tone/Pulse, 188, 206, 431, 461, 492

Toner access cover, 40

Toner cartridge, 50

Toner Refresh, 212

Toner Refresh Mode, 467

Tool Box, 560

Top frame, 168

Trap Notification, 234

Tray 1 Custom Size - X, 193, 259, 426, 445

Tray 1 Custom Size - Y, 193, 259, 426, 445

Tray 1 Display Popup, 259, 426, 445

Tray 1 Paper Size, 193, 259, 426, 444

Tray 1 Paper Type, 193, 259, 426, 444

Tray 2 Display Popup, 259, 426, 445

Tray 2 Paper Size, 259, 426, 445

Tray 2 Paper Type, 259, 426, 445

Tray Settings, 164, 171, 193, 259, 426, 526

Troubleshooting, 560, 685

Typeface, 581

U

Unacceptable paper, 263

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS, 28

Update, 560

Update Address Book, 219, 223, 227

Upper Limit for Color Print, 247

Upper Limit for Monochrome Print, 248

USB, 607

USB Port, 182, 197

USB port, 41, 92-93

USB printing, 115

User Registration, 246

User setup disk creating tool, 558

Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, 163

V

Verifying IP settings, 106

W

Wall jack connector, 41, 92, 94, 607

Warranty, 740

Warranty information, 32

Web Link Customization, 193, 214

Web Services on Devices, 601

Weekly Settings, 201

WEP, 237

White sheet, 641

Width guide, 110, 275

WINS, 217, 226

Wired Network

Ethernet, 482

IP Filter, 489

Protocol, 487

Reset LAN, 489

TCP/IP, 486

Wireless Adapter, 64

Wireless adapter socket, 41

Wireless Settings, 216, 236

WPA-PSK, 237

WSD, 218, 223, 226, 601

X

XPS printer driver, 115, 120

Y

Yellow terminator, 96